
COPYRIGHT DEPOSm 



MACHINE DRAWING 



BOOKS BY 

CARL L, SVENSEN 



{Published by D. Van Nostrand Company) 

A HANDBOOK ON PIPING 

6X9. 359 pages. 359 illustrations. 
8 folding plates. 

ESSENTIALS OF DRAFTING 

A Textbook on Mechanical Drawing. 
Second Edition. Revised 6x9. 193 
pages. 450 illustrations. 250 problems 
and layouts. 

MACHINE DRAWING 

A Text and Problem Book for Tech- 
nical Students and Draftsmen. 6x9. 
216 pages. 338 illustrations. 200 prob- 
lems and layouts. 



{Published by McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc.) 

MECHANICAL DRAWING 

For High Schools. (With Thomas E. 
French.) 212 pages. 444 illustrations. 



MACHINE DRAWING 

A TEXT AND PROBLEM BOOK 
FOR TECHNICAL STUDENTS 
AND DRAFTSMEN 



BY 



,^ 



CARL L> SVENSEN, M.E. 

ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF ENGINEERING DRAWING IN THE OHIO STATE UNIVERSITY, 

MEMBER AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS, SOCIETY FOR 

THE PROMOTION OF ENGINEERING EDUCATION, ETC. 



388 ILLUSTRATIONS 




NEW YORK 
D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 

Eight Warren Street 
1921 



^^ 2vr 



<^t^5 



Copyright 1921 by 
D. Van Nostrand Company 



OCT 25 mi 



; 



y 



po 



PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 



0)CLA627415 



A/\0 I 



^3- 






PREFACE 

Machine drawing may be considered as : 

1. A final stage of a course in mechanical drawing. 

2. A course in practical drafting. 

3. A transition course between mechanical drawing and machine design. 

4. An introductory or first course in machine design. 

5. A course for the correlation of drawing and engineering. 

The importance of such a course is well recognized but the means of 
attaining success is not so readily available as for many other courses. 
This book is planned to make available, a guide for the development of 
an understanding of the relation of machine drawing to engineering. 
The text is kept as brief as a clear presentation of the subject matter 
permits. It is designed for advanced courses for students who have had 
previous instruction in mechanical drawing. A brief chapter on ele- 
mentary principles is given as an introduction to the course and for re- 
view purposes or reference. 

A complete treatment of the subject of working drawings, drafting 
room practice and idiomatic expressions of the engineering language is 
followed by a chapter on the principles and practice of dimensioning. 
The classification of size specification by means of two kinds of dimen^ 
sions, six cases of the elements of dimensioning, and four systems of 
dimensioning will, it is hoped, make this subject a definite study. 

A study of the common machine details, empirical machine design, 
jigs and fixtures, etc., are included as properly belonging to an advanced 
course in machine drawing. 

A textbook obtains much of its value from the number, variety, and 
character of the problems which it contains. The collection of problems 
in this book (about two hundred) is arranged under headings in a single 
chapter where they can be conveniently found. Necessary instructions, 
hints, and references to the text are given so that the student has a definite 
task whether assigned a simple machine part or the study of a complete 
machine. The problems are presented by layouts or other specifications 
so that the instructor is relieved of the preliminary details which or- 
dinarily arise when assigning machine drawing studies. 

The scope of the text and the variety and extent of the illustrations 
and problems is such that it is believed that the special needs of thorough 
courses in machine drawing in technical institutions can be efficiently 
served. C. L. S. 

Columbus, Ohio, 
September, 1921. 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Preface v 

CHAPTER I 

Elementary Principles 1 

Machine Drawings — The Pencil — The Scale — Scales used on Machine Drawings 
— Inking — Care of the Pen — Character of Lines — Cleaning and Erasing — 
Accuracy and Neatness — Shop Drawings — Reading Views — Placing Views — 
First and Second Positions of Side Views — Auxiliary Views — Sectional Views — 
Engineering Handbooks — A. S. M. E. and Other Standards — Lettering — 
Slant Letters and Numbers — Lower Case Letters — Fractions — Titles. 

CHAPTER II 
Fastenings for Machinery 14 

Kinds of Fastenings — Screw Threads — The Square Thread — Pitch and Lead — 
Conventional Representation of Screw Threads — Threaded Holes — Speci- 
fications of Screw Threads — Pipe Threads — U. S. Standard Bolts and Nuts — • 
To Draw a Bolt Head or Nut Across Flats — To Draw a Bolt Head or Nut 
Across Corners — Rounded Type of Bolt — Bolt Chart — Bolts and Studs — Cap 
Screws — Machine Screws — Set Screws — S. A. E. Bolts — Miscellaneous Bolts — 
Miscellaneous Screws — Locking Devices — Flanges and Bolting — Strength and 
Number of Bolts — Stress in Bolts — Keys — Riveting — Rivet Heads — Rivet 
Holes — Calking — Lap Joints — Butt Joints — Miscellaneous Connections — 
Rolled Steel Shapes — Pins and Washers. 

CHAPTER III 
Machine Drawing 38 

Working Drawings — Classes of Machine Drawings — Main Assembly Drawings — 
Detail Drawings — Particular Considerations — Making a Detail Drawing — • 
Tracing — Order of Inking — Blue Printing — Assembly Drawings — Making 
an Assembly Drawing — Identification, Record, Etc. — Idioms of Drawing — 
Treatment of Sectional Views — "Sliced" Sections — Half Sections — Symbols 
for Sectioning — Common Uses and Treatments of Sections — Revolved Sec- 
tions — Treatment of Ribs and Special Sections — "Herringbone" Sectioning — 
"Phantom" Views — Developed Sections — Contour and Continuity — Special 
Views, 

CHAPTER IV 

Principles and Practice of Dimensioning 59 

Dimensioning — Notation of Dimensioning — Dimension Line — Arrowhead — 
Witness Line — Pointing Line — Machined Surfaces — The Finish Symbol — • 
Elements of Dimensioning — Size Dimensions — Location Dimensions — The 

vii 



viii CONTENTS 

Six Cases — Systems of Dimensioning — Location of Dimensions — Methods of 
Finishing — Dimensioning Arcs and Curves — Dimensioning Angles and Tapers 
— Dimensioning in Crowded Places — Dimensioning Shafts and Cylindrical 
Pieces — Dimensioning Wood Constructions — Dimensioning for Interchange- 
able Manufacture — Limit Dimensions — Basic Dimensions — General Rules — 
Checking Drawings. 

CHAPTER V 
Machine Details 73 

Machine Operations — Graphical Data and Dimensions — Engine Details — 
Pistons — Crossheads — Connecting Rods — Eccentrics — Cranks — Levers, Han- 
dles, Etc. — Stuffing Boxes — Fillets, Rounds, Arcs, Etc. — Flanges. 

CHAPTER VI 
Bearings, Pulleys, Etc 86 

Bearings — Bushings — Bearing Metals — Babbitt — Bearing '' Boxes " — Simple 
Bearings — Hangers — Pulleys — Belt Length — Horsepower Transmitted by 
Belts — Pulley Proportions — ''Crowning" — Rims — Pulley Arms — Split Pulleys. 

CHAPTER VII 
Shafting and Couplings 96 

Shafting — Standard Sizes — Special Shafts — To Compute the Diameter of a 
Shaft — Twisting Moment — Hollow Shaft — Horsepower Transmitted — Table 
of Constants — Shaft for Bending and Twisting — Shaft Details — A Shafting 
Drawing — Couplings — Solid Sleeve Couplings — Clamp Couplings — Flange 
CoupHngs — Clutch Couplings, 

CHAPTER VIII 

Jigs, Fixtures and Details 104 

Jigs and Fixtures — Fixtures — Jigs — ^Jig and Fixture Drawings — Considerations — 
A Jig Drawing — A Fixture Drawing — Fixture Design — Standard Parts for 
Jigs and Fixtures — Standard Bushings — Standard Parts and Details — Shop 
Appliances — T-Slots, Etc. 

CHAPTER IX 
Gears and Cams 114 

Pulleys and Gears — Ratio of Velocities — Gear Teeth — Gear Terms — Spur Gears 
— Spur Gear Drawing — Bevel Gears — Worm Gearing — Cams — To Draw a 
Plate Cam — Pitch Line — Roller Modification — Kinds of Motion — Offset 
Follower — Cam with Flat Follower — Cyhndrical Cam. 

CHAPTER X 
Piping Drawing 126 

Piping — Uses and Materials — Pipe Sizes — Piping Fittings, Valves, Etc. — 
Flanged Fittings — Valves — Valve Seats — Conventional Representation — 
Piping Drawings — Dimensioning — Piping Sketches — Developed or Single Plane 
Drawings. 

CHAPTER XI 
Problems and Studies 143 



MACHINE DRAWING 



CHAPTER I 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 



1. In the practice of engineering there is a constant dependence upon 
mechanical drawing as a means of specification for machine construc- 
tions. Its use in the industries has led to the development of what might 
be called applied mechanical drawing as distinguished from the theory 
taught in mechanical drawing and descriptive geometry. This applica- 
tion has brought about certain practical modifications or variations from 
theory. 

The drawings which represent present practice in the description and 
specification of machinery are called machine drawings. 

2. The Pencil. — For good work it is important that the pencils 
should be of uniform quality and of the right degree of hardness. Use an 
H or 2H pencil for lettering, figuring, etc., a 4// for detail drawings and a 
6H for design drawings. 






Fig. 1. The Pencil Point. 



3. The time consumed as well as the quality of the drawing depend 
largely upon the attention given to keeping the pencil point carefully 
sharpened. Remove the wood with a knife as at I, Fig. 1, being par- 
ticular not to cut the lead. With fine sandpaper or a file shape the lead 
to a long conical point as at II. For line work many draftsmen use a 
''chisel" or ''wedge" point, shown at III. 

1 



2 MACHINE DRAWING 

4. The Scale. — Scales are used for measuring and ^'laying-off " 
distances. For machine drawing the mechanical engineers' (or archi- 
tects') open divided scale is required. Two common forms are the ''flat" 
scale, Fig. 2, and the ''triangular" scale, Fig. 3. The views which repre- 




FiG. 2. The Fiat Scale. 

sent an object are drawn full size when it is practicable to do so. When 
this is not possible, use proportional or reduced scales to lay off distances 
on the drawing. 

5. The following scales are used on machine drawings, ?>" = 1 ft., 

1V2'' = 1 ft., V' = 1 ft., v/' = 1 ft., V2'' = 1 ft., Vs" = 1 ft., V/' = 1 ft.. 




hi, hi, hill, I, I, I, III, I, III, I, I, III, I, hi, hi, III, hill 

Fig. 3. The Triangular Scale. 

Vie'' = 1 ft., and Vs'' = 1 ft. The scale of 3" = 1 ft., is often called 
quarter size, and V/2' = 1 ft., is called eighth size. These two reduc- 
tions are much used on detail drawings. 

6. The scale 3" = 1 ft., means that the measurements on the drawing 
are one fourth the measurements of the actual object, or that each one 
fourth inch on the drawing represents one inch on the object. In this 
case a distance equal to three inches is divided into 12 parts, each part 
representing one inch. These parts are further divided to represent 
quarter inches and other fractions. 

7. Half size (6'' = 1 ft.) drawings are worked from the full size scale. 
In such cases use the half inch for an inch. Never divide the dimensions 
of the piece when drawing to a reduced scale. Measure with the reduced 
scale and think full size. Always put figures representing the full size 
of the machine or part on the drawing regardless of the scale. Distances 
measured with different scales are illustrated in Fig. 4. 

8. Inking. — The ruling or drawing pen is used for inking the lines after 
the pencil drawing is finished. Black drawing ink is always used for 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 



making drawings. Ink is placed between the nibs of the pen with the 
quill which is attached to the ink bottle stopper. Care must be taken 



l5 



7 " Fulf Size 



1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 { 1 1 1 { 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 



^i 



Half Size 



-1 



r 



^ jf " 3 = I l^i' or Quarter Size 
g^ 



, _/ " /2=if^f'Or E7igh fh Size 



\yz 



Fig. 4. Measurements to Scale. 



to prevent ink from getting on the outside of the pen. The proper 
amount of ink is shown in Fig. 5. 



Fu/I Size 
Fig. "5. 

When inking, the pen should be held in a nearly vertical position and 
guided by the T square or triangle. Keep the point of the pen away from 
the angle formed by the paper and the guide. Do not hold the pen too 
tightly, or press against the guide. Both nibs of the pen must touch the 
paper. Frequent cleaning of the pen is necessary to obtain good, sharp 
lines. 



4 MACHINE DRAWING 

9. The pens for the compasses are filled and cared for in the same way. 
The legs of the compasses should be perpendicular to the paper and ad- 
justed so that both nibs of the pen touch the paper. When drawing 
small or short arcs a smaller amount of ink should be used in the bow 
pen to avoid wider '^spots'' at the ends of the arcs. When setting to a 



Right 



r 



Pencil^ 

Ink- 
^Smooth joint 



Dn 



Wrong 



Wrong 



'"X 



c — ^ 



Wrcng 



m 



^ 



X' 



15 



Fig. C. Joining Lines and Arcs. 

radius, the ink line should come exactly over the pencil line to make 
sure of good joints at points of tangency as in Fig. 6, which also shows the 
effect of inking on the inside or outside of a pencil line. 

10. Dotted lines should be drawn with careful attention to detail. 
A dotted line starts with a dot when it represents the extent of a surface 
as at ^, Fig. 7, but when part of a line is full a space is left between the 
full line and the first dot as at B, At a corner the two dots which form 
the angle should touch. Dotted arcs always start at tangent points as in 
Fig. 8 which shows a ''one dot," a ''two dot" and a "three dot" arc. 



i— J 




i__! I 



M 

I 



U 



r-1 
\ I 



Fig. 7. Dotted Lines. 



n m 

Fig. 8. Dotted Arcs. 



Note the positions of the centers and tangent points. The dots must be 
of uniform length and spacing whether used for arcs or straight lines. 
Make dotted lines much lighter than full lines to give contrast to the 
drawing. 

The order of penciling and inking when making a working drawing'is 
given in Arts. 75 and 76. The general order of inking is: arcs and 
circles; horizontal lines; vertical lines; inclined lines. 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 5 

IL Character of Lines. — All pencil lines should be fine, clear, and 
sharp. For most purposes continuous pencil lines may be used. If 
the drawing is not to be inked the final lines must be distinct but not 
too wide. Pencil lines for dimensions, sections, etc., should be fine, 
gray lines. A 2H pencil is suitable for making dotted lines on pencil 
drawings. 



Fu// fine forv'/s/b/e sur/bces 

Poffed/ine for /nv/s/bfe surhces 

Center line 

Dimension ancf extension fines 

Broken /ine 

Light tine far shac/ed draiv/n^ 

Shade //ne for shaded druiv/ng 

L/ne for indicot/ng flos/f/on of 
a section 



Used tor cond/f/ons /%?/ 
spec/f/edaix)^e crocton 
' graphic charts, etc. 
Mqyiiee/ther//ghtorhea<// 



■ J 



Fig. 9. Sample Lines. 

If the drawing is to be inked, it is not necessary to use different kinds 
of lines for penciling. The character and weight of ink lines is given in 
Fig. 9. 

12. For general drawings a fairly wide line should be adopted as it 
wears better and gives better results when blue prints are made. The 
width of line will depend somewhat upon the drawing. Large, simple 
drawings require a wide line, while small intricate drawings necessitate 
narrower lines. Drawings which are large and still have considerable 
detail in parts require more than one width of line. An experienced 
draftsman will use wide lines for the large and simple parts, reducing 
them for the complicated places in such manner that the different widths 
of lines are not noticeable. 

13. Cleaning and Erasing. — Drawings which have been worked over 
for a length of time become soiled, due to rubbing over the pencil lines 
with the T square and triangles, perspiration from the hands, and the 
dust which settles on them. For this reason, the drawing board, tools 
and instruments should be wiped with a piece of cloth before starting 
work. Do not sharpen a pencil over the drawing or board. Keep the 



6 



MACHINE DRAWING 



hands clean, especially if they have a tendency to become moist. All the 
tools should be cleaned occasionally with a damp cloth and thoroughly 
dried before using. Sometimes the part of the drawing not being worked 
on can be covered with an extra sheet of paper. 

14. Either pencil or ink lines can be erased when necessary by using a 
soft red or green rubber. Always rub in the direction of the line. Do 
not use a knife or ink eraser as they destroy the surface of the paper or 
tracing cloth. Be sure that an ink line is dry before erasing it. Care and 
patience are necessary when erasing ink. Do not dig into the paper or 
overheat the eraser by attempting to remove a line too quickly. An 
erasing shield of celluloid or metal is convenient to save lines which are 
not to be removed. Art gum is very useful for erasing pencil lines and 
for cleaning the entire drawing when it is finished. 

15. Accuracy and Neatness. — The question of time or efficiency 
enters into all work and should be considered in studying engineering 
subjects. Accuracy and neatness not only save time in the study of 
drafting but are absolute essentials if worth while progress is to be made. 

Be sure that the paper is tacked down flat on the board and that the T 
square head is not loose. 

Keep all instruments clean and in proper adjustment, ready for use. 
Always clean lettering and ruling pens before filling and after using. 

Keep the pencil points sharp all the time. Draw lightly — do not 
groove the paper. 







1 


; 1 








/ ' 

















1 

I 












Fig. 10. A Three- View Drawing. 

Pencil lines may run a short distance beyond corners when first laying 
out but do not draw them clear across the sheet. Do not draw extra 
lines as it takes time to erase them. Consider the order in which the 
fines of the different views are drawn, working from the general center 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 



and ''block in" lines to the details. Make similar measurements at 
one time. Have a system and follow it. 

Do not slight small details or have ''fuzzy/' indistinct corners and 
joints. Make every part of the drawing accurately to scale and per- 
fectly clear. Too much freehand work, dull pencils, lack of contrast in 
lines, inaccurate measurements and lack of exactness in representation, 
make "sloppy" drawings which often prove very expensive. Clear 
thinking should be expressed in clear, easily read drawings. 

16. Shop Drawings. — Drawings for machinery are made up of views 
obtained by orthographic projection and arranged in accord with the 
third angle. The number of views depends upon the object or construc- 
tion to be described, two or three generally being sufficient. Each view 
shows the object as seen from a different position; from above (top view), 
from in front (front view), and from one side (side view). Fig. 10. 




Fig. 11. A Two- View Drawing. 

17. A two view drawing is shown in Fig. 11. Three views of a black- 
smith's "sow" are given in Fig. 12. The top view shows surfaces A' , B 
and A. The meaning of the horizontal lines which limit surface B cannot 
be understood without looking at the end view which shows that the 
surface B is on a lower level than surfaces A and A'. 

The representation of a sloping surface is shown in the drawing of the 



-a' 



A 


-^ 


B 


/is 






\ 























-Length- 




True W/dfn' 



Fig. 1 2. Reading a Drawing. 



Fig. 1.3. "Projected" Area. 



8 



MACHINE DRAWING 



''swage," Fig. 13. The "projected area '' of such a surface is less than 
its true area. 

Hi The representation of a cyUndrical surface is illustrated in Fig. 14 
by the shaded areas. If a cylinder has its axis perpendicular to a plane 




Fig. 14. Projection of Curved Surfaces. 

its projection on that plane is a circle. When the axis is parallel to a 
plane the cylinder appears as a rectangle. 

18. Placing Views. — The views are generally arranged as illustrated 
in Figs. 10 and 15. This is called the first position for the right side view. 
































— 1 




< > 




























1 









Fig. 15. 

First Position — Right Side View. 



Fig. 16. 
Second Position — Right Side View. 



Sometimes, however, it is desirable to revolve the side plane about an 
axis formed by its intersection with the horizontal plane. This gives the 
second position of the right side view, Fig. 16. The second position is 
















f \ 


r^ 





/\ \ 


/ v\^ 


\ N\ 


\ 


^/ 




1 


^ 







1 ^ 










1 







Fig. 17. 
First Position — Left Side View. 



Fig. 18. 
Second Position — Left Side View. 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 9 

used when a piece is rather flat and wide. It allows the use of a larger 
scale. Sometimes it is the only way in which the views can be contained 
on a given size of drawing paper. 

The ^rs^ position of the left side view is shown in Fig. 17, and the second 
'position in Fig. 18. 

19. Auxiliary Views. — When it is desirable to show the true size or 
shape of a surface which is not parallel to the usual planes of projection, 





Fig. 19. Auxiliary View. 

an auxiliary view is drawn, Fig. 19. The chart Fig. 20, illustrates two 
methods of solution as applied to three cases. 

20. Sectional Views. — When it is necessary to show the interior of an 
object or machine more clearly than can be done with dotted lines, an 
imaginary cutting plane is used. The part of the object in front of the 
cutting plane is removed, leaving the object as in Fig. 21. The cut 
surface is section lined and the view is called a section. The subject of 
sections is treated at length in Chapter III. 

21. Engineering Handbooks. — The value of handbooks for designers 
and engineers is too well established to require comment. There is a 
mass of detail information and dimensions more or less standardized, 
which must be adhered to when making machine drawings. Every 
engineer should possess at least one handbook which bears directly upon 
his work and should learn how to use it. Use a handbook when checking 



10 



MACHINE DRAWING 



CENTER LINE METHOD 




Case I 



Case 2 





REEERENCE LINE METHOD 




Fig. 20. Auxiliary View Chart. 





:5 ^L^ 



I 



m 



Fig. 21. Sectional View. 












— 


-- 























1 








^ 


i 


i 


if 



12: 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 



11 



drawings of machinery as well as when making new drawings. Learn 
the location of such tables as are most frequently used. 



Ufvirs 




ii 



V-5-A V-6 — 4 P— 6— i i— 5i-4 



-5 -A [—5—1 



-e^/ 



V-5- 




m^-^Ki /' 






I ^2 



I ^P 



a Q C (31 U J D 



l—Ji-i \^5sA \^3i-^ I— 5i— I 1—5-— I 









1^ \i 
'll 



,\\^/A-// j\iy<l 3 



it*a 



' s^ 

C5-] 



B P' 'R B 1 2 3 

U5-I k-^J U-5-I 1-5-1 U-5-1 U5-1 



P_ 



V-5 A 

J 3 

U5^--l V-5-^ 

Fig. 22. CaDital Letters and Numbers 




1-5-A 



& . F cS^ Q a 

1—^—1 k-5— I 1—5—1 k-r^-1 I— 0—1 



22. A.S.M.E. and Other Standards. — Reliable information can be 
obtained from the publications of the various engineering societies. 
Some of the standards are so widely used that the machine draftsman 
must be familiar with them. The American Society of Mechanical 
Engineers publishes standards for: Boilers (Paper 1469), Graphic Pre- 
sentation (Paper lOlX), Machine Screws (Papers 1142 and 1142A), 
Pipe Flanges, Fittings, etc. (Papers 1430 and 1654), and for many other 

1^ ^ TF ^fQ ^<5" 



'2^4 



Fio. 23. Slant Fractions. 



engineering matters. For automobile work the standard data sheets of 
the Society of Automotive Engineers should be consulted. The standards 
of some of the large manufacturers are in universal use. 



12 



MACHINE DRAWING 



23. Lettering. — A certain degree of expertness in lettering is assumed 
to be one of the qualifications of present-day engineers. The necessary- 
requirements are included in Chap. II of the "Essentials of Drafting." 

abed eff^ h rj 
k I m n o_p q, r 
s f u V w x^y 



Fig. 24. Lower Case Letters. 

The proportions and forms of plain slant letters and numbers are 
shown in Figs. 22, 23, and 24. The slope is about three to eight. Note 
the arrows which indicate the directions in which the various lines are 
drawn. A scale of units is given at the ends of the lines. By placing 
a straight edge across the page and coincident with the same scale line 
at both ends, the positions of the horizontal strokes of the letters can 
be observed. The figures under each letter indicate the width in terms 
of the same units as are given for the height. 



500 GALLON 
STEAM JACKETED KETTLE 



SCALE Is '/ foot- 
DRAWN BY DFA. 
TRACED BY W E. 
CHECKED BY C S 



APPROVED BYTfW'J 
DATE Sept /2. /920 
ORDER NO. B-^62 
REVISED Jan a. 1921 



Draw. No. 4-C-I45 



Fig. 25. A Hand Lettered Title. 

24. The proportions of the fractions in comparison with whole 
numbers are shown in Fig. 23. The division line is always horizontal 
with a small space between the fraction numbers and the line. 

25. Titles for drawings vary a great deal as an inspection of a few 
blue prints will show. The titles for detail drawings may or may not 
'Contain the name and location of the company. The name of the 
machine, its size and number, the names of details, the scale, the date, 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 



13 



and the names or initials of the draftsman and engineer should be given. 
A hand lettered title is shown in Fig. 25 and a printed title form in Fig. 
26. The record strip is much used and consists of a narrow strip ex- 



Material list for.. 



./Apparatus 



THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF 

B.F. Sturtevant Co. of Canada, Ltd. 
Galt. Ontario. 

and subject to return upon request. 

IT IS TO SC USED ONLY FOR THE PU/fPOSE FOR WHICH IT 
WAS eXPRESSLr LOAHED, AND NOT TO BE USED IN ANY 
WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF THE COMPANY 



Commenced 



D^TC 



CuSTOMEffS NO 



Ordco No 



Cwccf<fO 



Fig. 23. A Printed Title. 



tending the whole length or width of the sheet. It contains the title, 
record of changes, general notes and other desired information. 



CHAPTER 11 
FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 

26. Kinds of Fastenings. — Practical requirements of manufacture and 
use necessitate the use of separate pieces in the construction of machinery. 
The common fastenings are screws, bolts, rivets, pins, keys, hooks, 
slides, etc. 

27. Screw Threads. — In addition to their use as fastenings, screws 
are used to transmit motion, to apply force, and for the adjustment of 
parts. A screw is a cylinder with a helical groove which forms the thread, 
Fig. 27. 

Secfion showing 

form of f bread Ex fen or 




. -Roof d/'omefer 



Outride diameter 



Depth of thread 



Fig. 27. Screw Thread. 



The usual forms of screw threads are given in Fig. 28. The form 
shown at I is the United States Standard, also called Sellers, or Franklin 
Institute. The V's are flattened which makes the thread stronger than 
if left sharp as in the V thread shown at 11. The Whitworth, or English 
Standard thread is shown at III. These three forms are well adapted for 
fastening parts of machinery together. 

28. The square thread, shown at IV, and the Acme thread, shown 
at V, are used for transmitting forces and motions. The Acme thread 
permits the use of a split nut. The buttress or breechlock thread is 
shown at VI. It is designed to take pressure in one direction only. 
This form has the strength in shear of the V form but avoids the tendency 
to burst the nut. A similar form called the Harvey grip, is shown at 
VII. The knuckle or rounded thread is illustrated at VIII. This 
thread is often rolled in sheet metal, as for screw caps, electric fixtures, 
etc. For some purposes it is cast in a mold. 

29. Pitch and Lead. — The pitch of a screw thread is the distance from 
one thread point to the next, measured parallel to the axis. The lead is 

14 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



15 



the distance which the screw will move along the axis for one turn. For 
a single thread the pitch and lead are equal. For a double thread the 
lead is two times the pitch. 




Fig. 28. Forms of Screw Threads. 

30. Conventional Representation of Screw Threads. — It is not often 
necessary to draw the helix representing a screw thread, as there are a 
number of conventional representations in use designed to save time. 
These serve the purpose just as well as the true representation would do. 
Common methods are shown in Fig. 29. The representation given at V 
is preferred for ordinary drawings. It is not necessary to draw the pitch 




IX X zi — zn 

Fig. 29. Conventional Drawings of Screw Threads. 



16 



MACHINE DRAWING 



to scale. The distance between lines is estimated and arranged to avoid 
crowding so as to give a pleasing appearance. The lines may be at an 
angle with, or perpendicular to the axis of the screw. The angle when 
used is determined by one half the pitch for single threads, XIII, or the 
whole pitch for double threads, XIV. For such representations as II 
and IV light pencil guide lines should be drawn parallel to the axis of 
the screw to limit the heavy lines which represent the root diameter of 
the screw. The 60° lines show how the distance between the guide lines 
is determined. The tops of the threads are represented by fine lines. 





Fig. 30. Square Threads. 

Two distinctive representations for square threads are shown in 
Fig. 30. 

31. Threaded Holes. — Representations for threaded holes are shown 
in plan, elevation, and section in Fig. 31. It will be observed that the 




^^/^;' B 



Ellev^at/on 



lU-y 



f 



Section 

Fig. 31. Threaded Holes. 



£I/0y^afion 



lines representing the threads slope in the opposite direction when the 
hole is shown in section. The reason for this is that the far side of the 
thread is seen. Either single or double circles may be used in the plan, 
and any of the plans may be used with any of the sections or elevations. 
The lines representing the roots of the threads when visible are made 
heavy if inked, but when dotted all lines should be the same either in 
ink or pencil. When the representations shown at A and B are used, 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



17 



they should always be marked ''Tap." For small diameters the V's 
may be drawn in freehand and the thread lines omitted as at C. When 




Fig. 32. Screw Threads in Section. 



two or more threaded pieces are shown together, the methods of Fig. 
32 are used. Clearness may be preserved when drawing threaded pieces 
in elevation or section by using the methods of Fig. 33 at II, III, and IV 
where the thread lines are left out. 





Fig. 33. Thread Representations. 



Fig. 34. 



Where a hole does not go all the way through a piece, the angle of the 
end of the drill leaves the end of the hole pointed, drawn with 30° lines 
as shown in Fig. 34. 

TABLE 1 

Dimensions of U. S. Standard Threads 



Diameter 


Threads 


Diameter 


Root 


Root 




per Inch 


of Tap Drill 


Diameter 


Area 


V4 


20 


V16 


.185 


.026 


Vl6 


18 


V4 


.241 


.045 


Vs 


16 


V16 


.294 


.068 


Vl6 


14 


"/64 


.345 


.093 


V2 


13 


''IZ2 


.400 


.126 


Vl6 


12 


IV32 


.454 


.162 


Vs 


11 


^V32 


.507 


.202 


V4 


10 


Vs 


.620 


.302 


Vs • 


9 


'U 


.731 


.420 


1 


8 


2^32 


.838 


.551 


IVs 


7 


^732 


.940 


.693 


1V4 


7 


IV32 


1.065 


.889 


IVs 


6 


IV16 


1.159 


1.054 


1V2 


6 


IV16 


1.284 


1.293 


IVs 


5V2 


PV32 


1.389 


1.515 


1V4 


5 


IV2 


1.491 


1.744 


IVs 





IVs 


1.616 


2.049 


2 


4V2 


IV4 


1.711 


2.300 



18 



MACHINE DRAWING 



32. Specifications of Screw Threads.— For U. S. Standard bolts the 
number of threads per inch is fixed as given in Table 1, which gives other 
useful information. 

Notes and abbreviations used on drawings to specify screw threads 
are as follows: The initials R.H. or L.H. are used to denote right hand 
or left hand. 

"8 TMs. U.S.S:' means eight threads per inch, United States Stand- 
ard thread. 

''14 Thds. U.S.F.'' means fourteen threads per inch United States 
form. 

''32 Thds. A.S.M.E.Std.'' means 32 threads per inch, American Society 
Mechanical Engineers Standard Machine screw thread. 

"B.S.W."' means British Standard, Whitworth or English thread. 

"B.S.F.'' means British Standard fine screw thread. 

Other notes and information may be understood by consulting the 
handbooks published by ''American Machinist" and ''Machinery." 

33. Pipe Threads. — Wrought pipe is specified by its nominal inside 
diameter for sizes up to 12''. Actual diameters are given in Table 27 
which also gives the number of threads per inch. Tables 28 and 29 
give dimensions of extra strong and double extra strong pipe. 




/^bur imperfecf fhreods i fu// af roofs [ 
-« .30 yX-'—.P3" y\* 



Complefe fhreods 
.69" 



Fig. 35. Enlarged Section of 2\" Pipe Thread. 

Pipe threads have an angle of 60°, and have the top and l^ottom of the 
V rounded. The threads are cut on a taper of three fourths inch per 
foot. The form is shown in Fig. 35. 

Corners Corners 





F/afs 




Chamfered Rounded 

Fig. 36. U. S. Standard Bolts. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



19 



34. U. S. Standard Bolts and Nuts. — Ordinary hexagonal and square 
bolt heads and nuts are made with U. S. Standard proportions. The 
chamfered and rounded types are shown in Fig. 36. The dimensions 
are based upon the diameter of the bolt. The distance across flats of 
either hex or square is made equal to IV2 D + ^k"- The thickness of a 
head is one half the distance across flats or V4 D + Vie''- The thickness 
of a nut is equal to the diameter of the bolt. 

35. To Draw a Bolt Head or Nut Across Flats. — To draw a hex bolt 
head or nut, Figs. 37 and 38, draw the center line, diameter of bolt, and 



^ 



F 




Fig. 37. Hex Bolt Head Across Flats. 



W 



line locating under side of head as at I. For a bolt head lay off the 
distance C, equal to one half the distance across flats, in the three places 
shown at I and draw lines as at II. With C as a radius and center half 



T 



U- c -*t^c-^ 




^m 


?ii=r^ 




. ~j 


c:-^^ 


^^=-_i 


h^-- 

u-^^ 


^3 


t—.^'z.— 


^-^~i 



\^D- 



m 



Hex Nut Across Flats. 



way between center line and outer line, draw arcs as at III and complete 
as shown at IV. For a nut the dimensions are the same except the thick- 
ness which is equal to the diameter of the bolt. Fig. 38. 

36. To draw a square bolt head across flats. Fig. 39, proceed as for 



k 



-4 



D — 

I in. 

Fig. 39. Square Bolt Head Across Flats. 



W 



the hex form but draw a single arc with center on center line and radius 
equal to twice the diameter of bolt. A square nut is drawn in the same 
way except that the thickness is equal to the diameter of the bolt. 



20 



MACHINE DRAWING 



37. To Draw a Bolt Head or Nut Across Corners. — For a bolt head 
draw center line, diameter of bolt, and line locating under side of head. 
Construct diagram shown in Fig. 40 at I, thus obtaining distances B, 






^£^ 


8-^ 




t 

i 












i 


-A 


:^^ 





7^ 



45 



W 




I n E 

Fig. 40. Hex Bolt Head Across Corners. 

C and E. With dividers take distances from the diagram to locate lines 
on the drawing as shown at II. Draw center arc with radius equal to 
diameter of bolt. Draw side arcs with radius found by trial so that they 
have the same rise as center arc as indicated at III. Draw 45° chamfer 
lines and complete as at IV. 

For a nut the dimensions are the same except the thickness. 



.^5' 



\/^ 







^D- 



-iZZ^ 





Fig. 41. Square Bolt Head and Nut. 
38. To draw a square bolt head or nut across corners refer to Fig. 41 . 




Fig. 42. Rounded Type. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



21 




Fig. 43. Bolt and Nut Chart. 



22 



MACHINE DRAWING 



The distance across flats and thickness of bolt head is the same as for the 
hex form. Note the radii of the arcs, the 30° chamfer angle, and the 
45° angle in the diagram. 





F[G. 44. 
Through Bolt. 



Fig. 45. 
Tap Bolt. 



Fig. 40. 
Stud. 



39. A rounded type of bolt head and nut are shown in Fig. 42. The 
same proportions hold as for the chamfered type. The radius Ri is 
two times the diameter of the bolt. The dotted line through point 1 
locates point 2. The radius R2 has its center at and is equal to the 
distance — 2. Radii R^ and Ri must have the same rise as radius R2. 
They are found by trial to fit the rise. 



(ZX 



€X 



s/ 



■2- 



I 




r 



--- 1^- 



1 
\ 


(2) 








1 


T JT 


py- 


- 


J4 


» 





Q 



d^ 



/5 p-LJH ^_ ._ 



1 ITT 



■^^' 




Fig. 47. Bolt Drawing. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



23 



40. Bolt Chart. — The chart, Fig. 43, is for use when drawing full 
size bolts and nuts. The distances can be transferred with the dividers or 
compasses. Horizontal distances give the diameters of the bolts. Dis- 
tances vertically from the base line to where a vertical line through a 
given diameter crosses the inclined lines, gives the necessary distances. 
The inclined lines are lettered to correspond with the distances shown on 
the drawings. 

41. Bolts and Studs. — Three common forms of bolts are the through 
bolt, Fig. 44, the tap bolt. Fig. 45, and the stud or stud bolt Fig. 46. 
When possible the through bolt should be used as it requires only drilled 
holes. The tap bolt is used as a permanent fastening in cases where a 
cap screw (Art. 44) is not desired. When there are parts which must 
be removed often or where the threads might rust in, studs are used if 
through bolts are not practicable. The length of thread must be desig- 
nated in all cases and is indicated in the figures. 



TABLE 2 
Dimensions of U. S. Standard Bolt Heads and Nuts 



iv 



fH 





d 


W 


Ch 


D 


T 


Cs 




Flats or 


Corners 




Thickness 


Corners 


Diameter 


Short 


or Long 


Thickness 


of 


or Long 


of Bolt 


Diameter 


Diameter 


of Nut 


Bolt Head 


Diameter 


V4 


V2 


^764 


V4 


V4 


= V32 


Vl6 


^732 


^Vl6 


V16 


^V64 


2V32 


Vs 


^Vl6 


^V64 


Vs 


IV32 


^V32 


Vl6 


2V32 


^732 


V16 


2V64 


1V64 


V2 


Vs 


1Vg4 


V2 


V16 


IV4 


Vl6 


^V32 


IVs 


Vl6 


3V64 


IVs 


Vs 


IV16 


1^V64 


Vs 


^V32 


IV2 


V4 


IV4 


PV64 


V4 


Vs 


IV4 


Vs 


r/i6 


1^V64 


Vs 


2V32 


2V32 


1 


IVs 


IVs 


1 


^Vl6 


21V32 


IVs 


PV16 


2V32 


IVs 


=^V32 


2Vl6 


1V4 


2 


2Vl6 


1V4 


1 


2^V64 


IVs 


2Vl6 


2IV32 


PA 


IV32 


3V32 


IV2 


2Vs 


2V4 


IV2 


IV16 


32V64 


1^8 


2Vl6 


2^Vl6 


IVs 


IV32 


3Vs 


IV4 


2V4 


3Vl6 


IV4 


IVs 


3"/64 


IVs 


21V16 


3"/32 


IVs 


PV32 


4VlG 


2 


3Vs 


SVs 


2 


IV16 


r-'hA 



24 



MACHINE DRAWING 



42. A stud may be made tight in a hole by having the threads jam 
near the bottom or the top of the hole. For the second condition clear- 
ance must be allowed. 

43. Since bolt heads and nuts are standard, only three dimensions are 
necessary on a drawing. For a bolt these are diameter, length from under 
side of head, and length of thread measured from end of bolt. For a 
stud, give the diameter, total length, and length of thread measured 
from each end. A bolt drawing is shown in Fig. 47. 

Dimensions of U. S. Standard bolts are given in Table 2. 

44. Cap Screws. — Hexagonal and square head cap screws are similar 
in appearance to rounded type bolts but the distance across flats is less 
than standard and the thickness of head is more than standard. Various 




F/af Fi I /I iter 
Head 

Fig. 48. Cap Screws. 



forms of heads are shown in Fig. 48 and dimensions for drawing them are 
given in Table 3. Cap screws are designated by their diameter in inches 
which are given as fractions starting at ^li\ and by length in inches. 




Flaf- Head 



B ^2A-.008 

^ 1.739 

D ^ .I73A-I-.0I5 



^i y1 



Round Head 



U-B 



-A 



=■ I.85A-.005 
= .7 A 



D = .173 A +.015 

£ 



- |. o, 



1 



"U 



u. 



Flat Fil lister Head 



B^ 1.64 A -.00 9 
C- .66A-.002 
D= .I73A-^.0I5 
C 



£ 



1h 



A 



Ot-'af Fillister Head 

8 =1.64 A -.009 
C=.66A-.002 
D= .I73A+.0I5 

F= .134 B -I- C 



Old 
Number 



2 
3 

5 
6 
7 

d 
9 

10 
IS 
14 
16 

la 

20 
22 
24 
26 
28 
30 



Neix- 
Size 



.060 
73 
.036 
.099 
.112 

.125 
.133 
151 
164 
177 

190 
216 
243 
.268 
.294 

.320 
346 
372 
39d 



Fig. 49. Machine Screws. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



25 



TABLE 3 
Dimensions of Cap Screws 



Diameter 


Flats 

of 

Hex 


Flats 

of 
Square 


Thickness of 

Heads — Hex 

Square — 

Fillister 


Diameter of 

Button 

Head 


Diameter of 

Countersunk 

Head 


Vs 

Vl6 






V32 
V16 
V16 
V16 
Vs 

V4 

^Vie 

^Vl6 

1 

1V4 


V4 

Vs 






V4 
Vl6 

Vs 

Vl6 
V2 

Vs 

V4 


V16 
V2 
V16 
Vs 

V4 
^Vl6 

Vs 

1 

IVs 

1V4 


Vs 
V16 
V2 
V16 
Vs 
"/16 
V4 
Vs 
IVs 

1V4 


1/ 

V16 
3/ 

V16 
1/ 

V16 
5/ 

3/ 

Vs 
1 


^V32 

Vs 

V4 

^Vis 
Vs 

1 

IVs 
IVs 


1 







45. Machine Screws. — These are small screws especially adapted for 
use with small parts of machines. The heads are made in different forms 
as named in Fig. 49. The sizes of machine screws are often designated by 
numbers. The diameters are in decimals of an inch from .060'' to .450". 
Finer pitch threads are used than for U. S. Std. bolts. 

46. Set Screws. — These are screws with a small head or none at all, 
and with variously formed ends, used for holding pulleys in position on 
shafts and preventing relative motion of parts under similar conditions. 



N= U. S. Std. number thds. per inch 

T 






Fig. 50. Set Screws. 




Several forms are illustrated in Fig. 50. Any combination of point and 
head can be used. Some proportions are given in the figures. A pro- 



26 



MACHINE DRAWING 



jecting set screw on a revolving pulley is a source of great danger, and 
should be avoided. The many forms of headless and hollow set screws 
obtainable make the use of other forms unnecessary in such cases. 

47. S.A.E. Bolts. — The forms and dimensions of the Society of Auto- 
motive Engineers standard bolts are given in Fig. 51 and Table 4. These 




Fig. .51. S. A. E. Bolts and Nuts. 

bolts have finer pitch threads and shorter distance across flats than U. S. 
Std. The nuts are castellated for convenience in locking by use of a 
cotter pin. 

48. Miscellaneous Bolts. — Several forms of bolts are illustrated and 
named in Fig. 52. They are used under special conditions. The names 



\) m^^ ^I^mfls- ^ IMI^ -fBTiM]^ ^ w 



StoyeBclt-F/ofNeocf Sink Bolt 



^ 



Auto Spring Bolt Fillister Head 



Stot^e Bolt- Round Head ^^^^ Fender Bolt '^ufo Clip Bolt- Hex Head 



Carriage Bolt 



Tire Bolt- 



iE^ 



Auto Hub Bolt- F/n Head 



,,1 I h ij.i.i.i.i.iJ~ti 

rjr I Ml — tiWihiiiiM M- 



Auto Hub Bolt - Square Neck 



Auto Step Bolt 




Nutted Staple 



Eye Bolt 

Fig. 52. Miscellaneous Bolts. 



iiti 



have been derived from the use or form of the bolts. 

49. Miscellaneous Screws. — A number of screws are shown in Fig. 
53. The common wood screw is made in a large variety of sizes and with 
different forms of heads. Lag screws are used for somewhat heavy wood 



MSm^ 



\^ Flat Head ^ 

tr_ zmmx>> (tz \\\\\\\\s^ [ 

^ n^al Head 



Fillister Head 



Pound Head 

Fig. 53. Miscellaneous Screws. 




FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



27 



constructions and for fastening machines or parts of machines to wood. 
The figure shows the methods of representation for the various screws. 



TABLE 4 
Dimensions of S.A.E. Bolts 





Thds. 


















D 


per 
Inch 


A 


Ai 


B 


c 


E 


H 


/ 


K 


V4 


28 


VZ2 


V32 


V16 


732 


764 


7l6 


732 


7l6 


Vl6 


24 


2V64 


^V64 


72 


732 


764 


^764 


^/64 


7l6 


Vs 


24 


^V32 


=^764 


V16 


78 


78 


732 


78 


732 


Vl6 


20 


^764 


Vs 


78 


78 


78 


^764 


78 


732 


V2 


20 


V16 


V.6 


74 


7l6 


78 


78 


^/s 


732 


V16 


18 


^V64 


^764 


Vs 


7l6 


732 


"/64 


■^/s 


732 


Vs 


18 


'VZ2 


3V64 


^7l6 


74 


732 


^732 


■^/s 


732 


^Vl6 


16 


'Vei 


^V32 


1 


74 


732 


^764 


^/s 


732 


'U 


16 


^Vl6 


2732 


17l6 


74 


732 


7l6 


U 


732 


Vs 


14 


^732 


^V64 


174 


74 


732 


2732 


^/s 


732 


1 


14 


1 


Vs 


17l6 


74 


732 


74 


^h 


732 


IVs 


12 


IV32 


«V64 


178 


7l6 


V32 


2732 


^/32 


732 


1V4 


12 


IV4 


IV32 


1^7l6 


7l6 


732 


^7l6 


^/32 


732 


IVs 


12 


1^V32 


1^764 


2 


78 


74 


1732 


^U 


7l6 


1V2 


12 


IV2 


IV16 


27l6 


78 


74 


178 


^U 


7l6 



Screws are specified by their diameter, length and form. The diam- 
eter is generally given by gauge number. The length for flat head screws, 
stove bolts, etc., includes the head. For oval head screws the counter 
sink is included in the length. For round head wood screws about one 
half the head is included in the length. For lag screws the length is 
measured from under head to point. 




n n E 

Fig. 54. Lock Nuts. 



50. Locking Devices. — The vibration of machinery often causes nuts 
to become loose if they are not provided with some form of locking device. 
The commonest method is to use two nuts. They may be full size, 
three fourth's thickness, or one full and one half thickness. The castle 
nut illustrated in Fig. 51 is a good method. Lock washers of various 
kinds are effective. Other arrangements are shown in Fig. 54. 



28 



MACHINE DRAWING 



51. Flanges and Bolting. — A method of finding the diameter of 
bolt circle and diameter of flange is illustrated in Fig. 55. For through 
bolts the explanation applies to conditions shown at I and 11. Draw the 
desired fillet at Vi. This may be taken at about ^/4. Lay off X, equal to 




Fig. 55. Circle of Drilling and Flange Diameter. 

one half distance across flats of bolt head, and Y equal to one half distance 
across corners of nut. The diameter of the bolt circle, Db, may now be 
found by laying a scale on the drawing and selecting a dimension. This 
will be equal to or greater than, d -{- 2 (t -{- Vi -\- X), and may be taken 
at the nearest larger Vsth inch. The flange diameter may then be ob- 
tained by laying out the distance Y, as indicated, and using the scale to 
find a dimension equal to, or greater than Db + 2 (F + r2). The radius 
r2 may be taken at Vsth to Vieth the thickness of the flange. 

When studs are used, the diameters Db and Dp may be very much 
decreased as at III. The distance C should be about equal to t, although 
if necessary it can be made equal to one half the diameter of the bolt. 

52. Strength and Number of Bolts. — The strength of a bolt in ten- 
sion is the strength of the root area. The tensile strength of U. S. Stand- 
ard threads is given in Table 5. When the load is applied as at I, Fig. 
56 the stress is found by the formula S = P/A. This is direct tension 
with no initial stress. At II the bolt is used for holding a cover plate or 



M 



rm 




Ground Joint 




Paching 



n 



Fig. 56. Bolt Stress. 



m 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



29 



cylinder where a ground joint is used. If the bolt lengthens under 
pressure the joint will open. The nuts must be screwed up so that the 
stress in the bolt will be equal to or greater than the stress due to pressure 
against the plate. At III an elastic packing material is used. When 
the nut is tightened the packing is compressed. The pressure against 
the plate will lengthen the bolts and relieve them of some of the stress 
due to the packing which is less compressed. 

53. The total stress in the bolts may be that due to tightening plus 
that due to pressure. This may be further increased by the twisting 
stress by an amount equal to 10 per cent, or more of the load stress. 
The stress due to tightening may be equal to the load stress. 

TABLE 5 
Tensile Strength of U. S. Standard Screw Threads 





Threads 


Total Strength of One Bolt for Unit Stresses of 










Diameter 


per Inch 


4000 


5000 


6000 


V4 


20 


105 


135 


160 


Vs 


16 


270 


340 


405 


V2 


13 


500 


625 


750 


^8 


11 


805 


1010 


1210 


'U 


10 


1200 


1500 


1800 


Vs 


9 


1680 


2100 


2520 


IVs 


8 


2200 


2750 3300 


IVs 


7 


2770 


3460 


4160 


1V4 


7 


3120 


3900 


4680 


IVs 


6 


4240 


5300 


6360 


1V2 


6 


5120 


6400 


7680 


IVs 


5V2 


6120 


7650 


9180 


1V4 


5 


7040 


8800 


10560 


IVs 


5 


8120 


10150 


12180 


2 


4V2 


9200 


11500 


13800 



54. To figure the load on bolts for cover plates or cylinder heads 
divide the total pressure by the number of bolts. The size is often 
found by using a low value for the working stress. 

55. To figure the number of bolts, divide the total pressure by the 
working strength of the size of bolt selected. To maintain a tight joint 
under pressure requires careful judgment in selecting size of bolt, loca- 
tion of drilling and distance between bolts. The distance X between 
bolts should not generally exceed 4 to 5 times their diameter, Fig. 57. 
For plain joints either full or ring gaskets. Fig. 58 may be used. 

56. Keys. — Keys of various forms are used to prevent relative motion 



30 



MACHINE DRAWING 



between shaft and pulleys, gears, crank arms, etc. The saddle key shown 
at I in Fig. 59 is used when only a small force is to be transmitted and 







^ 



^ 



Fig. 57. 



Fig. .58. Full and Ring Gaskets. 



where close or frequent adjustment is required. The flat key shown at 
II requires a flat spot on the shaft. Its holding power is a little greater 
than the preceding form. Set screws are sometimes used to secure closer 




Fig. .59. Forms of Keys. 



¥ 



H 



contact. The square or rectangular form of key is most used. The 
sides should fit closely in the hub and shaft. Square keys, shown at 
III, are often made with W = D/4: in which W = width of key and D = 
diameter of shaft. Other proportions are W = D/4: and T = D/Q to 
D/4. Unwin gives TF = D/4 + Vs'' and T = D/8 + ^k". A different 
way of locating a square key is shown at IV. 

57. For taper keys, the taper may be from Vie'' to Vie" per foot of 
length. A practical standard is Vs"- Keys should be one half in the 
shaft and one half in the hub. When a large force is transmitted two 
keys placed 90° apart are used. The length of keys should be about one 
and one half times the diameter of the shaft. 



]C 



J 



Q 



1 E HI 

Fig. 60. Plain, Gib, and Round End Keys. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



31 







TABLE 6. 


Dimensions of Kei 


'S 
















H-j 


\*-D ■ 


















-4 — _ 


ii^ QQ 
















1 


7^'m 


P^-^ 
















'^ 




















% 


w 










Shaft 










Shaft 










Diameter 


A 


B 


c 


D 


Diameter 


A 


B 


C 


D 


(Inclusive) 










(Inclusive) 










Vl6 - ^Vl6 


V16 


Vs 


V.6 


V16 


41/2- 51/2 


IV4 


V4 


Va 


V4 


Vs -lVl6 


V4 


V16 


V32^ 


Vs 


5Vi6- 6V2 


IV2 


Vs 


V16 


Vs 


IVs -IV4 


Vs 


V4 


Vs 


V2 


6V16- 772 


1^4 


1 


V2 


Vs 


IV16-2V4 


V2 


V16 


V32 


V2 


7Vi6- 8V2 


2 


1V4 


Vs 


1 


2Vi6 -2V4 


Vs 


Vs 


V16 


Vs 


8V16- 9V2 


2V4 


1V4 


Vs 


1 


2IV16-3V4 


V4 


V2 


V4 


Vs 


97l6-10lVl6 


2V2 


1V2 


V4 


1V4 


3Vl6 -3V4 


Vs 


V2 


V4 


Vs 


11 -121 V16 


3 


1^4 


Vs 


1V4 


3iVi6-4-/i6 


1 


Vs 


V16 


V4 


13 -15 


3V2 


2 


1 


1V4 



TABLE 7. Standard Woodruff Keys 












Woodruff Key. 












Sizes Used 


Dimensions 


Shaft 


Key 


Key 










Key 










Diameter 


Numbers 


No. 


A 


B 


c 


D 


No. 


A 


B 


c 


D 


V16 - Vs 


1. 


1 


V2 


V:6 


V32 


V64 


B 




V16 


V32 


V16 


V16 - V2 


2,4 


2 


V2 


V32 


V64 


V64 


16 


IVs 


V16 


V32 


V64 


V16 - Vs 


3, 5 


3 


V2 


Vs 


V16 


V64 


17 


IVs 


V32 


V64 


V64 


^Vl6- V4 


3,5,7 


4 


Vs 


V32 


V64 


V16 


18 


IVs 


V4 


Vs 


V64 


^Vl6 


6, 8 


5 


Vs 


Vs 


V16 


V16 


C 


IVs 


V16 


V32 


V64 


Vs - ^Vl6 


6, 8, 10 


6 


Vs 


V32 


V64 


V16 


19 


1V4 


V16 


V32 


V64 


1 


9, 11, 13 


7 


V4 


Vs 


V16 


V16 


20 


1V4 


V32 


V64 


V64 


lVl6-lVs 


9, 11, 13, 
16 


8 


V4 


V32 


V64 


V16 


21 


1V4 


V4 


Vs 


V64 


IV16 


11, 13, 16 


9 


V4 


VI6 


V32 


V16 


D 


1V4 


V16 


V32 


V64 


IV4 -IV16 


12, 14, 17, 
20 


10 


Vs 


V32 


V64 


V16 


E 


1V4 


Vs 


V16 


V64 


IVs -IV16 


14, 17, 20 


11 


Vs 


V16 


V32 


V16 


22 


IVs 


V4 


Vs 


V32 


IV2 -IVs 


15,18,21, 
24 


12 


Vs 


V32 


V64 


V16 


23 


IVs 


V16 


V32 


V32 


l^Vl6-lV4 


18,21,24 


A 


Vs 


V4 


Vs 


V16 


F 


IVs 


Vs 


V32 


V32 


PV16-2 


23,25 


13 


1 


V16 


V32 


V16 


24 


1V2 


V4 


Vs 


V64 


2Vi6 -2V2 


25 


14 


1 


V32 


V64 


V16 


25 


1V2 


V16 


V32 


V64 






15 


1 


V4 


Vs 


Vi« 


G 


1V2 


Vs 


v.« 


Vfi4 









32 



MACHINE DRAWING 



The Lewis key is shown at V and the direction of the driving shaft is 
indicated. This key is in compression. A round key shown at VI is 
often a desirable form. The ordinary plain key is illustrated at I in 
Fig. 60, a key provided with a gib to make its removal easier is shown at 
II and a round end key at III. The third form is fitted into a shaft when 
it is desired to arrange for a part to slide on the shaft. When a long key 
is secured in a shaft and used in this way it is called a feather or feather 
key. 

58. The Woodruff key, which consists of a part of a circular disc is 
shown in Table 7. The circular seating allows the key to assume the 
proper taper when a piece is put on the shaft. Data for various forms of 
keys is given in Tables 5 and 7. 

59. Riveting. — Machines or structures composed entirely or in part, 
of sheet metal are fastened together by rivets, put into place red hot. 
Boilers, tanks, steel structures etc., are fastened together permanently 
in this way. Rivets are generally made of mild steel. They have a 
head on one end and sufficient length to allow forming a head on the 
other end after being put into place. 



T±i 






B- 




\ 




) ^ 




, — -« 


ZZ22 


i 



r" 



V-K- 



^K- 



^^ 



m. 






at] P 



M 



Fig. 61. Rivet Heads. 



60. Rivet Heads. — Forms of rivet heads are illustrated in Fig. 61 and 
dimensions are given in Table 8. The forms of heads are as follows: 
I Cone head, II Button head. III Steeple head, IV Flat countersunk 
head, V Oval countersunk head, VI Flat head, VII Pan head — straight 
neck, and VIII Pan head — swell neck. The information on rivet heads 
is from, "Scientific Facts," published by the Champion Rivet Co., 
Cleveland, Ohio. 

61. Rivet Holes. — The holes for rivets may be either punched or 
drilled. As punching injures the metal, drilled holes are better for 
pressure work and are required for steam boiler work. The injury due 
to punching may be removed by annealing or the hole may be punched 
small and reamed to size. Holes are made Vie'' larger than the rivets 
used in them. Thus a rivet for a 1'' hole is ^Vie'' diameter before driving. 

62. Calking. — For many purposes rivets must make a leak tight 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



33 



TABLE 8 

Dimensions of Rivets 

(From "Scientific Facts," Champion Rivet Co.) 



Diagram 


























of 


A 


B 


c 


ii' 


F 


G 


H 


J 


K 


L 


M 


A^ 


Rivet 


























V2 


^V32 


Vs 


V16 


Vs 


1 


9/ 

716 


74 


72 


^7l6 


Vs 


V16 


74 


V16 


'Vn 


«3/64 


V2 


2^64 


178 


78 


732 


Vie 


"/32 


^V32 


Vs 


V32 


Vs 


"/32 


IV32 


2^61 


^V32 


174 


^764 


7l6 


Vs 


1 


7l6 


^7l6 


V16 


^Vie 


^V64 


1^V64 


3^64 


'V64 


IVs 


''In 


^732 


^7l6 


1V32 


^V32 


74 


^732 


V4 


^V64 


IV16 


2V32 


V16 


172 


"/32 


78 


V4 


1V16 


72 


^Vl6 


7s 


iVie 


*V64 


PVe4 


2V32 


3^64 


IVs 


^764 


^732 


^Vl6 


174 


1732 


78 


^732 


V8 


"/64 


PV32 


«/64 


^732 


1V4 


«764 


7l6 


78 


-1V16 


V16 


^Vl6 


7l6 


^Vl6 


"/64 


l"/64 


^V64 


^V64 


1V8 


1764 


^732 


^Vl6 


PV32 


^V32 


1 


^732 


1 


^Vl6 


1^4 


Vs 


V4 


2 


178 


72 


1 


172 


Vs 


17l6 


72 


IV16 


1 


l"/64 


'V16 


^764 


278 


1^764 


^732 


17l6 


1V16 


=^732 


178 


^732 


IVs 


IV16 


PV32 


"/64 


^V32 


274 


1^764 


7l6 


178 


IVs 


^7l6 


17l6 


V16 


1V16 


l'V64 


2V64 


1^64 


"/64 


278 


P764 


"/32 


17l6 


174 


^732 


174 


^732 


1V4 


1^V64 1 2Vl6 


IV32 


^Vl6 


272 


1^732 


78 


174 


l^Vl6 


74 


17l6 


78 


1V16 


1^V64 1 219/64 


1V64 


«V64 


2^8 


1^732 


2732 


1V16 


PV16 


=^V32 


17s 


'\'Z2 


IVs 


IV32 I2IV32 


1^V64 


IV32 


274 


P764 


^7l6 


17s 


2 


"/16 


17l6 


^7l6 


1V16 


1^732 233/e4 


1^V64 


1V64 


278 


178 


2732 


I7l6 


2732 


"/32 


172 


2732 


1V2 


1^V32 2V8 


IV16 


178 


3 


P7l6 


74 


172 


27l6 


78 


1V16 


74 



joint as well as hold the plates together. To assist in this a blunt chisel 
is used to force or pound the edge of one of the plates down against 




Fig. 62. Lap Joints. 

another. This is called calking and makes a steam or water tight joint 
between the plates. The bevel of about 75° to 80° shown in Fig. 62 at 
A is to make calking easier. 



34 



MACHINE DRAWING 



63. Lap Joints. — A lap joint consists of two plates which lap over 
each other. When one row of rivets is used as at I in Fig. 62 it is called 
a single riveted lap joint. A double riveted joint is shown at II, Fig. 62. 

The distance between the centers of two rivets in the same row is 
called pitch. The distance from the center line of the rivets to the edge 
of the plate is called lap. The lap is commonly made equal to one and 
one half times the diameter of the rivet. The distance from the center 
of a rivet in one line to the center of a rivet in the next line is called the 
diagonal pitch and may be found from the formula. 



P' 



2 d 

= 3^+3 



Either chain riveting, Fig. 63, or staggered riveting, Fig. 64, may be 
used when there are several rows of rivets. 

I- 







Fig. 63. Chain Riveting. 




Fig 



Staggered Riveting. 



64. Rivets which are put in place in the shop where the work is 
fabricated are called shop rivets and are represented as in Fig. 62. Rivets 






^^^^ 




^ 



-€> 



4)- 



-o- 



Fig. 65. Butt Joints. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



35 



driven in the field or where the construction is put in place are called 
field rivets and are represented as in Figs. 63 and 64. 

65. Butt Joints. — Three forms of butt joints are shown in Fig. 65. 
At I a single butt-strap having a thickness of about one and one fourth 
times the thickness of the plates is used. Single and double riveted 
joints with two butt-straps are shown at II and III. In such cases the 
butt-straps may be Vie'' thinner than the plates. 





-#7#T^ 




I 

1^ 



Section B'B 



Fig. G6. Joint for Three Plates. 

66. When three plates come together they must be arranged so as to 
maintain a tight joint. One method is shown in Fig. 66 where one of the 
plates is thinned out. 

67. Miscellaneous Connections. — Methods of making connections 
are shown in Fig. 67. Angles may be used as at I and IV or one of the 




xQ^i'i ''''"''^' 







Fig. 67. Connections. 



plates may be bent as at II and III. In this case the radius of curvature 
r can be made about two and one half times the thickness of the plate. 




H=N 



^ 



tt 



Fig. 68. Cylindrical Tanks. 



7^ 



36 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Also note that a short straight part x is provided to allow easy calking. 
When drawing to small scale, thin sections are sometimes blacked in as 
shown in Fig. 68 at I and II, which also illustrates methods of closing 
the ends of cylindrical tanks. With rounded ends the radius of curvature 
can be taken equal to the diameter of the tank. 

68. Rolled Steel Shapes. — For many constructions, rolled steel 
shapes are used. The dimensions and weights as well as other informa- 

FEIIT 



Angle[U ChanneliL] l-Beam{V\ Z-Bar[Z] 

Fig. 69. Steel Shapes. 



Tee[T] 



tion can best be obtained from the handbooks issued by the steel com- 
panies. The names of a few of the common sections are given in Fig. 69. 
The pitch of rivets for structural purposes may be taken at from 
three to six inches. The distance from the center of the rivet to the 
edge of the plate should be about two times the rivet diameter. The 
pitch for various sizes of rivets is given below. 



Vs 



Minimum Rivet Spacing 

Diameter of rivet in inches 1/4 Vs V2 

Pitch in inches V4 IVs IV2 IVs 2V4 2V8 3 

The Osborn system of conventional representation of rivets is shown 
in Fig. 70. 



CONl^ENT/ONAL , 


5/Gt<J5 FOR Rik^£r/l^6 








Shop 


Fieid 


Countsrsunk and Fiattened 


Tivo FhU Heads 





• 




Inside 


Outs/de 


Both Sides 


e Hig^h 





Q 


Q 


Counf-ersunk & Chipped 
/os/de or Opposite side 


® 


® 


^ t-ligh 


^ 





^ 


Countersunk S Chippecl 
Ou/s/de or This Side 


G 


® 


Coutersunk 8t Chipped 
Bo tin Sides 


52^ 


W 


g ttigh 








■^ 



Fig. 70. Osborn Symbols. 

69. Pins and Washers. — Pins used as fastenings are made in a large 
variety of forms, some of which are illustrated in Fig. 71. They may 
be straight, taper, or split. 



FASTENINGS FOR MACHINERY 



37 



^ 



spring Coffer Pin 



D 




D 



5 pi if Toper Pin 



E 



Straight Pin- Wifh neod 3froighf Pm- Plom £nds 

Fig. 71. Forms of Pins. 

Dimensions for standard steel washers are given in Table 9. Cast 
iron washers, Fig. 72 may have proportions as follows: 

A = d + Vs", B = 3V2^ + Vs", C = V4 + V/'. 




Fig. 72. Cast Iron Washer. 

TABLE 9 
Dimensions of Standard Steel Washers 

— A-4- 



\y/////A 



'-\ 



\y////A - 



^C= Thickness 
k. U.5.5. P/of-e Cage 



Bolt 








Bolt 








Diameter 


^ 


B 


c 


Diameter 


A 


B 


C 


Vl6 


V4 


Vie 


18 


17s 


174 


23/4 


9 


V4 


Vl5 


V4 


16 


174 


IVs 


3 


8 


Vl6 


Vs 


Vs 


16 


IVs 


172 


374 


8 


Vs 


Vl6 




14 


172 


IVs 


372 


8 


Vl6 


V2 


174 


14 


IVs 


1V4 


3V4 


8 


7-2 


Vi6 


IVs 


12 


174 


IVs 


4 


8 


Vl6 


Vs 


172 


12 


IVs 


2 


474 


8 


V8 


^Vl6 


174 


10 


2 


278 


472 


8 


V4 


^Vl6 


2 


10 


274 


2V8 


4V4 


5 


Vs 


^Vl6 


274 


9 


272 


2V8 


5 


4 


1 


17:6 


272 


9 












Approx. Thick. 18 = V20" 16 = Vie'' 14 = Ve 



9 = V; 



32 



1 / " 
764 



5 = Vs 



12 = 764" 10 = V64" 

4 = 1V64" 



CHAPTER III 



MACHINE DRAWING 

70. Working Drawings. — Any drawing used to give information and 
directions for doing work is a working drawing. 

Such drawings are made by architects and civil, mechanical, and 
electrical engineers, for buildings, bridges, power plants, machine shops 
and all kinds of industrial work. This book treats of present practice in 
machine drawing. 

71. There are two general classes of machine drawings — assembly 
drawings and detail drawings. These have been listed as follows: 

A. Assembly drawings in outline or section. Design lay-out drawings. Erection 

Drawings. Skeleton or diagram drawings. 

B. Assembly working drawings. Part assembly working drawings. Location draw- 

ings to show relation of parts with dependent dimensions and fits for two or 
more details. Tool, jig and fixture drawings. 

C. Detail working drawings. General purpose drawings. Pattern drawings. Machine 

drawings. Forging drawings, Etc. 




Fig. 73. Main Assembly Drawing. 
38 



MACHINE DRAWING 



39 



72. A main assembly drawing of a B. F. Sturtevant Co., Type 6, 
Steam Turbine is shown in Fig. 73. 

''Steam enters an annular steam chamber in the casing of the turbine through a 
balanced throttle valve (1). From this chamber it passes through nozzles (2) to the 
rotor or bucket wheel. These nozzles expand the steam to a pressure equal to the 
exhaust pressure in the turbine casing, so that the steam leaves the nozzles at a very 
high velocity. 

"At this high velocity the steam then impinges against the semi-circular rotor buckets, 
imparting full impulse to the rotor, and leaves the buckets in the reverse direction. 
As it leaves the rotor, the steam enters the semi-circular reversing buckets, which are 
cast in one piece with the nozzles, which again reverse the direction of the steam and 
drive it back into the rotor. The steam enters and leaves the rotor in a circular motion 
several times before its kinetic energy is absorbed and its velocity dropped to that of 
the rotor. It then passes out into the exhaust." 

73. Detail Drawings. — A detail drawing, Fig. 74 is one which con- 
tains the necessary views of each single piece, completely dimensioned 
and with specifications as to material, machining, etc. 

1. Choose views which will completely describe the shape of the piece. 

2. Do not draw unnecessary views. 




|H h ^//4? Thds. per In. 




^/Groo\/es j-2 deep 




no -32 Tap 
offer ossemb/y^ 




IT CM NO 
NW^BER R£Q 'D 



Cover 



Thrust col/ar 



Bearing siee^^e 



Dust cop 



PART 



Alloy i'i 



MATL REMARKS 



TYPE B MOTOR- BEARING DETAILS 



5ca/e full size 



June 3, I9P0 



P'-an'rj by -^ <f [ Traced by X J ^Creced by C •^ 



Fig. 74. A Detail Draw in tj;. 



40 MACHINE DRAWING 

3. Views should carry dimensions without crowding. 

4. Choose a scale that will show the piece clearly. 

5. Choose a scale that will not require crowding of dimensions. 

6. Detail drawings are made full size, half size, quarter size or eighth 
size. 

7. Avoid the use of different scales on same sheet when possible. 

8. Arrange detail parts in the same position and order that they will 
have in the assembled machine when this is possible. 

9. Keep views of each part near together but do not crowd them. 

10. Leave a space between views of different pieces. 

11. When possible, details that are closely related mechanically 
should be kept on the same sheet. 

12. Make detail drawings so complete that no additional information 
will be required for duplicating the parts shown. 

13. Small parts may be grouped together as: small castings; bronze 
and composition castings; forgings; bolts and screws, etc. 

14. Standard small parts such as pressure gauges, oil and grease cups, 
lubricators, valves, ball bearings, etc., which can be described by notes 
can be drawn in outline or not at all. 

15. If special or extra views of any kind are used, they must be defined 
by explanatory notes. 

74. Making a Detail Drawing. — There are three major considera- 
tions when starting a detail drawing. 

(a) Choice of Views, 
(6) Treatment of Views, 
(c) Choice of Scale. 

A freehand layout sketch is very convenient and helpful, especially 
when standard size drawing sheets must be used. 

First locate the main center and base lines for all views. Then draw 
the preliminary blocking in lines for all views. Finally work out the 
shape of the object. 

75. Consider the object shown in Fig. 75. Two base lines and two 
center lines have been drawn at I in the order shown by the numbers. 
Note that the front view is located by the two base lines and that the 
top and end views are each located by one center line and one base line. 
At II the preliminary "blocking in^' lines have been drawn very lightly, 
while at III, three of the final lines drawn distinctly have been added as 
their length is fixed. The ''blocking in " is completed at IV. The details 
have been drawn at V and the preliminary lines have been gone over 
to give them the character of the other final lines. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



41 



The general procedure for pencil drawings is to block in with straight 
lines and large circles. The small circles and fillets are drawn last. If 
the drawing is not to be inked or traced, the dimension, extension, and 
section lines should be drawn very lightly and the figures and notes 
added. 

76. Drawings are not often inked on paper as good pencil work serves 




I . Draw cenfer and base lines 



2- 



Cenfer lines 



-Base //nes 
/ 



3 



m. D 


raw ""blocking in "lines 












- 











- 


— 
















- 




i 


























1 


1 1 1 


1 1 



3^. 


Complefe the c/ro^ving 












1 
Ij 










^ 






\~-) v. 




; 






r 

1 








1 










1 


Jl. 


^ 




1 


1 
~s — 










1 


\ 
1 
1 


1 






1 i 









Fig. 75. Penciling a Detail Drawing. 



42 



MACHINE DRAWING 



just as well and requires less time. If many copies are wanted, tracing 
cloth is used. The ink will work better on the dull side, especially if it 
is first dusted with powdered chalk. For erasing either pencil or ink, 
use a pencil eraser. Pencil tracings are often made on tracing paper or 
cloth. If a thin bond paper is used, blue prints can be made from pencil 
drawings. The dimensions are often put on in ink. The order of inking 
is shown in Fig. 76, where fine lines are used to represent the pencil 
drawing. 

77. The order of inking on either paper or cloth is: 



1. Center lines. 

2. Small circular arcs and circles. 

3. Large circular arcs and circles. 

4. Irregular curved lines. 

5. Straight horizontal lines. 

6. Straight vertical and slant lines. 

All inking except arrow points, figures and lettering must be done with 
the instruments and the order given must be followed if good drawings 
are to be made. Use Gillott's 404 pen for lettering, arrows, etc. 



7. Dotted circles and arcs. 

8. Dotted straight lines. 

9. Extension and dimension lines. 

10. Dimensions, notes, title. 

11. Section lining. 




HI. Ink verf/col lines 










- 


1 
1 




- 


( \ 


1 

1 


h—^ 




1 




1 






i! 






!; 








1 


^ ., 


















! 1 
I . \ 


1 


1 




1 1 1 



BZ-. 


Ink doffed fines and compfefe 


ff?e 


dro^ying 




1 




- 


1 


''\ 


( h 




l_ 


<.) 


^ \-^ 


1 

1 


1 1 




1 






1 






1 
1 


1 1 
1 1 

4^- 


^ 1 1 




— 


1 
1 

- 


1 


— 








ii \\ 


1 1 
1 1 






1 i 









Fig. 76. Inking a Detail Drawino;. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



43 



78. Blue Printing. — Blue prints are made on sensitized paper as 
follows : 

Place a tracing with the inked side next to the glass of a printing 
frame, Fig. 77. Next place a piece of blue print paper on the tracing, 





1 It 

Fig. 77. A Blue Print Frame. 

coated side down. Follow this with a felt pad and close the frame. Ex- 
pose to direct sunlight as indicated at II. The length of exposure varies 
from 30 seconds in strong sunlight with rapid printing paper to three or 
four minutes under the same conditions with slow printing paper. After 
exposing, the paper is removed and washed in clear water. New paper 
has a yellow color on the coated side which changes to a gray-bronze 
after exposure. Electric light is very generally used in large plants and 
for commercial blue printing. Machines for this purpose as well as 
many other methods of duplication are described in drawing supply 
catalogs. 

79. Assembly Drawings. — As already indicated, assembly drawings 
may be made for almost any purpose. For showing the general appear- 
ance of a machine and giving center and overall dimensions an outline 
assembly such as Fig. 78 is used. 

It is sometimes desirable to give all the dimensions on an assembly 
drawing so that the machine can be built from it. This gives an assembly 
working drawing. A part or group assembly drawing shows a group of 
parts in their relation to each other. If dimensioned, no detail drawings 
are needed. 

Piping or wiring diagrams are assembly drawings made to show the 
sizes, location and arrangement of pipes and wires. When drawn to 
scale and completely dimensioned, they are called piping or wiring 
drawings. 

Erection drawings show the order of putting parts together, dimen- 
sions for center distances, location of oil holes, valves, switches, etc. 

80. Making an Assembly Drawing. — The purpose for which the 



44 



MACHINE DRAWING 



drawing is desired must first be considered, after which the proper selec- 
tion of views must be made. The next step is to determine the position 
of the views on the sheet and the scale to be used. The detail drawings 
are then collected ready for reference. 



6 Discharge 

■ a 




SINGLE STAGE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP 

SCALE DATE 



Fig. 78. Outline Assembl}^ Drawing. 

Locate the main center and base lines for the complete machine. 
Locate the center and base lines of the larger details of which the machine 
is composed. Draw the larger stationary parts in the different views. 
Determine limiting positions of moving parts if there are any. After this 
the smaller parts may be drawn very much in the same order as though 
assembhng the actual machine. Since a small scale is often used, judg- 
ment must be exercised as to the amount of detail to be drawn. The 
character of the machine must show in the completed drawing. Maxi- 
mum distances for stationary or moving parts, positions for foundation 
bolts, location of shafts, pulleys, piping and other dimensions having 
to do with erection or connecting up must be checked and are often 
given on the drawing. 

81. Identification, Record, Etc. — For commercial engineering work, 
clean cut drawings having a definite character and containing all essential 
information are required. Extra views or notes, ''fancy" lettering, 
complete detaiUng of standard parts to exact scale, confusion of dotted 
lines, and other non-essential work add to the cost of the drawing and 
to the cost of using the drawing. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



45 



Every piece drawn should have a name and a number so that it can 
be identified. The same name should always be used for a given part. 
The identification number for a part is generally put in a circle near the 
name of the part or the views representing it. 

When a drawing is started the date and draftsman's name should be 
written on it. When the tracing is completed it should be signed either 
in full or by initials, by all who have worked on it, as draftsman, tracer, 
and checker, and by those responsible for its approval. Abbreviations 
lead to mistakes and should not be used when they can be avoided. 
When used the possibility of misunderstanding must be considered and 
a standard form adopted. When changes are made on a drawing they 
should be indicated. This is often done by enclosing a letter in a circle 
placed near the change and recorded in the title or record strip with 
statement of change and the date when made. 

MATERIAL LIST 



Port 

/Vumi>er 


Name of Part 


No 
Peqct. 


Mat'/. 


Patterr? 
No. 


PemarAs 


/ 


&r?erg'er7C/ Va/v^e 


/ 


CJ. 


/^-932 




2 


Va/i^e 5ter77 


/ 


Stee/ 






3 


5ta/7/^^ ^ox (5/a/7c/ 


/ 


CJ. 


Mz933 




4 


G/and Stud 


2 


5tee/ 






5 


Va/\/e L//7er 


/ 


Tbo/Stee/ 






6 


3e//C/z7r7/f 


/ 


Too/Stee/ 






7 


Stud for Ata 6 


/ 


5tee/ 






6 


5p//t P/^ /br/Vo. / 


2 


Stee/ 




i>^' 



Fig. 79. Bill of Material. 

Part lists should be complete, and numbers for patterns, tools and 
dies or other necessary information for identification or record should be 
placed on the drawing and recorded on filing cards or in record books. 



BOLT LIST FOR 5"x6"5TEAM ENGINE 



A/o. 


//ome 


A/a 
ffe(/d 


S>A7^ 


ifffA 


Iff /A o^ 
TTp/TSOid 


Afa/^'/ya/ 


/Va 
Nats 


lOC£7t/b/? 


/ 


Stad-NexNut 


6 


6 


^i 


7 

3 


S/ee/ 


6 


C////d.&>Cy/ 


2 


3o//-Pex//d. 


6 


S 


^/ 


7 



3/ee/ 


- 


Cy/ /o Pn7/7?e 


3 


5ti/d-Nex/Vat 


d 


3 


^/ 


7 

e 


Stee/ 


S 


Cof^er itoSf/7?. C^esit 


4 


Set Sere l^^ 


2 


s 

6 


/i 


'i 


Stee/ 


- 


£cce/?/r/c to S'^d7/f 


5 


^o/Z-Z/ex/tdaNi/f 


2 


i 


^/ 


'i 


Seee/ 


4- 


^'cce/y/r/c 





















IiG. 80. Bolt List. 



46 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Every drawing should have a number and be recorded so as to be easily 
found. Systems of filing, numbering, recording, transmitting and keep- 
ing track of drawings vary with the kind of work, and the extent to 
which the drawings are used. Some forms are shown in Figs. 79, 80 
and 81. 

PIPE AND FITTINGS LIST 



5/ze 


P/pe 
Feet 




A/c/r?7^er of" 
F/tt/r?^s 


777rsa'£y3 


Af(7ter/(7/ 


McrA-e 


J. 

2 


36S 






/? 


^./. 




'i 


/SS 






/P 


l^/. 




li 




8 O/oiie 




P 


ffro'SS 


r-zco. 


/i 






3/E//3 


R 


C./. 




/i 






7 Tees 


R 


CJ. 




li 






5 Coc//?///7ffS 


R&L 


C./. 



















Fig. 81. Pipe and Fittings List. 

82. Idioms of Drawing. — The basis for all working drawings is ortho- 
graphic projection. For simple parts the regular views are used and 
all lines both full and dotted are drawn. There are many cases however 
when such representations might make it difficult to read the drawing, 
or require a long time to make the drawing. In the practical application 
of drawing it has been found necessary to depart from true projection 
under some conditions and to use special or idiomatic representations. 
Such conventional representations may be full views or sectional views, 
either partial or complete. A view of an object is not a picture and is 
not to be regarded as such, still we should be careful not to convey a false 
impression of an object or its construction. It is to avoid the possibility 
of such false impressions that various conventional representations have 
been developed. In the practice of engineering, time has ever been an 
important element, and conventions or representations of the more com- 




FiG. 82. Section without Dotted Lines. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



47 



mon parts of machinery have been devised to save time. The true pro- 
jection of a screw thread would involve drawing a helix and when the 
frequency with which screw threads occur is considered, the necessity 
for using idioms or ''engineering short hand" can be understood. There 
are many other conditions where conventional treatment is desirable. 

83. Treatment of Sectional Views. — It is not necessary to include all 
dotted lines beyond the plane of a section if they tend to confuse rather 
than help. In some cases only the sectioned surfaces and the full lines 
beyond them are shown, Fig. 82. Whenever dotted lines tend to con- 
fuse, they should be left out, compare Figs. 83 and 84. 




^^T:::^ 









I ! ' ill 



1~~ 
i 



^^ 




iJ 



nm 



Fig. S3. Complete Section. 



Fig. 84. Preferred Section. 



W^hen a sectional view is used in place of an exterior view, all of the 
full lines beyond the plane of the section are generally drawn. In cases 




m 



Section A- A 



F^ 




Section B-B Section C-C 

Fig. 85. "Sliced" Sections. 



48 



MACHINE DRAWING 



where the shape of the sectioned surface is the important feature or 
when the full lines beyond the cut surface require a great deal of time to 
draw without adding to the usefulness of the drawing, they should be 
left out as in Fig. 85, where several '^ sliced" sections are shown. 




Fig. 86. Plalf Section. 

A view should serve the purpose for which it is intended without 
unnecessary or confusing lines. Extra or part views are often sufficient. 

84. It is sometimes desirable to show both the exterior and section 
in one view. This can be done when the view is the same on both sides 
of a center line by drawing one half in section and the other half in full 
as in Fig. 86. All or most all of the dotted lines are often omitted from 
both halves. The planes of the section form a right angle and cut away 
one quarter of the object. If two ''half sectional" views are used they 




Fig. 87. Two Half Sections. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



49 



should be cut by planes which will bring the two half sections toward 
each other as shown, Fig. 87. 

85. When different pieces are shown in a section they are indicated by 
changing the direction of the cross hatching. The width of spacing 
between section lines is determined by the area to be sectioned, smaller 
areas having them closer together than larger ones. Different materials 
are sometimes indicated by different forms of section lining. Fig. 88 




Cost /ron 



Wrought /ron 



Cost Steel 



Wrought Steel 



Bobbil/- or 
iVhile Metal 





Copper, Brass 
or Composition 



Aluminum 



Rubber, \/ulcanite. 
or Insuloficn 



Class 



Wood 



V} 







IrValer 



Puddle 



Concrete 



Brick 



Coursed Uncoursed 
Rubble 




Ashlar 



Rock 



Original rilling 
^arfh 



Sand 



Other Materials 



Fig. 88. A. S. M. E. Symbols for Sectioning, 

gives the forms suggested by a Committee of the American Society of 
Mechanical Engineers. The spacing of lines shown will be found satis- 
factory for most areas. All lines must be fine, of uniform width and 
uniformly spaced. The character of sectioning must not be depended 
upon to tell the material and a note should always be added w^hen the 
materials are not perfectly evident. Their chief value is to make it 
easier to distinguish different pieces. 

86. Common Uses and Treatments of Sections. — There are many 
cases where parts of a view are not sectioned. Such parts as shafts, 
bolts, nuts, screws, rivets, keys, pulley arms, gear teeth, etc., are not 
sectioned even though the rest of the view is in section. This saves time 
and in many cases makes the drawing easier to read. Fig. 89. 



50 



MACHINE DRAWING 



,N\s:^\\)\sv 



Pulky arm 




Set screw 



■ Gear feeth 






ssfcss 







^Rib 



Bolt 




Fig. 89. Objects not Sectioned. 

A larger scale can often be used by ''breaking" the piece, and moving 
the parts together. The manner of breaking generally indicates the 
shape of the cross section and the material as in Fig. 90. This method 






rt 

UA 



v^m. 



r 



VTr/X^TTTT 



imm- 



FiG. 90. Revolved Sections. 

cannot be used unless the cross section is uniform in shape, generally 
shown by a ''set in" or revolved section. The true taper is drawn when 
a long tapering piece is represented by the above method, Fig. 91. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



51 



87. Treatment of Ribs and Special Sections.— When a sectional view 
gives a false impression of solidity it is often modified. Ribs, pulley 




T""""^' 


"" 








T" 


1 




i_ 






r 






. 


V 



Fig. 91. Tapered Piece with Section. 

arms, etc., are not sectioned for this reason, Fig. 92. Good practice 
requires the arms, ribs, etc., to be shown in their true length rather than 




Fig. 92. Section through Rib. 

as they would project. Fig. 93 at I is a true projection but better prac- 
tice is shown at II. 




I 

Fig. 93. 



^^y^^^/\ 



7////// 



Z//////^ >/////^y 



^/////J Y^///// 



E 



52 



MACHINE DRAWING 



When a rib occurs on a plane of a section in such a way that it is 
necessary to call attention to it, alternate sectioning can be used as in 




Fig. 94. "Alternate" Sectioning. 

Fig. 94. Note the use of the dotted line to show the extent of the rib. 
This method can be used to advantage on one view drawings. 

88. When small areas are sectioned the surfaces may be ''blacked in" 
as in Fig. 95. When large areas are sectioned the surfaces may be in- 



3 



Tn 



ri 



3 

4 



M 



Rib S/ee ve - Detail ^"^ 

Fig. 9o. "Blacked in" Section. 



dicated by short lines following the contour lines, Fig. 96, sometimes 
called ''herring bone" sectioning. Dotted sections are in the nature of 



y///////////////////y 



\ 



Fig. 96. "Herring bone" Section. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



53 



"phantom views" as shown in Fig. 97 where dotted section lines are 




Fig. 97. Dotted or "Phantom" Section. 

used on a full view to distinguish different pieces. This treatment 
sometimes saves an extra view. 




Fig. 98. Developed Section. 



A ''developed section" is shown in Fig. 98, where the true length 
of each part of the cutting plane shows in the sectional view. 



54 



MACHINE DRAWING 



89. Contour and Continuity. — The contour or characteristic ap- 
pearance of an object is often an aid in the quick interpretation of a 
drawing. This is illustrated in Fig. 99, where the usual treatments for 




Good procf/ce 



i ! I. \ \ 



H 



Good proch'ct 




\ L 

True projection - Not gooc/ 




True section - Not good 

Fig. 99. "Contour." 

exterior and sectional views are shown at I and 11. The true projections 
are not only less useful but require more time to draw as indicated at 

III and IV. 

The representation of a cyUnder head in Fig. 100 is a similar case. 
A true section on plane A-A is shown at I. At II the section is taken on 
B-B and revolved into position of A-A. The bolt holes and lugs are 
then located at their true distances from the center. An alternate 
method is shown at III, where the section C-F is revolved. 

90. Ribs, lugs, ears and other incidental parts are better left in full 
when they occur in a sectional view. The section of an object having an 



MACHINE DRAWING 



55 




Fig. 100. Symmetry. 

uneven number of incidental parts or having incidentals ''off centers" 
is best shown as though there were an even number and near but not 
coincident with the plane of the section. The general rule of continuity 
is to section those parts which continue clear around the axis. 

It is often desirable to show the contour elements of cylinders and 
cones unbroken when openings or attached parts would cause a break 




r^ 



Vi/ 



I 



Fig. 101. "Contour." 



56 



MACHINE DRAWING 




n+i — L i ) — '^T^ 





Fia. 102. Representation of Holes in Flanges. 




Fig. 103. "True Length" View. 




Fig. 104. Conventional Treatment. 



MACHINE DRAWING 



57 



if shown in true projection. This treatment is illustrated in Fig. 101 
in which the true section is shown at I and the conventional treatment 
at II. 

91. There are many cases where true projection is departed from in 
the interest of simplicity and clearness. 








i 




■■-^ 


i 
1 





■f- 


T^ 



Fig. 105. Conventional Treatment. 

The section or edge view of a flange shows the centers of the bolt holes 
a distance apart equal to the diameter of the circle of drilling, regardless 
of their true projection. In such cases the intermediate holes are not 
drawn as they add nothing to the information conveyed by the drawing. 
Several treatments for drilled flanges are indicated in Fig. 102. 




I r 



Fig. 106. Non-continuous Section. 

92. Special Views. — When an object has one part at an angle the 
two views do not have to project if a better representation may be ob- 
tained by revolving or developing one of the views or part of a view. 
In Fig. 103 the top view shows the true angle and the front view the 



58 



MACHINE DRAWING 



true shape of the left hand part of the object, by revolving it parallel to 
the vertical plane. Auxiliary views or parts of views are often convenient. 




Fig. 107. 

Some studies in representation are given in Figs. 104 to 108 which 
show both exterior and sectional treatments. The line marked in Fig. 
108 is not an actual line but is useful for reading the drawing. Special 




Ftg. 108. 

views and idiomatic representations have come about in the practical 
use of drawing as an engineering language. They have been adopted 
through custom because they convey the idea more clearly and exactly, 
or more quickly than strict conformity to the rules of projection would 
do. 



CHAPTER IV 
PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 

93. Dimensioning. — Dimensions are figures placed on drawings to 
tell the size of the parts which are represented. As generally considered, 
dimensioning also includes specification as to degree of accuracy, kind 
of finish, materials, number of parts, etc. To dimension a drawing suc- 
cessfully the construction of the patterns, methods of machining, fitting 
and putting together of the machine must be studied. 

94. Notation of Dimensioning. — The notation of dimensioning con- 
sists of lines and symbols used on a drawing to show the application of 
figures and notes to describe the size of a machine or part. 

The dimensioning of a drawing is never started until all the views are 
complete, thus finishing the description of shape. Following this, ex- 
tension and dimension lines are drawn to indicate the location of dimen- 
sions. Finally the arrow points, figures and notes are put on, using a 
lettering pen such as Gillott's 404. 

A dimension line, Fig. 109, indicates a distance, the amount of which is 
shown by a figure placed in a space left in the dimension line. 



/I Dn7/. 



Tap^ x20 Thds 



16 



^ 






7" 



^ 



.__ Small space 

- ' ^Arron^ point 

'■^D/mension- line 



^l(\j ^^ Space for figure 



-2 



5" 



if 



't> 



■^ico 



Short cf /stance 



Y K ^Extension line 



_1 



MACHINE STEEL 
"/ "all oyer 



Fig. 109. Notation of Dimensionins;. 

Arrow-heads or points are used at the ends of a dimension line to 
show the extent of a dimension. An arrow point very much enlarged is 
shown in Fig. 110. Note that it is two and one half times as long as it is 
wide and that the two sides are slightly curved. 

59 



60 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Extension lines are used to extend lines of a view when a dimension 
line is placed outside of the view. A small space is always left between 
an extension line and the object line, Fig. 109. The extension line 
extends a small distance beyond the arrow point. 




Fig. 110. The Arrow Point. 

Pointing or leading lines are very fine, full or dash lines drawn from a 
figure or note to show the part of the drawing to which the figure or note 
applies. They may be left plain, have an arrow point, or preferably 
half an arrow point. Fig. 111. 



■ Grind 



Crind 



Grind 



. Grind 



1— E 



n m E 

Fig. 111. Pointing Lines. 



95. Surfaces which are machined are said to be '^finished" and are 
indicated on a drawing by marking the line which represents the edge 
view of the surface with a symbol ^'/" shown enlarged in Fig. 112. 



/Machined Surface 


r 




r r .r r 


— ^^^^^^' 


J- y /■ f 


r^^tij^^^^S 




J 


J- 


Various forms of 


w^^^^ 


r 


the finish mark. 



Fig. 112. The Finish Mark. 

Feet are indicated by the mark (0 and inches by ('') as 5'-3". When 
all dimensions are given in inches the inch marks are often omitted. 
The figures should be placed so as to read from the lower and right hand 
sides of the sheet and in line with the dimension lines. Fig. 109. 

96. Elements of Dimensioning. — A definite method of dimensioning 
can be followed by separating constructions into parts. These parts can 
be divided into geometrical solids. Each of the solids can be dimen- 



PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 61 

sioned and their relations to each other fixed by location dimensions. 
Thus, there are two kinds of dimensions to be considered. 

1. Size dimensions, 

2. Location dimensions. 

97. The following six cases contain the elements of dimensioning and 
can be applied to most objects, Fig. 113. 

The first case is the prism and modifications of the prism. The 
length, breadth, and thickness are required. Two of these are given 



C(73e I 



■*—w ^ 




^r*j 




1 


1 







r 


/ 


^w,^ 






t 

1 


L— 1. 


^^— 





Case 2 










\^L—^ 


\ 


V////////Z 


kf- 




\ 


'//////////. 




U-/ — J 




CasG 3 



Case 4 






t P^-^ 



\JL 



U-S 



^5.- 



Case 5 



Case 6 



D'am V 






Fig. 113. Elements of Dimensioning — The Six Cases. 



62 



MACHINE DRAWING 



on one view and the third on one of the other views. In general dimen- 
sions are placed between views rather than to one side. 

The second case is the cylinder, where the diameter and length are 
given on one view. 

The third case is the cone and similar shapes where the dimensions 
are given on one view. 

The fourth case is the square pyramid and similar shapes where the 
dimensions are given on one view. 

The fifth case is any kind of pyramid where two views are used for 
dimensions. 

The sixth case is '^rounded end" parts where center distances are 
given. 

98. Systems of Dimensioning. — There are four general systems of 
dimensioning as follows (Fig. 114): 







I 
Fig. 114. 




Svstems of Dimensioning. 



I. All figures outside of the object lines. 
II. All figures inside of the object lines. 

III. All figures given from two reference or base lines at right angles 

to each other. 

IV. A combination of the preceding systems. 

The first system is favored as the dimension lines and figures are kept 
separate from the interior and allow details to be easily seen. The size 
and shape are separated. 

The second system may be used when there is little detail within the 
view. It preserves the outline of the view but often there is confusion 
due to the crossing of the lines and crowding of figures. 




^-- 



L/" 



£}-, 



E 



Fig. 115. Location Dimensions. 



PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 63 



The third system is particularly adapted to plate work and laying out 
where holes must be accurately located. 

The fourth system is the one generally used but making it conform to 
the first system by placing dimensions outside whenever conveniently 
possible. 




1- "1 


\ i i 7 


., 


\ i i / 





k 



n 



Fig. 116. Size Dimensions. 



-^ 



1 r 



u J 



Location dimensions are illustrated in Fig. 115, size dimensions in 
Fig. 116 and the application of the elements in Fig. 117. Note the similar 
position of dimensions, that each elementary part is dimensioned and 
its position fixed with respect to another part or reference line by a loca- 




^Location Dimensions "^Size Dimensions- 



Fig. 117. Elements of Dimensioning Applied. 



64 



MACHINE DRAWING 



tion dimension where needed. The location dimension for cyhndrical 
and similar parts is given from the axis of the cylinder. 

99. Location of Dimensions. — Facility in manufacture should be a 
motto in dimensioning. The figures must be so placed as to be easily 
found and perfectly clear in their meaning when found. Consider the 
effect of location upon ease of reading the drawing. It is very seldom 
necessary to repeat dimensions. Drilling is generally best located in 
the view where it shows in plan, that is, in the view where it is laid out. 
The drilling for flanges is dimensioned by giving the diameter of the 
bolt circle and the size of bolt holes. The holes are understood to be 
equally spaced unless otherwise noted. 

Dimension lines must be kept away from other lines and from each 
other. The clear distance between lines should be from Vie'' to Vie"? 
estimated. If there are several parallel lines they should be the same 
distance apart. Larger dimensions should be kept outside of smaller 
ones. In the interest of clearness there should be as few lines as possible 
crossing each other. Similar pieces should be dimensioned in exactly 
the same way. 

100. When a slanting dimension line must be used, the figure reads in 




II 1 ffi 

Fig. 118. Slanting Dimension Lines. 

line with the slant, either from the left or right as in Fig. 118 where the 
limiting angle is shown as 60°. 

When a dimension line is made continuous for several successive 
dimensions as in Fig. 119, it is said to be continuous. 

When the dimension lines for several successive dimensions are not 
continuous, they are said to be ''staggered," Fig. 120. 



^-^-^-^-^--0- 



FiG. 119. ''Continuous" or ''Chain" 
Dimensions. 





> 


— tl.. .^\.. 


e — 


^ 


^ 






^ 



Fig. 120. "Staggered" Dimensions. 



PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 65 



101. Methods of Finishing. — Kinds of finished surfaces should be 
indicated by a note as in Fig. 121. The meaning of the different shop 



3crope 




Fig. 121. Kinds of Finished Surfaces. 

operations involved should be found by consulting a good shop hand- 
book. Holes should be marked according to how they are to be formed 
or treated as: Core; Drill; Bore; Punch; Ream; Tap; Counter bore; 
Countersink, etc. Surfaces should be marked to tell the shop operations 
to be performed as: Finished; Rough Finish; Chipped; Spot Faced; 
Scraped; Ground; Polished; Filed; etc. 

The kind of fit is sometimes marked as Loose Fit; Running Fit; 
Driving Fit; Forced or Pressed Fit; Shrink Fit; etc. The tendency of 
present practice is to give the tolerance or limits of accuracy required. 

102. Dimensioning Arcs and Curves. — A number of cases of dimen- 
sioning arcs and curves are illustrated in Fig. 122. If a complete circle 



Q Diam. 




r ^'-fo^vard center 

Fig. 122. Arcs and Curves. 

is shown, give the diameter in preference to the radius. For arcs and 
fillets give the radius. If desired, the center for a radius may be in- 
dicated by one of the methods shown at I. For a very small radius the 
figure may be placed as at II. The note ''break corner" at III means 
that the sharp corner is to be removed so that it will be slightly rounded. 
The dimension line for an arc should always take a direction which would 
pass through the center as shown in the figures. The methods at IV 
may be used for small diameters. For other curves a templet may be 
called for, or shown full size on the sheet. Another method is to give a 
number of parallel dimensions and the distance between them as at V. 



66 



MACHINE DRAWING 



103. Dimensioning Angles and Tapers. — Angles are generally dimen- 
sioned by giving the number of degrees included between the two sides. 
Three methods of dimensioning angles are shown in Fig. 123. For many 



Rough 




Fig. 123. Angles. 

purposes standard tapers are used, in which the name and number of the 
taper is given in a note. This fixes all necessary dimensions as given in 
tables for B. & S. (Brown & Sharpe); Morse; Read Lathe Center; Jarno, 
and Sellers Tapers. Sometimes a note is employed giving the taper per 
inch or per foot of length, as V/' v^'^ S^ot. When the slope is considerable 
it may be given as a ratio, as 1 :1, indicating a 45° slope. When fillets or 
rounds come at the ends of inclined lines the methods of Fig. 124 at, I, 






Fig. 124. 

II, and III are used. The larger diameter at III although located inside 
gives the same dimension as at II. The dimensions indicate the dis- 
tances between the sloping lines where they cut the vertical lines. 

104. Dimensioning in Crowded Places. — A drawing should be made 
to a scale sufficiently large to carry most of the dimensions without 
crowding. It is not always possible to avoid a few somewhat crowded 
dimensions. Notes and figures may be placed out of their usual posi- 
tions when necessary. Some methods to use in such cases to preserve 
clearness are shown in Fig. 125. 

105. Dimensioning Shafts and Cylindrical Pieces. — Shafts should be 
dimensioned by giving the diameters and lengths together with the sizes of 
keyways and pins and their location, Fig. 126. Often the size dimensions 
both detail and overall are given below the view and the location dimen- 
sions above. 



PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 67 



Examples of dimensioning for shafts and similar conditions are shown 
in Fig. 127. The position of bearings is sometimes shown by diagonal 



3 

■16 



^ 



^2 




Fig. 125. "Crowded" Dimensions. 

lines, either plain or ''blacked in." A square section may be shown in a 
similar way. A note should be used in either case if necessary to make 
the meaning clear. Positions of pulleys, gears, etc., are located by center 
lines as in the drawing, Fig. 183. 



Gauge 




245 

Fig. 126. A Shaft Drawing. 

106. Dimensioning Wood Constructions. — Such wood constructions 
as the engineer has to do with seldom require such close dimensions as 
are common for metal machinery. Timbers are located by centers, 
and are dimensioned by note as 2x4; 4x6; etc. Sometimes with the 



( ^r 


X-i 


I ^ 


*^ 


■« »■ 



h 


r 


— 






J 



iL 




Bearing 




Sq 



— j^[ — 


Ic ,1 






Bearing 



Fig. 127. Shaft Representations. 



68 



MACHINE DRAWING 



length added as 2" x 8" — 6' — 10". Boards are specified by note as 
1'' X 10''; ^11' X 6'' etc. Such sizes are nominal rather than exact as a 
2'' X 4'' piece may measure iV/'xSV/', etc. General overall dimen- 
sions should be given and any other dimensions which must come to a 
required figure. Wood foundation timbers; crib work; shelves; wall and 
ceiling planks to support or hold machines, pulleys, etc., and similar 
mechanical uses of wood must be drawn and dimensioned by the mechan- 
ical draftsman. Fig. 128. Nails, screws, bolts, etc., are specified in notes. 



-3'- 35 



-2 '- /l5 - 



'2 - /n 



-3 '- 3i ■ 



-/2 



^ 



cn 



"K 



T=q 



Fig. 128. Dimensioning Wood. 

Nails are specified by a number followed by the letter d. S d means 100 
nails weigh 8 lbs. and is read 8 penny. 

107. Dimensioning for Interchangeable Manufacture. — The whole 
question of limits, fits, tolerance, manufacturing equipment of machines, 
tools, jigs, fixtures, etc., is involved in properly dimensioning a drawing 
for parts which are to be interchangeable. It is not necessary that 
limits be given for every dimension but only for those which are required 
because of the relation of parts. Some dimensions should be given 
without limits especially when particular accuracy is not required. Giv- 
ing limits for all dimensions frequently makes the specification ambiguous 
as where several part dimensions are each given limits and the overall 
dimension is also given limits as in Fig. 129. The separate dimensions 
might be within the limits but the overall might not be, as a great number 
of combinations of part dimensions is possible. Fig. 130 is the correct 
method where several dimensions are given limits. In such cases take all 
measurements from the same surface. The dimensioning of drawings for 
interchangeable manufacture is well treated in a series of articles by 
Earle Buckingham, starting in the July 1919 number of ''Machinery," 
Industrial Press, New York, from which the following is quoted. The 
complete article should be studied by those having to do with inter- 
changeability. 



PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 69 



108. ''The problem of the proper dimensioning of component draw- 
ings is strictly a mathematical one. There are a few basic principles in 
regard to it which are as fixed and simple as Newton's three laws of 
motion, but are even more difficult at times to apply correctly. When- 
ever either of the two following principles is violated, trouble will inev- 
itably follow: 

''(1) In interchangeable manufacturing, there is but one dimension 
(or group of dimensions) in the same straight line that can be controlled 
within fixed tolerances. That is the distance between the cutting surface 
of the tool and the locating or registering surface of the part being 
machined. Hence, it is incorrect to locate any point or surface with 
tolerances from more than one point in the same straight line. 



Incorrect 



"tOi-Atoi 



Correct 



t 01 

1 01 



Fig. 129. 



Limit Dimensions. 



Fig. 130. 



''(2) Dimensions should be given between those points which it is 
essential to hold in a specific relation to each other. The majority of 
dimensions, however, are relatively unimportant in this respect. It is 
good practice to establish locating points in each plane, and to give, as 
far as possible, all such dimensions from these common locating points. 

''There are also a few other general principles which it is good practice 
to follow. Although violations of them are not errors in themselves, 
they lead to many unnecessary errors. In all of this work we must 
realize that we cannot create anything that is altogether fool-proof; the 
best we can hope to accomplish is to make conditions such that little or 
no excuse remains for making a mistake. The three following principles 
are of this order. 

"(1) The basic dimensions given on component drawings for inter- 
changeable parts should be the maximum metal sizes, except for force 
fits and other unusual conditions. The direct comparison of the basic 
sizes are the most important cases. It is evident that these sizes are the 
most important ones, as they control the interchangeability. They 
should be the first determined and, once established, they should re- 
main fixed if the mechanism functions properly and the design is un- 
changed. The direction of the tolerances, then, would be such as would 



70 



MACHINE DRAWING 



increase this clearance. For force fits, such as taper keys, etc., the basic 
dimensions should be those which determine the minimum interference 
(which is the 'danger zone' in this case) and the direction of the toler- 
ances for this class of work should be such as would increase this inter- 
ference. 

'' (2) Dimensions should not be duplicated between the same points. 
The duplication of dimensions causes much needless trouble, due to 
changes being made in one place and not in others. It causes less trouble 
to search a drawing to find dimensions than it does to have them dupli- 
cated and, though more readily found, inconsistent. 

''(3) As far as possible, the dimensions on companion parts should 
be given from the same relative locations. This procedure assists in 
detecting interferences and other improper conditions. 

''If careful thought is given to these component drawings, much time 
and effort will be saved later in the shop. If they are neglected, all the 
future work will suffer. A large percentage of the mistakes made in the 
manufacturing departments may be traced back to improper component 
drawings." 

109. General Rules. — Some rules and practice not included in the 
preceding articles are here collected. 

For a complete drawing: give sizes of pieces for the patternmaker; 
give sizes and finish for the machinist; give assembly dimensions; give 
office dimensions; give notes where needed. 

Always dimension similar parts in the same way. 

Give dimensions from finished surfaces or to center lines. When a 
piece is symmetrical, the dimension is given "about" or across the center 
line, as at I, Fig. 131. Methods shown at II and III are sometimes used. 

Place dimensions so that other dimensions or lines do not cross them or 
crowd them. Where a number of dimension lines are parallel do not 
place the figures under each other but locate as in Fig. 132. 

"Overall" dimensions should be given when necessary as at I, Fig. 
133. For the piece shown at II, do not give overall dimension but give 
"center to center" dimension. 










. 










r?r 


i 


y/y 


'/J 


b 


^ 


V/. 


"^ 


is? 


////// 


y///A 


V//// 


^) 






i: 






A 



Tim 

Fig. 131. Dimensioning "About" and "Across" Center Lines. 



PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIMENSIONING 71 



When most of the dimensions are in inches, they may all be given in 
inches and the mark {") omitted. 

When feet and inches are used, always indicate by the mark (') and 




L-,#:l 




'^8 



Fig. 132. 

CO or by (ft.) and (in.). Decimals may have the point emphasized by 
writing thus 1.''05. 

Center Hnes and object Hnes have only one purpose and should never 
be used as dimension lines. 

On structural drawings, dimension lines are made continuous and the 
figure is placed above the line. 



C/Ve Oi^er all dimension 



Ci\/e center h center dimension 




I E 

Fig. 133. " Over-all" and ''Center to Center" Dimensions. 

Where clearness is not sacrificed, parts can sometimes be defined in 
one view by using a note to give missing dimensions or to specify diam- 
eters, etc. 

Small details which are standardized do not have to be completely 
dimensioned. This is true for bolts and screws, standard tapers, piping, 
wire, sheet metal, rope, chain, pins, rolled steel shapes, etc. See ''Ma- 
chinery" or ''American Machinist" Handbooks. A valuable article on 
"How Machinery Materials and Supplies are Sized" is given in "Ma- 
chinery," February, 1916. 

Do not put notes within the views if it can be avoided. Keep notes 
clear of all lines. 

In general, put all notes referring to the same piece together and near 
the view of that piece. 

Use pointing lines whenever they will make the reading of the drawling 
easier or where the application of a note might be doubtful. 

110. Checking Drawings. — The checking of a drawing is one of the 
important duties of most draftsmen. Whenever possible it should be 



72 MACHINE DRAWING 

done by someone who has not worked on the drawing. In the drafting 
room a blue pencil is used for checking if the tracing is marked. For 
some drawings a ''check print" is made from the tracing and used. A 
white, red, or yellow pencil is used on the blueprint. Sometimes one 
color is used for what is O K and another to make corrections or changes. 
For school drawings, a soft lead pencil is satisfactory. 

The first thing to do is to see if the drawing can be used without 
unnecessary difficulty, and to see if the parts are such as will fit together 
and operate successfully. 

There must be sufficient views to completely determine the parts. 

All necessary dimensions for making the patterns, machining and 
erecting must be given and properly located. 

Details and dimensions must be shown without crowding. This 
requires proper choice of scale. 

All figures must be checked for correctness by use of the scale and by 
computation. 

All notes must contain a clear statement and be carefully located. 

Notes containing the same meaning should be worded in the same way. 

The materials of which the parts are made should be specified. 

The construction of the patterns, cores, and methods of machining 
must be considered. 

All finished surfaces must be indicated. The kind of finish and 
accuracy required must be specified. 

Limits or tolerance, must be given for dimensions where necessary. 

Basic or starting surfaces and center lines must be located. 

Standard parts must be used where possible. 

The fewest number of different sizes of bolts and similar small parts 
should be specified. 

There must be clearance for moving parts. 

The name of each piece and the number required for a single machine 
or unit should be given on detail drawings. 



CHAPTER V 
MACHINE DETAILS 

111. Machine Operations. — The parts of machines which come from 
the foundry, forge, or roUing mill, generally require finishing such as 
machining to size, drilling and tapping of holes, etc., before they can be 
assembled in the machine where they are to be used. A knowledge of 
what is involved in the processes of machining is important to the machine 
draftsman. 

The principal operations are turning, drilling, boring, planing and 
milling. The machines used are lathes, drills, boring mills, planers, 
shapers, milling machines, etc. At least one book on machine shop 
practice should be studied while pursuing a course in machine drawing. 
The advertising pages of such magazines as ''Machinery" and "Amer- 
ican Machinist" are further sources of information which should not be 
neglected. Every opportunity should be availed of to observe and study 
work as it is carried out in the pattern shop, forge, foundry and machine 
shop. Such knowledge is invaluable and will often enable the draftsman 
to reduce the expense of production by simplifying or adapting his 
designs. 

There are many details which are used on a great variety of machines. 
Parts which are used for similar purposes on different kinds of machines 
have many features that are common to all such parts. In order for a 
machine to have "character" it is necessary for the designer to have a 
knowledge of what has been done by other designers and to be familiar 
with the ordinary standard details of machines. 

112. Graphical Data and Dimensions. — So much information is now 
given by graphical diagrams that their use must be understood by those 
who have to do with engineering matters. Charts serve to present 




Fig. 134. Lever Dimensions. 
73 



74 



MACHINE DRAWING 



information and to work out information as to power, forces, motions, 
and dimensions. Formulas and tables are often put into graphical form. 
When the curve is a straight line its slope can be figured from the equation 
for a straight line, y = mx + ^j in which y is the ordinate, x is the abscissa, 
m is a ratio and 6 is a constant. Other equations may be worked out 
from curved lines if formulas are desired. Sometimes the dimensions 





















2 
















^^ 












^ 


^ 














^^^ 


"^ 






sr 


















Q 




----^ 














1 




































c^ 





































12 /5 le e/ 

Dirr)ens/on L in inches 



pa 



^7 



30 



Fig. 135. Dimensions from Curve. 

for two or three sizes of a machine part will be figured and plotted and 
the dimensions for other sizes within the range of the curve obtained from 




Fic. 136. Engine Details. 



MACHINE DETAILS 75 

the graphical chart. This is illustrated in Figs. 134 and 135. The 
dimensions for three sizes of the lever are known as follows : 

L 6 18 30 

h V4 V4 V4 

d V2 'U IVs 

D 1 IV2 2V4 

W V4 V4 V4 

h 3/4 'U 'U 

Plot values of D for the three values of L and draw a curve as shown. 
Values of D for other values of L may be taken from the curve. Thus 
for 27'' length the value of D = 2" and since d = D/2 we have (i = 1''. 
The other dimensions are constant for all sizes. 

113. Engine Details. — Steam engine details are typical of many 
machine parts. The names of the principal parts are given in connection 
with Fig. 136. 



1. 


Cylinder head. 


14. 


Eccentric. 


2. 


Piston. 


15. 


Outer bearing. 


3. 


Casing or lagging strip. 


16. 


Main shaft. 


4. 


Cylinder. 


17. 


Fly wheel. 


5. 


Piston rod. 


18. 


Inner bearing. 


6. 


Steam chest cover. 


19. 


Crank. 


7. 


Steam port. 


20. 


Crank pin. 


8. 


Slide valve. 


21. 


Frame. 


9. 


Exhaust port. 


22. 


Crosshead pin. 


10. 


Valve rod stuffing box. 


23. 


Crosshead. 


11. 


Valve rod gland. 


24. 


Crosshead guide 


12. 


Valve rod. 


25. 


Connecting rod. 


13. 


Eccentric rod. 







Steam is admitted to alternate sides of the piston by means of the 
slide valve which is actuated by the eccentric through the eccentric rod. 
The piston transmits the pressure of the steam through the piston rod, 
crosshead, and connecting rod to the crank. The crank causes the shaft 
to revolve, carrying with it the flywheel, from which power may be 
transmitted by means of a belt. 

1 14. Pistons are used in many kinds of machines and vary accordingly. 
A one-part piston is shown in Fig. 137. The names of the parts for a 
follower type piston are given for Fig. 138 as follows: 1, Piston Body; 
2, Follower; 3, Follower Bolts; 4, Bull Ring; 5, Packing Rings. To 
prevent loss of pressure by leakage past the piston some form of packing 
ring is used. Pistons are generally made of cast iron, as are the rings. 



76 



MACHINE DRAWING 



The rings are turned to a slightly larger diameter than the cylinder, a 
piece is then cut out, and the rings sprung into place. They are often 



"-\ 






Fig. 137. One Part Piston. 



Fig. 138. Piston and Follower. 



made with eccentric diameters Fig. 139 with the cut on the thin side. 
The cut may be diagonal or lap, as in the figure. 




/ 



I 



Fic. 139. Piscon Rings. 




t~ 




X) 


— 


m 


— 


^ 


— 


to 


- 


w 


-_ 






- 



Fig. 110. Locomotive Piston. 



MACHINE DETAILS 



77 



A form of locomotive piston is shown in Fig. 140. It is a steel casting 
for lightness and of conical form for strength. A gas engine piston is 
illustrated in Fig. 141. 




Fig. 141. Gas Engine Piston. 

115. Crossheads are used on steam engines, pumps, air compressors 
and many other machines. Two types of crossheads are shown in 
Figs. 142 and 143, with the names of the parts. The body of the cross- 




^ jt^ 



For piston rod 
Shoe 



Adjusting scre^ 
Adjusting nut 



Fig. 142. Crosshead. 




head is made of cast iron or steel and the gib or shoe of brass or may be 
babbitted. 

For wrist pin 
For piston rod. 




'^'^^"^^^^'^*\ 



^w^^^^'^'v^'' 



Crossfiead- 

(Slipper, J 

ASiioe or 
/ {Gib 




"X jinLt ij- 



Fig. 143. Crosshead. 



78 



MACHINE DRAWING 



116. A connecting rod is used to connect a sliding part of a machine 
with a rotating part. They are made of wrought iron, steel, and brass. 
Forms vary greatly. The ends may be solid or open. Some provision 




Fig. 144. Connecting Rod End. 

is generally made for adjusting the distance between the centers of the 
ends. The rod itself may have a circular, elliptical, rectangular, I- 




FiG. 145. Connecting Rod End. 

shape, or other form of cross section. Types of connecting rod ends are 
shown in Figs. 144, 145 and 146. 




Connecting Rod End. 



117. An eccentric is a circular disc which rotates about an axis which 
does not pass through its center, Fig. 147. An eccentric as made for 



MACHINE DETAILS 



79 



Total up and 
dot^n mofion. 
or Travel 




Axis of rotation 
^Path of center of disc 

Fig. 147. Eccentric. 



use on a steam engine to move the steam valve is shown in Fig. 148. It 
consists of the eccentric, eccentric straps and bolts. The eccentric is 



h± 



Eccentric Rod'^^^\^^, 




Lower 5 trap - 

Fig. 148. Eccentric Parts. 

secured to a shaft which causes it to rotate and so move the eccentric 
rod, which is attached to the straps. 

118. A crank is a machine part which rotates about an axis near one 
end. It may be a part of the shaft or made separate and secured in 
place. A crank disc, overhung crank, and center crank, are shown in 
Fig. 149 at I, II and III, where some general proportions are indicated. 




-^f~>-\ Qi^rhung Crank 

Fig. 149. Cranks. 



Center Cranf<, 



80 



MACHINE DRAWING 



119. Levers, Handles, Etc. — Levers, handles and similar parts are 
used on a great variety of machines and are made in forms to suit their 
purpose, Fig. 150. 






Fig. 150. Levers and Handles. 

The length of a lever is from center to center of holes or an equivalent 
distance as illustrated. 

The three classes of levers are shown in Fig. 151. In each case the 



Shaft 



Le^^er of 1st Class 






PL, = WL2 



, . P'pull 



k p 



Ley^er of 2nd Class 



-Lr 



w 



PL. = WL- 



W 



-Lz- 



-Ap 



Leyer of 3rd Class 
PL, =WLs 



r W 



Fig. 151. Classes of Levers, 
values for the loads or distances can be figured from the formulas. 



PLi = ^YU P = 



WL 



wu 



PU 



PL, 




Fig. 152. Bell Cranks and Bent Lever. 



MACHINE DETAILS 



81 



When the load and force act at an angle some form of bell crank is used, 
Fig. 152. Bent levers are used when it is necessary to avoid a stationary- 
part as shown. The length of a bent lever is the shortest distance be- 
tween the two centers. 

Handles are designed to suit a given position and so as to be con- 
venient for getting hold of and operating. Several forms of machine 
tool handles are shown in Figs. 153 and 154 with standard dimensions 
as manufactured by The Cincinnatti Ball Crank Co. (Tables 10 and 11). 

TABLE 10 

Machine Handles and Two Ball Levers 

(Cincinnati Ball Crank Co.) 



Ti 






OQ 




F 




Machine Handle T,^^o Ball Lever 

Fig. 153. Machine Handles. 



Size 


A 


B 


c 


D 


E 


F 


G 


u 


.7 


K 


L 


000 . . 


V4 

Vs 


V16 
V16 

Vs 

V16 

Vs 


V16 

Vs 

V16 
V2 
VI6 


.252 

.253 

.252 

.253 

.3145 

.3155 

.3145 

.3155 

.377 

.378 


V16 
V16 

VI6 
V16 


IV32 

1^V32 
12V32 

2 

2V8 












00 












. . . 












V2.... 
1 

IV2 












V4 

^Vie 

1V16 
1 
1 


IVs 

1V4 

IVs 

1V2 
1V2 


27l6 

21V16 
31V32 

3V4 

4V4 


V2 
V16 
V16 

^Vl6 
V4 


Vs 
V16 


2 

3 

4 

5 


1 

IVs 

1V16 
1V16 
1V4 

IVs 

1V2 


V16 
V16 
V2 
V2 
V2 
V2 

Vs 


^Vl6 

V4 
V4 

Vs 

^Vl6 

IVs 


.4395 

.4405 

.4395 

.4405 

.4395 

.4405 

.4395 

.4405 

.503 

.504 

.503 

.504 

.628 

.629 


^Vl6 
^Vl6 

^Vl6 
^Vl6 
^Vl6 

IV16 


2V8 

2V4 

3V32 
3Vl6 

3Vs 

4Vl6 
4Vl6 


V16 

1V32 

V2 


6 

7 

8 

10 


1 

1 
1 

IVs 

1V16 


1V4 
1V4 
1V4 
1V4 
1V4 


SVs 
5Vs 

evs 

7Vl6 

71V32 


V4 
2V32 
^Vl6 
^Vl6 

Vs 


V2 
V2 

^V32 
"/32 


11 















Vs 



82 



MACHINE DRAWING 



TABLE 11 

Ball Crank and Compound Rest Handles 

(Cincinnati Ball Crank Co.) 





Ball Crank Handle 

Fig. 154. 



Compound Rest 
' Handle 



Machine Handles. 





Size of 
Handle 


G 


H 


M 


iV 


P 


R 


S 


T 


u 


V 




Size 


i 



cc 
0, 






IT 


0... 
1. . . 

IV2. 

2... 

3... 

4... 

5... 

6... 

7... 

8... 

9... 
10... 
11... 
12... 
13... 


00 


V2 

1 

2 
2 
3 
4 
4 
4 
4 
5 
5 
7 
7 


1 
"2 ' 

2 

2 ' 
2 

"'3" 
3 

"4 ' 
4 


^/8 

V4 

1 

iVie 

P/16 
1V4 
1V4 


1 

IVs 

1V4 

1V2 
1V2 

1V4 
1V4 
1V4 
1V4 
1V4 

2 

2 


IV2 
IV4 
2 

2V4 

2V2 
2V4 
3 
31/4 

3V2 

3V4 

4 

4V4 

4V2 
5V2 
6V2 


1 

IVs 

1V4 
1V16 
1V16 

IVs 
IVs 

1V16 
1V2 
1V2 
P/16 

IVs 

l^Vl6 
PV16 


V2 

V2 

V16 

V16 

^Vl6 

2V32 

V4 

V4 

"/32 

2V32 

2'/32 

^Vl6 

Vs 

^732 
IV32 


Vs 
Vs 

V16 
V16 

^V32 

V2 

V2 

V2 

V2 

^732 

^732 

^V32 

V16 

Vs 

2V32 


Vs 

V4 


^Vie 

17l6 


Vs 

1V32 


V16 

^V32 


^Vl6 
78 


V4 
V4 
V4 
V4 
V4 
V4 
V4 
V4 

7s 
7s 
7s 

17l6 


17l6 
17l6 
17l6 
17l6 
17l6 
17l6 
17l6 
I7l6 

1V16 
1V16 
1V16 

IVs 


^V32 

^V32 

7l6 

7l6 

7l6 

7l6 

V16 

7l6 
^732 
^732 
"/32 

Vs 


"/32 
"/32 

Vs 
Vs 
Vs 

^V32 

^V32 

^V32 

7l6 

7l6 

7l6 

72 


7s 
7s 

IVs 

17s 
17s 

IVs 
IVs 
IVs 

1V16 
1V16 
1V16 

P7l6 



120. Stuffing Boxes. — Common forms of gland stuffing boxes and 
screw stuffing boxes are shown in Figs. 155 and 156. 




Fig. 155. Stuffing Boxes. 



MACHINE DETAILS 



83 



The gland stuffing box is used for rods IV2'' and more in diameter. 
The names of the parts are given on Fig. 155. The box should be deep 
enough for at least four strands of packing and the gland proportioned so 




Stuffing Boxes. 



as to compress it to about one half its original length. The box and 
gland may be either flat or bevelled. If lined with composition the 
lining should be at least Vie'' thick, but for small rods (less than 2" 
diameter) it is generally advisable to make the gland either all brass or 
cast iron. The gland is moved by turning the nuts on the studs. 

For rods \^W diameter or less the common screw stuffing box, is 
much used. It is made of brass or composition except on very cheap 
work where cast iron is used. 

Some general proportions for use with Fig. 155 are as follows: A = 
IAD + A'\ 5 = .8D + .8", C = 'UD + V/' or more, E = .SD + .8'', 

F = 2.5D + r^ 

These are the common types, but the student should investigate and 
make sketches of some of the metallic packings as they are much used in 
good designs. 

121. Fillets, Rounds, Arcs, Etc.— The suggestions which follow are to 
facilitate the drafting part of design and are not rules which must be 
strictly adhered to. 





It*' 



3. 




Fig. 157. Limiting Radii, Fillets and Rounds. 

Fillets and rounds are so common that they should be understood. 
A part of a machine is shown at Fig. 157. The centers and radii are 
indicated. All the radii at I are too large, particularly those marked 



84 



MACHINE DRAWING 



1 and 2. Radius 1 gives a point at y. Radius 2 is so large that it cannot 
be used for the complete circumference of the boss indicated at x. Of 
course a changing radius of fillet might be used, but this would not be as 
good design. 

The limiting radii are indicated at II while a much better design is 
shown at III. Note that the radii 1 and 2 are less than the thickness of 




Fig. 158. Effect of Different Fillets. 



the flange and boss respectively. The effect of a quarter circle is ob- 
tained by this method in which the flange and boss each start with a 
straight line. 

The effect of different fillets is shown in Fig. 158. At I there is an 
undercutting, at II the radius is too large, giving an irregular outline to 
the top view, while the correct design is shown at III. 

When arcs and straight lines are used the faults shown at a, Fig. 
159, should be avoided. Do not run an arc past the tangent point. The 
correct methods are shown at h. 

122. Flanges. — Flanges for two bolts or nuts may take a variety of 




III 



V//////// 



Fig. 159. Tangent Points. 



MACHINE DETAILS 



85 



outlines other than circular as shown in Fig. 160. After locating the 
centers of the bolt holes the extent of the flange may be found by adding 




I II 1 

Fig. 160. Flange Outlines. 

twice the bolt diameter to the distance between bolt centers. The out- 
line is often obtained as at I where the radius is equal to the diameter 
of the hole, with center as shown. A better design is to use a radius 
of one and one half the bolt hole diameter as at II. Either straight, 
circular or elliptical lines may be used to complete the outline. 






I n E 2 

Fig. 161. Flange Edges. 

The edges are often finished with curves so as to avoid machining as 
indicated in Fig. 161. 



CHAPTER VI 



BEARINGS, PULLEYS, ETC. 

123. Bearings. — The motion of machine parts is generally either 
translation or rotation. Supports for moving parts are called bearings 
when the moving parts rotate. For translatory motion the supports 
are called guides. 

The simplest form of support for a rotating member is a hole through 
a piece of metal. The rotating member is called a shaft or journal. A 
solid bearing is shown at I, Fig. 162. The shaft may rotate about a 
vertical axis as at II, in which case the support is called a step bearing. 



^^Z7Z^ 



m 



^ I ^ 



^ 



Plain 



Step 

Fig. 162. Bearings. 




Thrust 



The bearing shown at III is designed to prevent endwise motion by 
means of collars which run in spaces provided in the bearing. This is 
called a thrust bearing. 

124. Smoothness of surfaces is only relative. Surfaces in contact 
wear rapidly so that it is necessary to provide for lubrication and for 
taking up the wear. For this reason the bearing is generally made in 
two parts. When this is not done a ring of metal called a bushing is 
fitted into the bearing and may be replaced when worn. Divided bush- 
ings are used when the bearing is made in two parts. Such bushings are 
called shells or boxes. 

125. Bearing Metals. — For low pressures cast iron may be used but 
at high pressures and speeds it is liable to ''seize" as the heat cannot be 



'- 


_. 


I 


b:^^ 




T^ 




Fig. 163. Bearing Boxes. 
86 



BEARINGS, PULLEYS, ETC. 



87 



dissipated fast enough. For this reason other metals are used such as 
brass, various white metals and babbitt. Babbitt metal is softer than 





Fig. 164. Babbitted Boxes. 



brass, flows more easily under pressure, and if heated will melt without 
seizing. Its frictional resistance is low so that it makes a good material 




---Length = /iDI^ 



Fig. 165. Solid Bearing. 



to use. It is too weak to support a load so it has to be held in place by 
shells of brass or cast iron which are provided with anchorage grooves. 
The babbitt may be melted and poured into the shell, using the shaft 
to mould it to the right size. For better work a smaller shaft is used and 









1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

-L. 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


I ■ 
1 

1 
1 
1 
y.. 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 


■~j 


' 








r 




^ 










p- 


^i 


., .>^_ 






J 










1 






-^: 






' 


*- 






— 


£1 


— >-| 
B — 


J 






Fig. 1G6. Solid Babbitted Bearing. 



88 



MACHINE DRAWING 



the babbitt is peened into firm contact with the shell after which it is 
bored and scraped to size. 

126. Various forms of brass and white metal boxes are suggested in 
Fig. 163. The thickness t may be made about {d + 1.5)/12 where d 
equals diameter of shaft. Babbitted boxes are indicated in Fig. 164 
with some methods of supporting the babbitt. The thickness t may be 
made about {d + 1)/12 where d equals diameter of shaft. 

127. Simple Bearings. — For a simple solid bearing the proportions of 
Fig. 165 may be used. Some dimensions for a babbitted bearing, Fig. 

TABLE 12 (Fig. 166) 
Solid Babbitted Bearing 



Size of 


A 


B 


C 


E 


F 


G 


H 


Bolts 


Shaft, 
Inches 


No. 


Size 


1^16 and 1 

P/ie andlV4 

1V,6 and 11/2 

lii/ieand IV4 

115/16 and 2 

2Vi6 and 21/4 

2"/i6 and 21/2 

211/16 and 23/4 

215/16 and 3 


iVs 

1V8 
IV2 
PV16 

l^Vie 

21/8 
21/8 
2V8 

21/2 


5 

51/2 

6 

6V2 

7 

7V8 

8 

9V8 

101/2 


2 

2V4 
2Vl6 

2V4 
3 

31/4 
31/2 

3V8 

4 


3V8 
3V8 

4 

4V8 

43/4 
51/4 
53/4 
61/2 

7V8 


3 

33/8 

3V8 
4V4 
4V2 

411/16 

5Vl6 

5V4 

61/8 


V16 

^Vl6 
V8 
V8 
V8 

^Vie 

^Vl6 

1 


21/8 

2V4 

2V4 

3Vs 

3V8 

4 

41/4 
43/4 

4V8 


2 

2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 


V2 
V2 
V2 

V8 

V8 
V8 
V4 
V4 




Fig. 167. Split Babbitted Bearing. 



BEARINGS, PULLEYS, ETC. 



89 



166 are given in Table 12. A split babbitted bearing is given in Fig. 

167 with some dimensions in Table 13. The data in tables 12 to 16 is 
from the Royersford Foundry and Machine Company. 

TABLE 13 (Fig. 167) 
Split Babbitted Bearing 



Size of 
Shaft, 
Inches 



B 



C 



E 



F 



G 



H 



Bolts 



No. 



Size 



'U 

Vs 

^Vie 

I 

IVs 

13/i6 and IV4 

IV16 

IV16 and IV2 
PV16 and IV4 

II Vie- and 2 
2Vi6 and2V4 
2Vi6 and2V2 
21V16 and 2V4 
21V16 and 3 



4V2 
4V2 
5 
5 

5V2 
5V2 

6V8 
6V8 

6V8 
7V2 
8V8 

91/4 
10V4 
1P/16 



1V4 

IVs 

1V8 

1V8 

1V8 

l^Vl6 

l^Vl6 

2Vl6 

2V8 

2V8 

3V8 

3V2 

33/4 



3V8 

3V8 

33/4 

33/4 

41/4 

4V4 

4IV16 

4IV16 

5Vl6 

5V8 

6V2 

7V8 
8V8 
8V8 



V8 

Vs 

V4 

V4 
15/ 



16 
16 
IV16 
IV16 
IV16 
IV2 
PV16 
l'Vl6 

2 

2Vl6 



V2 
V2 

V8 
V8 
V4 
V4 

Vs 

V8 



IV16 

IV4 

1V8 



IV: 



2 
/16 



2Vl6 
2Vl6 

2V2 
2V2 

2V8 
2V8 

31V16 
31V16 

4Vl6 

41V16 

5Vl6 
678 

61V16 

7Vl6 



1V2 
1V2 
1V4 

1^4 
2V4 
274 
2V8 
278 
278 

374 

378 
47l6 
478 
478 




Fig. 168. Hanger Bearing. 



90 



MACHINE DRAWING 



128. Hangers. — Bearings for line shafting are supported by some 
form of hanger with provision for adjusting the position of the bearing. 
The general appearance and some proportions are shown in Fig. 168 
(Table 14). A section of a ring oiled babbitted box for shafting is shown 
in Fig. 169. A rigid post box is illustrated in Fig. 170 (Table 15). 




Fig. 169. Section of Box. 

129. Pulleys. — The forms and proportions of pulleys are dependent 
upon their use. For belt drives pulleys of cast iron, wood or steel are 
used with flat belts made of leather, cotton, rubber and other flexible 
materials. 




Fig. 170. A Rigid Post Box. 





Fig. 171. Length of Belt. 



BEARINGS, PULLEYS, ETC. 



91 



TABLE 14 (Fig. 168) 
Universal Ring Oiling Hangers 



Size of 


Drop 


L'ng'h 




C 


D 


E 


F 


Bolts 


Shaft 
Inches 


A 


of B 
Boxes 


No. 


Size 


^Vie and 1 

lVi6 and 174 

lVi6 and 172 

P7i6and PA 

l^Vie and 2 


10 to 12 
14 to 16 
14 to 16 
16 to 18 
16 to 18 
18 to 20 
18 to 20 
18 to 20 
18 to 20 
22 to 24 
22 to 24 
22 to 24 
22 to 24 


43/4 
51V16 

evs 
71V16 

878 


1374 

17 
17 

20 


4 

474 

474 

5 

5 


1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


978 
1378 

13.78 
CM) 




2 
2 
2 
2 
2 


72 


2Vi6 and 274 

27,6 and 272 

2^716 and 2V4 

215/16 and 3 

3Vi6 and 374 

3 Vie and 372 

3i7i6and3V4 

315/16 and 4 


95/8 
10V16 
1172 
12 

1372 
1472 
1574 

1678 


2272 
2272 
2374 
2374 
2872 
2872 
2872 
2872 


6 
6 

7 

7 

lOVs 

1078 

1072 
1072 


IV4 

174 
172 
172 
174 
174 

178 
178 


1874 
1874 

1878 

1878 

2374 
2374 
2272 
2272 




' 43/4 ■ 
474 
474 
474 


2 

2 
2 
2 
4 
4 
4 
4 


74 

74 

1 

1 

74 
74 

Vs 



TABLE 15 (Fig. 170) 
Rigid Post Boxes 



Size of 
Shaft, 


A 


B 


c 


/ 


E 


F 


H 


G 


Bolts 






Inches 


















No. 


Size 


1716 and 1 . . . 


. 3V8 


7Vl6 


3 


78 


5 


178 


3V8 


378 


3 


72 


17i6 and 174... 


. 378 


872 


374 


78 


678 


274 


478 


374 


3 


72 


IV16 and 172... 


. 378 


10 


3V8 


78 


7\/2 


272 


578 


472 


3 


72 


I1716 and 174. . . 


. 578 


llVs 


4 


78 


874 


278 


678 


574 


3 


72 


Ii5/i6and2 ... 


. 5V8 


13 


474 


74 


10 


3 


778 


6 


3 


78 


27i6 and 274... 


. 578 


1474 


574 


74 


1178 


374 


878 


674 


3 


Vs 


2Vi6 and 272... 


. 578 


1674 


574 


78 


1274 


372 


978 


772 


3 


74 


2i7i6and274... 


. 578 


1674 


678 


Vs 


1274 


374 


10 


874 


3 


74 


2i5/,6and 3 . . . 


. 578 


1974 


7 


1 


15 


4 


1174 


9 


3 


Vi 



130. Belt Length. — The length of a belt for a pair of pulleys is best 
obtained by direct measurement, using a steel tape. For open belts, 
Fig. 171 at I, the length of belt may be calculated from the formula. 



L = .131 (Di + D2) + VX2 -f- (Di - 1)2)2. 



For crossed belts as at II, the formula is : 



L = .131(Z)i + 2)2) + VX2 + (£>i + D^Y; 
L = length of belt in feet, 
X = distance between centers in feet, 
Di = diameter large pulley in inches, 
D2 = diameter small pulley in inches. 



92 



MACHINE DRAWING 



131. A graphical method of finding the length of belt for cone pulleys 
is given in the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Transactions, 
Vol. X. Given Ri and R2 and distance between centers C, Fig. 172. 




Fig. 172. Cone Pulley Radii. 

Draw circles with radii Ri and R2 and a line tangent to them. At middle 
point of C erect a perpendicular and locate a point on it, .314 C above 
center Hne. With this point as a center, draw an arc tangent to the 
belt line. Lines tangent to this arc will determine diameters of other 
pulleys requiring the same belt length. 

When crossed belts are used, the sum of the diameters of each pair of 
pulleys must be equal to the sum of the diameters of every other pair. 





Fig. 173. Belt Tension. 

132. Horsepower Transmitted by Belts. — Power is transmitted by a 
belt because one side is tighter than the other. The difference in pull 
on the two sides depends upon the tightness of the belt, the friction be- 
tween the belt and the pulley and the arc of contact or wrap of the belt 
around the pulle3\ The tight side of a belt should come on the bottom 
so that any sagging of the belt will increase the arc of contact as at I, 
Fig. 173, where Ti is the tension in the tight side and T2 in the slack side. 

The power transmitted by a belt is determined by the difference in 
tensions and the speed of the belt. The horsepower transmitted is equal 
to the effective pull times the speed divided by 33,000 which may be 
written as a formula. 

33,000 



BEARINGS, PULLEYS, ETC. 



. 93 



Ti = Tension on tight side in lbs., 
T2 = Tension on slack side in lbs., 
V = Speed in feet per minute. 

The value of Ti may be taken at 35 to 50 lbs. per inch of width for 
single belts and 60 to 90 lbs. per inch of width for double belts. The 
value of V should be less than 2,000 feet per minute when this formula 
is used. * 

For higher speeds the effect of centrifugal force must be considered. 
(See Machinery's Handbook or Mark's Handbook.) 

Common empirical rules often used are: 



and 



WV 

1 HP = for single belts 

1000 ^ 



WV 

1 HP = for double belts. 

600 




Fig. 174. Pulley Proportions. 

133. Pulley Proportions. — Some proportions of cast iron pulleys are 
shown in Fig. 174. Note the construction circle for the pulley arms. 



y////////////A CZZZZ^ZZZZZZZZl EZZZE^^ZZZZZ 



y////////////A 



V////////////A 



W^/////////A 



V/////////////A 



V//////////A 



y/////////A 



/////////////?>x 



Fig. 175. Rims and Hubs. 






94 



MACHINE DRAWING 



The taper toward the rim may be ^U" to Vs'' per foot on each side. In 
the left hand view the taper may be about half as much. Several forms 
of rims and hubs are indicated in Fig. 175. In order to prevent a belt 
from slipping off, the face of the pulley may be provided with flanges as at 



0.4 






















5« 




















^-^^ 
















^----^^ 






■"^02 












___-—— 


-"^ 














__^ 














,5 




,^ 


^ 


^^ 














• 











































0.4 



0.2 



6 12 18 34 30 36 42 ^3 

Width of PuJIey in Indies 

Fig. 176. Crowning Chart. 

IV, Fig. 175. The usual method, however, is to use a ''crowned" 
pulley as at II and III. The belt tends to ''ride" on the highest part 
of the pulley. The amount of crowning varies greatly but may be taken 
from Fig. 176. 





Fig. 177. Pulley Arms. 



134. Pulley arms are commonly made elliptical in section although 

TABLE 16 

Standard Keyseat Dimensions 
For Pulleys and Rope Sheaves 



Diameter 






Diameter 






of Shaft, 


w 


T 


of Shaft, 


w 


T 


Inches 






Inches 






^Vl6— 1V8 


V4 


V8 


3Vi6 — 3V8 


7s 


7l6 


lVl6— IVs 


Vl6 


^32 


31V16— 3V8 


^Vie 


^732 


lVl6 —IVs 


Vs 


'U 


31^16—478 


1 


72 


l^Vie— 1V8 


Vl6 


V32 


4Vr6 — 4V8 


178 


72 


-l^Vie— 2V8 


-V2 


^V4 


4^7i6— 5V8 


174 


72 


2Vi6 — 2V8 


Vl6 


V32 


5Vi6 — 5V8 


178 


72 


2Vi6 — 2V8 


"h 


Vl6 


51716— 6V8 


172 


78 


2iVi6— 2V8 


^Vl6 


^732 


6^^16—778 


1V4 


74 


2iVi6— 3V8 


V4 


V8 


71V16— 878 


2 


74 


3V.6 — 3V8 


^Vl6 


^V32 










Fig. 178. Kevseats. 



BEARINGS, PULLEYS, ETC. 



95 



other sections are sometimes used, Fig. 177. Standard keyseat dimen- 
sions for pulley hubs are given with Fig. 178 in Table 16. 




Fig. 179. C. I. Split Pulley. 

135. For convenience, cast iron split pulleys. Fig. 179, are made. 
Steel pulleys are light and strong and can be used at higher speeds than 
cast iron. For some purposes wood pulleys, Fig. 180, are desirable. 




Fig. 180. Wood Pulley. 



CHAPTER VII 
SHAFTING AND COUPLINGS 

136. Shafting. — Shafting is made from various grades of wrought 
iron and steel. Cold rolled shafting is much used. This is shafting 
which has been cleaned of scale and rolled under pressure. It can be 
used for many purposes without machining to size and is considerably 
strengthened by the surface which comes from the rolling process. Cold 
rolled shafting is ordinarily made in diameters starting at Vie'', increasing 
by Vie'' and in lengths up to 24 feet. 

Hot rolled shafting is ''black" and must be turned to size before using. 
Actual diameters are Vie'' less than nominal diameters. 

137. Standard Sizes. — It is probable that diameters of shafting will be 
standardized in order to do away with the present great variety. De- 
sirable sizes for standard shafting are reported in the A. S. M. E. Journal 
(Mechanical Engineering, April, 1920) as follows: 

Transmission Shafting Diameters: 

^Vie"; iVie"; iVie"; PVie"; i^Vie"; 2Vi6"; 2Vi6"; 2''k,"; sVie"; S^Vie"; 4Vi6"; 
41V16"; 5Vi6"; 51V16". 
Machinery Shafting Diameters : 

Size intervals extending to 2V2 in., by sixteenth inches; from 2V2 in., to 4 in., 
inclusive by eighth inches; and from 4 in., to 6 in., by quarter inches. 

138. Special Shafts. — Special shafts have to be forged of steel suitable 
for the particular purpose. Shafts for machine tools and power machin- 
ery are made with varying diameters and must be completely dimensioned 
as indicated in Fig. 126. 

139. To Compute the Diameter of a Shaft. — The diameter of a shaft for 
a given purpose will depend upon the material, the speed, and the char- 
acter of the load. If a force is applied at a distance from the center of a 
shaft it will tend to twist the shaft. Fig. 181. The measure of this 




SHAFTING AND COUPLINGS 97 

twisting tendency is called the twisting moment and is equal to Mt = PR 
in which P = pounds and R = inches. The moment of the stress within 
the shaft must equal this twisting moment, or 

r 

in which S' = shearing stress in pounds per square inch, r = radius of 
shaft in inches, and J = polar moment of inertia. 

For a solid shaft J = Trd'^/32 in which d = diameter of shaft. 

Then PR = S^ird^/IQ or solving the equation for d this becomes 



which is the formula for figuring the size of a solid shaft. 
For a hollow shaft 

S'lridi^ - d2^) 



PR = 



lUi 



in which di = outside diameter and d2 = inside diameter. 

140. Horse Power Transmitted. — To figure a shaft for a given horse 
power let H.P. = horsepower = 33,000 ft. lbs. per minute and N — 
number of revolutions per minute. 

^ p ^ PR2.N 



12 X 33,000 



Substitute the value S^ird^/IQ for PR and the equation may be put 
into the form 

^ ^ A^ 321,000 H.P . 

This formula m^y be written 

d = fc ^HP . 

N 

Values of k for different values of S' are given in Table 17. 



98 



MACHINE DRAWING 



TABLE 17 



S' 


k 


S' 


k 


3,000 


4.75 
4.31 
4.00 
3.77 


7,000 


3.57 


4,000 


8,000 


3.42 


5,000 


9,000 


3.29 


6,000 







For main shafts S' may be taken at 3,000 to 4,000. For line shafts 
with pulleys etc., use S' = 5,000. For counter shafts and other short 
shafts the value of S' may be f rom 7,00 to 9,000. 

141. The formula d = k^CR.F./N) may be solved for the horse- 
power and written in the form 



H.P. = 



dm 



Constant 



TABLE 18 
Values of dW 



Dia. 






Revolutions 


per Minute 






of 
Shaft 


100 


125 


150 


175 


200 


250 


300 


350 


In. 


dm 


dW 


dW 


dW 


dW 


dW 


dW 


dW 


V-^ 


12.50 


15.66 


18.75 


21. .88 


25.00 


31.32 


37.50 


43.76 


Vs 


24.41 


30.51 


36.62 


42.72 


48.82 


61.02 


73.23 


85.44 


V4 


42.19 


52.74 


63.30 


73.83 


84.38 


105.5 


126.6 


147.6 


Vh 


66.99 


83.74 


100.5 


117.3 


134.0 


167.1 


201.0 


234.0 


1 


100.0 


125.0 


150.0 


175.0 


200.0 


250.0 


300.0 


350.0 


IVs 


142.4 


178.0 


213.6 


249.2 


284.8 


356.0 


427.2 


498.4 


1V4 


195.3 


244.1 


293.0 


341.8 


390.6 


488.2 


585.9 


683.6 


IVs 


260.0 


325.0 


390.0 


455.0 


520.0 


650.0 


780.0 


910.0 


IV. 


337.5 


421.9 


506.3 


590.6 


675.0 


843.8 


1013. 


1181. 


iVk 


429.1 


536.4 


643.7 


750.9 


858.2 


1073. 


1287. 


1501. 


PV.fi 


480.6 
727.3 


600.8 
909.1 


720.9 
1091. 


841.0 


961.2 


1202. 


1442. 


1682. 


i^V.fi 


1273. 


1455. 


1818. 


2182. 


2546. 


2V.fi 


1047. 


1309. 


1571. 


1832. 


2094. 


2618. 


3141. 


3664. 


2V4 


1139. 


1424. 


1709. 


1993. 


2278. 


2848. 


3417. 


3986. 


2V.fi 


1237. 


1546. 


1856. 


2165. 


2474. 


3092. 


3711. 


4330. 


2V.6 


1448. 


1810. 


2172. 


2534. 


2896. 


3620. 


4344. 


5068. 


2iVifi 


1941. 


2426. 


2912. 


3397. 


3882. 


4852. 


5823. 


6794. 


2iV.fi 


2535. 


3169. 


3803. 


4436. 


5070. 


6338. 


7605. 


8872. 


3V.fi 


4062. 


5078. 


6093. 


7110. 


8124. 


10160. 


12190. 


14200. 


31^,6 


6105. 


7631. 


9158. 


10680. 


12210. 


15260. 


18320. 


21360. 


4V. 


9113. 


11390. 


13670. 


15950. 


18226. 


22780. 


27340. 


31900. 


5 


12500. 


15630. 


18750. 


21880. 


25000. 


31260. 


37500. 


43760. 


5Vp 


16640. 


20800. 


24960. 


29120. i 


33280. 


41600. 1 


49910. 


58240. 


6 


21600. 


27000. 


32400. 


37800. 


43200. 


54000. 1 


64800. 


75600. 



SHAFTING AND COUPLINGS 



99 



Values of this constant as given by the B. F. Sturtevant Co., follow. 

Turned steel shafting, head shafts, well supported. Constant = 125. 

Cold rolled shafting, head shafts, well supported. Constant = 100. 

Turned steel shafting, hne shafts, bearings 8 ft. apart. Constant = 90. 

Cold rolled shafting, line shafts, bearings 8 ft. apart. Constant = 70. 

Turned steel shafting, countershafts, bearings not over 8 ft. apart. Constant = 50. 

Cold rolled shafting, countershafts bearings not over 8 ft. apart. Constant = 40. 

Values of (fN are given in Table 18. 

142. Shaft for Bending and Twisting. — When a shaft carries a heavy- 
flywheel or is otherwise subject to bending as well as twisting we must 
allow for both stresses. This is done by finding a moment equivalent 
to the bending and twisting moments together using the forrPdila 



Me = M -{- ^Mt' + M\ 



■Square Shoulder 



ruiet 

Fig. 182. Square and Filleted Shoulders. 



Collar 



'5i -\^iii 



e-€, 



15" 



3-3. 



5' 



-ff^—i'-i 



■IB A 



I'jl Common Flat Box 

'V 




4^ PD. 4P ^'race 
Steel spur pinion 




V1A'^_ 



24 Dio 6 Std Face C I 
Tight 3 toose pulleys 



4-; 



T. Holes 



3J\^—I0^—- 
Shoff 



6-3 



40 Dio '^ Face- Sfeel pulley' 



I IB Solid Collar 



N.IS! 



Drop 
Hanger 



COUNTERSHAFT NO. I 

l^'O'd 6'j'Long. Tour Wanted 
Z<.a\c.\'{--\^\ 
April 19,1920. 



Fig. 183. A Shafting Drawing. 



100 



MACHINE DRAWING 



in which Me = equivalent moment. M = bending moment and Mt 
twisting moment. 

The formula for diameter then is 



d = 



VlGM, 



TT. 



S' 



143. Shaft Details. — Methods of dimensioning shafts and other de- 
tails are given in Chap. IV. Square and filleted shoulders and a shaft 
collar are indicated in Fig. 182. The filleted form is of course, stronger 
than the square corner shoulder. A part of a shafting drawing is shown 
in Fig. 183. Note the various series of dimensions, the location of 
bearings, pulleys and other details. 

144. Couplings. — Couplings for joining lengths of shafting together 
are made in many forms. A solid sleeve or box coupling is a hollow 
cylinder which holds the ends of the shafts, Fig. 184. Set screws or 
keys are used to hold the shafts in place. Table 19 gives dimensions.* 



TABLE 19 (Fig. 184) 
* Dimensions of Solid Sleeve Couplings 




^ 



/////A 



B- 



D 


A 


B 


15 
16 


2^ 


4 


'fe 


^i 


^'a 


'fe 


3 


^/ 


hi 


3 


5^ 


'Is 


3 ' 


6 


//# 


4 


7 



Fig. 184. Solid Sleeve Coupling. 



145. The split box or clamp coupling shown in Fig. 185, is made in 
halves which are bolted together and are keyed to the two shafts. Some 
dimensions are given in Table 20. 

146. A simple flange coupling is illustrated in Fig. 186. Each half 
is keyed to the end of a shaft and the two halves bolted together. Some 
dimensions are given in Table 21. 

* Tables 19 to 22 are from the Royersford Foundry and Machine Company, Inc. 



SHAFTING AND COUPLINGS 



101 




Fig. 185. Clamp Coupling. 



TABLE 20 (Fig. 185) 
* Dimensions of Clamp Couplings 



Size of 


3 
^ 




Size 
of 


Bolts 


Shaft, 






Inches 






Keyseat 


No. 


Size 


^Vie and 1 


SVs 


4 


V4 


4 


V2 


lVi6 and IV4 


61/4 


4V4 


V4 


4 


V2 


l"/i6 and IV2 


TVs 


41/2 


Vs 


6 


V2 


l^Vie and IV4 


81/4 


51/8 


V16 


6 


V8 


PV16 and 2 


8V8 


51/2 


V2 


6 


Vs 


2Vi6 and 21/4 


9Vl6 


53/4 


V16 


6 


V4 


2"/i6 and 2V2 


9V8 


61/4 


Vs 


6 


V4 


2^716 and 2V4 


lOVs 


7V4 


"/16 


6 


V4 


215/16 and 3 


12 


7V4 


V4 


6 


Vs 


3Vi6 and 31/4 


12V8 


Vk 


V4 


6 


Vs 


3Vi6 and 31/2 


131/2 


8 


V8 


6 


Vs 


31V16 and 33/4 


141/4 


91/2 


V8 


6 


Vs 


31V16 and 4 


151/2 


101/4 


1 


6 




43/16 and 41/4 


171/2 


101/2 


1 


8 




4Vi6 and 41/2 


171/2 


11 


IVs 


8 




411/16 and 43/4 


183/8 


11 


1V8 


8 




41V16 and 5 


183/8 


IIV4 


IV4 


8 


1V8 


53/16 and 51/4 


191/4 


141/4 


IV4 


8 


IV4 


5Vi6 and 51/2 


191/4 


141/4 


1V8 


8 


IV4 


5'Vi6 and 5^/4 


20 


16 


IVs 


8 


1V8 


515/16 and 6 


20 


16 


1V2 


8 


IVs 


6'/i6 and 61/2 
6iV,6 and 7 


223/8 

231/4 




1V8 
IV4 








::!!!. .i 



102 



MACHINE DRAWING 




Fig. 186. Flange Coupling. 



TABLE 21 (Fig. 186) 
* Flange Couplings 



Size of 


A 


B 


c 




Size 

of 

Keyway 


Bohs 


Shaft, 
Inches 


Xo. Size 


''lie and 1 
17i6 and 174 
17i6 and 172 
1^716 and 174 
1^716 and 2 
27i6 and 274 
27i6 and 272 
2^716 and 274 
2^716 and 3 
37i6 and 374 
37i6 and 372 
3^716 and 374 
3^716 and 4 
47i6 and 474 
47i6 and 472 
41716 and 474 
4^716 and 5 
57i6 and 574 
57i6 and 572 
5^716 and 574 
51716 and 6 


47s 

674 
778 
878 

9 

972 

1074 

1074 

1078 
12 

1274 

13 
13 

1478 

1478 
1672 

1672 

' 1774 

: 1774 
19 
19 


374 

478 
578 
672 

778 

8^'4 

9 
10 
10 

1078 
1078 

1178 
1178 

1178 

1173 

1378 

137s 

1474 
1474 

16 
16 


178 
278 
278 

272 

278 

3 

374 
374 

374 

378 
378 
378 
378 

4 

478 

53/4 
53/4 

6 
6 

672 
672 


178 

23/4 
33/8 

4 

4V2 

5 

574 

674 
674 
63/4 
63/4 
678 

8 
8 

872 

1072 

1072 

1072 

103/4 

11 

1174 


74 

V16 

78 

V16 

72 
7l6 

^/s 

^7l6 
V4 
74 
78 

Vs 

1 
1 

178 
178 

174 
174 

178 
178 

172 


3 72 

4 72 

5 72 

5 78 


5 
5 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
8 
8 
8 
8 
6 
6 


Vs 
Vs 

74 
74 

Vi 

74 
V4 
74 
78 
V8 
V8 
V8 
V8 

Vs 

1 
1 



SHAFTING AXD COUPLINGS 



103 



A square jaw clutch coupling is shown in Fig. 187 and dimensions are 
given in Table 22. 



^ 



u 


'^ 




1 1 


^ t 






T 


^ 








I 1 




Fig. 1S7. Square Jaw Coupling. 



TABLE 22 (Fig. 187) 
* Jaw Clutch Couplings 



s 


ize of 














Size 


Shaft, 


A 


B 


C 


E 


F 


G 


of 


Inches 














Keyway 


^Vifi 


and 1 






7l6 


P/l6 


and IV4 


378 


378 


3 


27l6 


7s 


7l6 


7l6 


l"/l6 


and IV2 


37s 


378 


3 


27l6 


78 


7l6 


7s 


l^Vie 


and IV4 


474 


474 


374 


274 


'7l6 


72 


7l6 


PVl6 


and 2 


47l6 


57s 


4 


374 


1 


V2 


72 


2Vl6 


and 2 'A 


472 


572 


474 


374 


^7l6 


7l6 


7l6 


27l6 


and 2V2 


474 


6 


47s 


378 


1 


Vs 


78 


21Vl6 


and 23/4 





672 


474 


4 


1 


Vs 


"/16 


21^16 


and 3 


oVs 


7 


574 


4^7l6 


1 


Vs 


74 


3Vl6 


and 31/4 


574 


778 


572 


474 


I7l6 


Vs 


7s 


37l6 


and 31/2 


57s 


874 


67s 





1V16 


V4 


Vs 


S^Vie 


and 3V4 
















S^Vie 


and 4 


7 


972 


7 


572 


17s 


74 


1 


4"/l6 


and 4V2 


7 


11 


8 


672 


178 


74 


iVs 


41V16 


and 5 

and 0V2 
















5Vi6 






5'Vl6 


and 6 
and 6V2 






6'/i6 




6i5/,fi 


and 7 





CHAPTER VIII 
JIGS, FIXTURES, AND DETAILS 

147. Jigs and Fixtures. — It is not the purpose of this book to discuss 
the design of jigs and fixtures but a few suggestions bearing upon the 
drafting of such devices will be given. 

Jigs and fixtures have come into existence through the standardizing 
of operations necessary for quantity production and interchangeable 
manufacture. 

148. Fixtures. — The terms, jigs and fixtures are often used for the 
same thing. A fixture may be considered as a device to hold work on a 
machine in the proper position for the different operations and is de- 
pendent upon the action of the machine to accomplish its purpose. Fix- 
tures are classified by the machines with which they are used and the 
method of machining, operating, etc. A milling machine fixture might 
be considered as typical. 

149. Jigs. — A jig may be considered as a device for holding a piece to 
insure uniformity when a number are to be made. For instance a 
drilling jig would hold a piece and provide a means for guiding the drill 
so that each piece would have the holes drilled alike. It is not dependent 
upon the machine with which it is used. Jigs might be classed as cast 
iron box jigs, template type, interchangeable bushing type, etc. 

150. Jig and Fixture Drawings. — The general procedure for making 
drawings of shop devices is similar to any other kind of design drawing. 




Ream 



Fig. 188. Simple Beam Detail. 

The ^'production," or part to be machined should be drawn first, 
using light pencil lines or other distinctive representation, to show its 

104 



JIGS, FIXTURES, AND DETAILS 



105 



I— 






r\ 



\j^ 



1"*^-^ 



.-\- 



&^ 



.J 1 



L- 



'' I 



I I 

J [ 



1-- 




o3 



fcC 

a 

C 






a.' 



c 



• ^ 



106 



MACHINE DRAWING 



form after the operations have been completed. The jig or fixture can 
then be designed ''around" the piece. 

The considerations given in Art. 153 should be kept in mind. Finished 
surfaces should be indicated and necessary dimensions given. Limits of 
accuracy must be specified where required. 

151. A typical jig drawing for the simple beam of Fig. 188 is shown in 
position in Fig. 189. The work is shown in position by light dash hues. 
The work rests upon the finished pads of the body and is held by the two 
screws which pass through the lid. Two "V" blocks, one of which is 
adjustable, fix the work in its horizontal position. The bushings for 
drilling and reaming are held in the lid. The lid is hinged at the left 
end and clamped at the right end. 

152. A fixture drawing for the arm detail of Fig. 190 is shown in 
Fig. 191. Two swinging blocks are used to locate the arm for the first 




//-/<9 Tap 



Fig. 190. Arm Detail. 



operation. These are then dropped down and two large blocks are used 
to hold the end which has been machined while the second operation is 
performed. Figs. 188 to 191 are from drawings kindly supplied by 
Arthur Brock, Jr., Tool and Manufacturing Works. 

153. Fixture Design. — The many forms of jigs and fixtures will not 
be described .here and the reader is referred to the books and articles on 
this subject. 

The Cincinnati Milling Machine Company in their ''Treatise on 
Milling and Milling Machines"* have a chapter on jigs and fixtures which 

* Published by Cincinnati Milling Machine Co., Cincinnati, O. Price $1.50. 



JIGS, FIXTURES, AND DETAILS 



107 



K.J 







rf\ 




fc/O 






C5 



>--==» 



108 MACHINE DRAWING 

has been used in the preparation of these articles including the following, 
''Axioms for the Fixture Designer." 

1. The clamp should be immediately above the supporting point. 

Note. — Disregard of this leads to springing of the work, or lifting of the 
work due to support point being transformed into a fulcrum. 

2. Three fixed supporting points should be the maximum for any rough surfaces. 

3. Supporting points for finished surfaces should be as small in area as is consistent 
with the pressure to be exerted by the clamps. 

4. All supporting points should be set as far apart as the nature of the work will 
allow. 

5. All side clamps should be arranged to press downward. 

6. The fixed supporting points should always circumscribe the center of gravity 
of the work. 

7. All supporting points over and above the original three should be sensitive in 
their adjustment. 

8. All clamps and adjusting supports should be operated from the front of the 
fixture. 

9. All clamps and support points that are operated or locked bj'' wrench should 
have the same size head. 

10. Support points should be set so high above the body of the fixture as to minimize 
the amount of cleaning required. 

11. Support points should have provision for easy removing and replacing in the 
event of breakage. 

12. Fixed support points should have provision for adjustments to take care of 
variations in castings from time to time. 

13. Clamps should be arranged so that they can be easily withdrawn from the work. 

Note. — This is to avoid lengthy unscrewing of the nut in order to give ample 
clearance between clamp and work. 

14. Springs should be used to hold clamp up against clamping nut. 

Note. — This is to avoid the falling down of the clamp and the consequent 
loss of time attendant on holding it up while inserting the work beneath. 

15. Supporting points and clamps to be accessible to the operator's hand and eye. 

16. Adequate provision for taking up end thrust so that this will not be dependent 
upon friction between work and clamp. 

All of the above axioms are applicable to almost every type of fixture. 
154. Some considerations in the design of fixtures are given as: 

''1. Rapidity of Clamping. 

''2. Accessibility for Inserting and Removing work. 

''3. Generous Ducts for the Escape of Chips and Lubricant. 

"4:. Removal of the Clamping and Supporting Members from the Cutter 
Zone. (Safety of Operation.) 

'^5. Elimination of Clamping Strains from Table of Machine and Ab- 
sorption of Same in Fixture. 

^'6. Provision of Mass in Excess of Necessary Rigidity to absorb 
Chatter." 



JIGS, FIXTURES, AND DETAILS 



109 



155. Standard Parts for Jigs and Fixtures. — There are certain stand- 
ard constructions and parts of jigs and fixtures with which the designer 
must become famihar, especially those used in his own line of work. 




Fig. 192. Adjustable Support Pins. 

Such details as bushings, handles, clamping devices, support pins, 
setting pieces, etc., might be considered. A few parts are given in Figs. 





I I H 

Fig. 193. Support Pins and Screws. 



E 



192 to 194, to which the reader should add sketches of special devices and 
arrangements. Dimensions will be found in the various machine hand- 
books. Table 23 of standardized bushings is condensed from the data 
sheet book of the Wright-Fisher Bushing Corporation, who publish very 
complete tables of dimensions of their standardized bushings, liners etc. 
Diameters may be had varying by ^lu" and in four standard lengths for 
each size. 



no 



MACHINE DRAWING 




Plain Stationary Bushing 




Shouldered Stationary Bushing 

Fig. 194. Bushings. 

TABLE 23 (Fig. 194) 
Dimensions of Standardized Bushings 



Slip Bushing 



D 


A 


B 


c 


E 


F 


G 


H 


I 


J 


Vs 


Vie 


^/32 


Vs 


V16 


Vie- 


Vie 


V2 


'A 


"Ae 


Vl6 


Vs 


^/32 


Vs 


V2 


V32 


Vie 


1V32 


'A 


V4 


V4 


Vie 


^In 


Vs 


V16 


V32 


Vie 


^V32 


'A 


Vs 


Vl6 


Vie 


^Izi 


V.e 


'V16 


V32 


Vie 


2V32 


Vie 


1 


Vs 


Vs 


Vie 


V2 


V4 


V32 


Vie 


"Ae 


V,e 


iVie 


Vl6 


"Ae 


Vie 


Vie 


'Vie 


Vs 


Vie 


2V32 


Vie 


I'A 


V2 


V4 


V32 


Vie 


Vs 


Vs 


Vie 


2V32 


'A 


I'A 


Vl6 


^Vie 


V32 


Vs 


1 


Vs 


Vie 


'Vie 


'A 


1V16 


Vs 


Vs 


V32 


V4 


IVs 


Vie 


Vie 


Vs 


'A 


iVie 


'Vie 


1 


Vs 


Vs 


1V4 


Vie 


V32 


'Vie 


'A 


iVie 


V4 


iVie 


Vs 


l\/8 


iVie 


Vie 


^/32 


3'/32 


'A 


IVs 


'Vie 


iVs • 


Vs 


1V4 


IVs 


Vie 


V32 


1 


'A 


" l"Ae 


Vs 


1V4 


Vs 


IVs 


iVie 


V4 


V32 


IVie 


'A 


l^Vie 


^Vie 


iVie 


Vs 


1V2 


PVie 


V4 


V32 


IV32 


'A 


IVs 


1 


IVs 


^/32 


IVs 


IV4 


V4 


V32 


I'/s 


Vs 


PV.6 



156. Standard Parts and Details. — When making drawings of ma- 
chinery it is always desirable and often absolutely necessary to con- 
sider the shop facilities available. This means that the designer should 
know the machines which will be used for making the parts and how they 
will be used. 







1 ( 


■) 




^ 



Fig. 195. Common Clamps. 

Some of the smaller appliances used about the shop should be familiar 
to the draftsman. Some usual clamps are shown in Fig. 195. If stand- 
ard equipment is on hand this is a simple matter that can often be used to 
advantage when deciding on how to hold a machine part for finishing. 



JIGS, FIXTURES, AND DETAILS 



111 



157. The application of holding devices is shown in Fig. 196, and 
drawings for some ''CAD" standardized apphances are shown in Fig. 



step Block __^ ^^ 

I Doub/e End Clamp \\~\\ _ ^^ 



'gle End Clamp 




Fig. 196. Holding Devices Applied. 

197. Drawings and dimensions were furnished by Mr. H. Cadawallader, 
Jr., of the Standard Shop Equipment Co., Philadelphia, Pa. Such de- 




'4i5ing/e End Cfa/np 




6 Double End Clamp 



I'l'i'i — r 



T-1 r 







~\ 


• 




_^ S Equal Spaces 


' 


:> 













» 


90 


'2° 


HiK 


'- 


V 


L->l 




\ 




r/. 




; 


1 


7/- 


6 4 


\~A 


. 






V J 








J 


1 


/-?" 






1 


^ '4 


- 












' ' 



' 




1 1 
1 1 
1 1 




■• 




\r'i-. 






- 




J V 




' 






\ C 




■ 






1 1 
1 1 
1 1 






1^ 




; ^ 




^ 



4 



'^^ 






'f^V>7:^ 



vi 



4 " Packing Block 




6 Step Block 



^ Wedge 



Fig. 197. Standardized Appliances. 



112 



MACHINE DRAWING 



vices can be purchased ready for use in a great variety of sizes and forms 
and save a great deal of time. 

158. The tables and notes which follow will suggest further informa- 
tion which the draftsman should have available in handbooks and note 



//f — H . 0005 per inch taper 




Fig. 198. A Lathe Mandrel. 

books. Standard T slots are given in Table 24, and ^'CAD" steel 
washers and machine table bolts in Tables 25 and 26. Standard tapers 
such as Jarno, Brown and Sharpe, Morse, etc., are given in full in, the 
American Machinist and Machinery Handbooks. A lathe mandrel is 
drawn in Fig. 198 and a pipe tap in Fig. 199. 



.843 Flats of 5q j per Ft taper 






1^ 






Fig. 199. Pipe Tap. 

TABLE 24 
Dimensions of Standard ' < T " Slots 



~l 



A.... 


V4 


^/16 


Vs 


V.6 


V2 


Vs 


V4 


Vs 


1 


B.... 


V2 


Vs 


"/l6 


^Vl6 


^Vl6 


lVl6 


1 


lVl6 


lVl6 


C... 


V32 


V32 


V32 


V32 


^32 


^V32 


^V32 


^Vl6 


^Vl6 


D.... 


Vl6 


Vs 


Vl6 


Vl6 


Vl6 


V. 


1 


lVl6 


lVl6 




TABLE 25 
Dimensions of Steel Washers 



Bolt Dia.. 


Vs 


V2 


Vs 


74 


A 


^V32 


''h 


^732 


^732 


B 


78 


1 


174 


172 


C 


Vs 


Vl6 


74 


74 



f i IJ_£. 



JIGS, FIXTURES, AND DETAILS 



113 



TABLE 26 
Dimensions of Machine Table Bolts 



Bolt 














Dia... 


Vs 


V2 


Vs 


V4 


Vs 


1 


A.... 


Vs 


Vs 


IV16 


IV16 


IV2 


PA 


B.... 


V32 


V4 


V16 


Vie 


Vl6 


Vs 


B'.... 


V4 


^V32 


^V32 


Vifi 













Ftc^: 



U6 = Thickness for Heayy Duty 
_ Standard Thickness 



CHAPTER IX 
GEARS AND CAMS 

159. This chapter is intended to give an introductory knowledge of 
gears and cams so that drawings of them can be made and understood. 

For a complete theoretical treatment a good text on mechanism or a 
special book on gears or cams should be studied. 

160. Pulleys and Gears. — Consider two discs or wheels secured on 
shafts and placed so that the surfaces of the wheels are in contact, Fig. 
200. If one of the wheels is turned and there is no slipping, the other 




Fig. 200. Friction Wheels. 

will turn, but in an opposite direction. If the pulley A has a diameter 
of d" and the pulley B a diameter of 9'', it will be necessary for pulley A 
to make three revolutions while pulley B makes one revolution. The 
velocity ratio is 3. 



Driven 




"12 Teeth 
36 Teeth 



Fig. 201. Pinion and Gear. 



If the forces are large or it is necessary to prevent slipping, gear teeth 
may be added to the two wheels as in Fig. 201. The ratio of velocities 

114 



GEARS AND CAMS 



115 



or the number of turns for gears is figured by using the number of teeth 
on each wheel. In the figure gear A has 14 teeth and gear B has 49 
teeth, so that gear A must make 49/14 = 3V2 turns for one turn of gear B. 
The smaller of the two gears is called a pinion. 

The direction of revolution is indicated. The diameters, or number of 
teeth, or revolutions may be calculated by the formulas which follow: 

Ti = number of teeth in first gear 

A^i = revolutions per minute of first gear 

Di = diameter of first gear 

Ri = radius of first gear 

T2 = number of teeth in second gear 

A^2 = revolutions per minute of second gear 

2)2 = diameter of second gear 

R2 = radius of second gear. 



Then 









D2 



N_2 



Ri 

R2 






It is not always convenient to have the wheels in contact and other 
considerations often make it necessary to separate the pulleys or wheels. 




Fig. 202. Belt Drive. 



Some form of belt, rope or chain is then used as in Fig. 202. The for- 
mulas for Figs. 200 and 202 are : — 



D2 



N2^ 

Ai 



R2 



A^i 



161. Gear Teeth. — Some of the terms used in gear work and the 
names of parts of gear teeth are illustrated and named in Fig. 203. The 
pitch circles are circles having diameters of rolling cylinders which would 
have the same velocity ratio as the gears which replace them. 

The circular pitch as illustrated is the distance from a point on one 



116 



MACHINE DRAWING 



tooth to the same point on the next tooth measured along the pitch 
circle. 




Addendum' 
O'rcu/ar Pitcfr^ Dedendum 

IVhoJe depth 



I^'iG. 203. Gear Terms. 



The diametral pitch is the number of teeth per inch of pitch diameter. 

The other terms can be understood from the illustration. 

162. Spur Gears. — The gear wheels just described are called spur 
gears. The tooth outline for gears may be either a cycloid or an in- 
volute. The cycloidal system is used for large cast gears. For most 
purposes cut gears are now used. These are made on the involute system. 
The calculations for spur gears may be made from the formulas which 
follow. 

P = diametral pitch, 
Fc — circular pitch, 
Isl = number of teeth, 
Dp = pitch diameter, 
Do = outside diameter, 

— = addendum, 

1 + .157 
P 

2 + .157 



= dedendum. 



= depth of cut. 



p = 




B,-l 


N = DpXP 


p = 


N 


Dp = Do- 


2 
P 


N = PDo-2 


Pc = 


IT 
P 


D„-^ + ' 


I 


Pc 


i^O p 


Pc = 


TcDp 

N 


Do = Dp + 


2 
P 





163. Spur Gear Drawing. — It is not necessary to draw the tooth 



GEARS AND CAMS 



117 



outline for cut gears. The gear specifications required for cut gears are 
outside diameter, diametral pitch, depth of cut, and number of teeth. 
A spur gear drawing with dimensions is shown in Fig. 204. Note that 




1^ 



?^ 



^s 



2Z2. 



"^ 



'^ 



1^ 

_1 



■^ P 60 Teeth 
15 " Pitch D/am. 
Depth of cot 539 ' 



■2i 



CAST /RON GEAR 
Scafe ■ 6 "= I Ft. 



Fig. 204. A Spur Gear Drawing. 

the teeth are not shown and are not sectioned. Root diameter is repre- 
sented by a dash line, the pitch diameter by a dot and dash line, and the 
outside diameter by a full line. Hubs, arms and rims are discussed in 
Chap. VI. 

164. Bevel Gears. — Two cones in contact might be used to transmit 




Fig. 205. Friction Cones. 



118 



MACHINE DRAWING 



motion from one shaft to another as in Fig. 205. To prevent slipping, 
teeth may be used and the cones become bevel gears. Two bevel gears 




Fig. 206. Bevel Gears. 

of the same size with shafts at right angles are called mitre gears. A 
pair of bevel gears is shown in Fig. 206. The shafts may make any angle 
with each other. The terms used and the parts of a bevel gear are given 




Fig. 207. Bevel Gear Terms. 



in Fig. 207. Note the location of the pitch diameter and that the ad- 
dendum and dedendum are measured at the large end of the gear tooth. 
A bevel gear drawing is shown in Fig. 208. . 



GEARS AND CAMS 



119 



58-55 
3/°' 5'~ 



GEAR 

36 Teeth 5 P 
/5 ° Involute 
' f ' all over 




P/NION 
18 Teeth 5P 
15° Involute 
'y "all over 



Fig. 208. Bevel Gear Drawing. 

165. Worm Gearing. — A worm and wheel are shown in Fig. 209. A 
worm is a screw having a section on a plane through its axis of the same 
form as an involute rack tooth. The gear which is driven by the worm 




Fig. 209. Worm and Wheel. 



120 



MACHINE DRAWING 



is called a worm wheel. The worm may have single, double, or multiple 
threads as explained in Chapter II for screw threads. The velocity 
ratio is found by dividing the number of teeth in the worm wheel by 1 
for a single thread worm, by 2 for a double thread worm, etc. A worm 
and wheel drawing are given in Fig. 210. 



Heyy^Ciy^ Deep^ 




i. 



^)" 



^'i^ 



WORM GEAR 48 Teeth G P. 5ing/e R. H. 



WORM S/ng/e R.H. 



Fig. 210. Worm and Wheel Drawing. 



166. Cams. — A cam is a plate having a curved outline or groove, or a 
cylinder having a groove, and is used to change rotary motion to re- 




FiG. 21]. Cams. 



GEARS AND CAMS 



121 



ciprocating motion. The reciprocating motion may be variable or 
intermittent. The part to which motion is given is called the follower. 
Several forms of cams are shown in Fig. 211. 

167. To Draw a Plate Cam. — A cam outline is required which will 
raise the follower with uniform motion a distance of IV2'' during one 
third of a revolution of the cam. 

The follower is dropped uniformly during the next third of a revolution 
and remains at rest for one third of a revolution. Refer to Fig. 212. 





Cam with Point Follower 



Given the center of the cam, C and the rise of the follower, 04. With 
C as a center and radius CO, draw a circle. Divide this circle into three 
equal parts by radii CD, and CE. Then divide rise into a number of 
equal parts as shown at 1, 2, 3 and 4. Divide arc OD into same number of 
equal parts and draw radii through points thus located as at II. With 
C as a center and radius Cl draw arc cutting radius Cli, produced at 
V as shown at III. Then C2' = C2; CS' = C3; C4' = C4. A smooth 
curve through points 1^ 2', 3', and 4' will give a part of the cam outline. 
The curve from 4' to E is found by laying off the true distances on each 
radius as for the rise. Since the follower is to be at rest an arc from E 
to with radius CO will complete the cam outline. 

168. If a roller is used instead of a point on the follower the cam will 
be smaller. Proceed as for Fig. 212 which will give the curve followed by 
the center of the roll shown in Fig. 213 as a dot and dash line and called 
the pitch line. With a radius equal to the radius of the roll and centers 
on the pitch line draw arcs to which a tangent curve can be drawn to 
give the cam outline. 



122 



MACHINE DRAWING 




Cam with Ptoller Follower. 



169. Kinds of Motion. — The follower may have uniform motion as 
in the cases described, — harmonic motion, uniformly accelerated motion, 
or irregular motion. If the follower rises equal distances in equal in- 
tervals of time, we have uniform motion, shown in a diagram at I, Fig. 
214. When uniform motion is used, a circular arc is often used at the 





^ 


Uniform 






Motion 


^_ 






^ 


^ 














■» 






3 Harmonic 


y 




Motion y 




^^K" 



Kinds of Motion. 




beginning and end to decrease the shock of sudden starting and stopping, 
Fig. 214 at II. 

170. The diagram for harmonic motion is shown at III. Points on 
the travel of the follower are located by drawing a semi-circle, dividing 
it into a number of equal parts and drawing lines to the line of travel as 
shown. A cam with this motion can be run at a higher speed. The 
unequal distances vertically on the line of travel are moved over in 
equal intervals of time. 

171. Uniformly accelerated motion gives the easiest working cam. 
The follower has the same motion as a falling body. The distance passed 
over is proportional to the square of the time. The distances on the 
travel of the follower are made proportional to 1, 3, 5, 7, etc., and reverse 
as shown at IV, Fig. 214. 



GEARS AND CAMS 



123 



Other kinds of motion are used to meet special conditions. 
172. When the center of the follower is not in line with the vertical 
radius, Fig. 215. The follower is to rise uniformly during one half revolu- 





II HL 

Fig. 215. Cam with Offset Follower. 



tion and fall during the second half. Draw center line of follower down 
until it crosses horizontal center line through cam at M. With CM as a 
radius draw a circle. Divide rise of follower in parts to give harmonic 
motion. Divide one half of the circle just drawn into as many equal 
parts as there are spaces in the rise, and draw tangents at each point as 
shown. With C as a center draw an arc passing through point 1 on the 
rise and cutting tangent from point li at 1'. Arcs with C as a center 
and passing through points 2, 3, and 4 will locate other points through 
which a smooth curve can be passed. 




Fig. 216. Cam with Lever Follower. 



124 



MACHINE DRAWING 



173. When levers are used to transmit motion from the cam, 

Fig. 216, the method of solution is similar to the previous cases. Given 
the center of the cam shaft, center of bell crank shaft, lengths of arms and 
travel required at end of long arm as shown at I. 

The end of the long arm is to rise uniformly during one third revolu- 
tion, drop half way down instantly, remain at rest one third revolution 
and drop uniformly during the remaining third of a revolution. 

Draw arcs with X as a center. Divide the travel into a number of 
equal parts and draw horizontal lines to locate points on the large arc. 
Find corresponding points on the small arc. The points on the cam out- 
line are then located as shown in the figure. 

174. The construction for a cam with flat follower is shown in Fig. 
217. The follower is to rise during one half revolution, remain at rest 




Fig. 217. Cam with Flat Follower. 



one sixth of a revolution and fall during the remaining one third revolu- 
tion. Divide the rise into a number of equal parts. Draw circle with 
CO as a radius. Divide arc CD into same number of equal parts as 
rise. Draw radial lines. Lay off distances CI, C2, etc., on the radii to 
locate points 1, 2, etc., at points 1^ 2\ etc., draw perpendiculars to the 
radii. A smooth curve drawn tangent to these perpendiculars will be the 
cam outline. 

175. Cylindrical Cams. — A cylindrical cam is a cylinder having a 
groove which gives the desired motion to a roller, Fig. 218. The pitch 
line for a cylindrical cam is first drawn on the development of the cam 
surface. Fig. 219 illustrates the solution of a cylindrical cam problem. 



GEARS AND CAMS 



125 



The travel is indicated on the figure. The follower is to move one half 
the distance with uniform motion during one fourth of a revolution, 




Fig. 218. Cylindrical Cam. 

remain at rest one fourth of a revolution, rise uniformly during one fourth 
revolution and drop with harmonic motion during the remaining one 
fourth revolution. Divide the circle into a number of equal parts and 
lay them off on the stretchout line. The first three quarters of a revolu- 




Uniform 



Uniform 



Harmonic 



■*Rise ^ Rev. -^^Rest 4 Rev.-^*Rise ^ Rev. -^-^Drop 4 R^^- 





■ Circumfere'nce of Cam 



Fig. 219. Cylindrical Cam Development. 

tion are evident in the figure. The last quarter has as many equal 
horizontal divisions as there are unequal or harmonic divisions in the 
travel. 

For a complete treatment of the subject of cams consult Professor 
Furman's '^Cams — Elementary and Advanced," Wiley, N. Y. 



CHAPTER X 
PIPING DRAWINGS 

176. Piping. — The frequent occurance of piping in engineering work 
makes it necessary for the machine draftsman to know something about 
the sizes of pipe, fittings, etc., and their representation. For a com- 
plete treatment see the author's '^ Handbook on Piping," D. Van^Nos- 
trand Co., N. Y. The following material is based upon the above book. 

177. Uses and Materials. — Piping is used for conveying fluids — 
steam, gas, air, water, etc., and is made of cast iron, wrought iron, steel, 
lead, brass and other materials. Cast iron pipe is cheaply made and 
is used for underground gas, water, and drain pipes, sometimes for ex- 
haust steam and for low pressure steam. Wrought pipe, of iron or steel, 
is most commonly used, especially for high pressures. For hot or im- 
pure water, brass pipe is preferred as it does not corrode like iron or 
steel. Spiral riveted piping is often used for large diameters. 



oo 




Standard . Extra tfeauy Double Extra Heavy 

Fig. 220. Sections of \" Pipe. 

178. Pipe Sizes. — Wrought pipe is specified by its nominal inside 
diameter for sizes up to 12 inches. The Brigg's Standard dimensions 
are used in America. The nominal diameter varies from actual diameter 
as indicated in the dimensions. Table 27. Standard pipe is used for 
pressures up to 125 pounds per square inch. Extra strong and double 
extra strong pipe are made for use at high pressures. The extra thick- 
ness is obtained by reducing the inside diameter, the outside remaining 
constant for a given nominal diameter. Tables 28 and 29. Actual cross 
sections for the three weights of ^W pipe are shown in Fig. 220. Above 
twelve inches, pipe is known as O.T>. or outside diameter pipe and is 
specified accordingly. The thickness may be any desired amount. 

126 



PIPING DRAWINGS 



127 



179. Pipe Fittings, Valves, etc. — For joining lengths of pipe and 









Riffhr Sf- teft Coi/p/ing 



Return Bene/ 



Fig. 221. Screwed Pipe Fittino^s. 

making turns and connections, fittings are used, Fig. 221. Such fittings 
consist of flanges, couplings, tees, ells, crosses, etc. Small pipe is ''made 
up" by means of screwed fittings, Fig. 222. Some dimensions are given 
in Table 30. A screwed union and a flanged union are shown in Fig. 223. 
180. Flanged Fittings. — Flanged Fittings, Fig. 227 are to be pre- 
ferred for important or high pressure work. Regular fittings are now 



TABLE 27 
Standard Pipe Threads 









Outside 












Diameter 


Diameter 






Length of 




Threads 


of Tap 


of Threads 


Depth of 


Number of 


Perfect 


Size 


per 


Drill 


at End 


Threads 


Perfect 


Threads 


Inches 


Inch 


Inches 


of Pipe 
Inches 


Inches 


Threads 


Inches 


Vs 


27 


21/64 


.393 


.029 


5.13 


.19 


V4 


18 


2V64 


.522 


.044 


5.22 


.29 


Vs 


18 


V16 


.656 


.044 


5.4 


.30 


V2 


14 


'V16 


.815 


.057 


5.46 


.39 


'U 


14 


2^32 


1.025 


.057 


5.6 


.40 


1 


IIV2 


IVs 


1.283 


.069 


5.87 


.51 


1V4 


IIV2 


1^732 


1.626 


.069 


6.21 


.54 


IV2 


IIV2 


PV32 


1.866 


.069 


6.33 


.55 


2 


IIV2 


2V.6 


2.339 


.069 


6.67 


.58 


2V2 


8 


2Vl6 


2.819 


.100 


7.12 


.89 


3 


8 


3Vl6 


3.441 


.100 


7.6 


.95 


3V2 


8 


31V16 


3.938 


.100 


8.0 


1.00 


4 


8 


4Vl6 


4.434 


.100 


8.4 


1.05 


4V2 


8 


43/4 


4.931 


.100 


8.8 


1.10 


5 


8 


5Vl6 


5.490 


.100 


9.28 


1.16 


6 


8 


6V16 


6.546 


.100 


10.08 


1.26 


7 


8 
8 
8 
8 




7.540 

8.534 

9.527 

10.645 


.100 
.100 
.100 
.100 


10.88 
11.68 
12.56 
13.44 


1.36 


8 




1.46 


9 




1.57 


10 




1.68 



128 



MACHINE DRAWING 



TABLE 28 
Extra Strong Wrought Pipe 















Length of Pipe per 










Weight 




Square 


Foot of 


Nominal 


External 


Internal 


Thick- 


per Foot 


Internal 






Size 


Diameter 


Diameter 


ness 


Plain Ends 


Area 


External 


Internal 




Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Pounds 


Sq. Inches 


Surface 
Feet 


Surface 
Feet 


Vs 


.405 


.215 


.095 


.314 


.036 


9.431 


17.766 


V4 


.540 


.302 


.119 


.535 


.072 


7.073 


12.648 


Vs 


.675 


.423 


.126 


.738 


.141 


5.658 


9.030 


V2 


.840 


.546 


.147 


1.087 


.234 


4.547 


6.995 


V4 


1.050 


.742 


.154 


1.473 


.433 


3.637 


5.147 


1 


1.315 


.957 


.179 


2.171 


.719 


2.904 


3.991 


IV4 


1.660 


1.278 


.191 


2.996 


1.283 


2.301 


2.988 


IV2 


1.900 


1.500 


.200 


3.631 


1.767 


2.010 


2.546 


2 


2.375 


1.939 


.218 


5.022 


2.953 


1.608 


1.969 


2V2 


2.875 


2.323 


.276 


7.661 


4.238 


1.328 


1.644 


3 


3.500 


2.900 


.300 


10.252 


6.605 


1.091 


1.317 


3V2 


4.000 


3.364 


.318 


12.505 


8.888 


.954 


1.135 


4 


4.500 


3.826 


.337 


14.983 


11.497 


.848 


.998 


4V2 


5.000 


4.290 


.355 


17.611 


14455 


.763 


.890 





5.563 


4.813 


.375 


20.778 


18.194 


.686 


.793 


6 


6.625 


5.761 


.432 


28.573 


26.067 


.576 


.663 


7 


7.625 


6.625 


.500 


38.048 


34.472 


.500 


.576 


8 


8.625 


7.625 


.500 


43.388 


45.663 


.442 


.500 


9 


9.625 


8.625 


.500 


48.728 


58.426 


.396 


.442 


10 


10.750 


9.750 


.500 


54.735 


74.662 


.355 


.391 


11 


11.750 


10.750 


.500 


60.075 


90.763 


.325 


.355 


12 


12.750 


11.750 


.500 


65.415 


108.434 


.299 


.325 



TABLE 29 
Double Extra Strong Wrought Pipe 





External 
Diameter 


Approxi- 
mate 
Internal 


Thick- 
ness 


Weight 
per Foot 


Internal 
Area 


Length of Pipe per 
Square Foot of 


Nominal 


External 


Internal 


Size 


Inches 


Diameter 


Inches 


Plain Ends 


Sq. Inches 


Surface 


Surface 






Inches 




Pounds 




Feet 


Feet 


V2 


.840 


.252 


.294 


1.714 


.050 


4.547 


15.157 


V4 


1.050 


.434 


.308 


2.440 


.148 


3.637 


8.801 


1 


1.315 


.599 


.358 


3.659 


.282 


2.904 


6.376 


IV4 


1.660 


.896 


.382 


5.214 


.630 


2.301 


4.263 


IV2 


1.900 


1.100 


.400 


6.408 


.950 


2.010 


3.472 


2 


2.375 


1.503 


.436 


9.029 


1.774 


. 1.608 


2.541 


2V2 


2.875 


1.771 


.552 


13.695 


2.464 


1.328 


2.156 


3 


3.500 


2.300 


.600 


18.583 


4.155 


1.091 


1.660 


3V2 


4.000 


2.728 


.636 


22.850 


5.845 


.954 


1.400 


4 


4.500 


3 152 


.674 


27.541 


7.803 


.848 


1.211 


4V2 


5.000 


3.580 


.710 


32.530 


10.066 


.763 


1.066 


5 


5.563 


4.063 


.750 


38.552 


12.966 


.686 


.940 


6 


6.625 


4.897 


.864 


53.160 


18.835 


.576 


.780 


7 


7.625 


5.875 


.875 


63.079 


27.109 


.500 


.650 


8 


8.625 


6.875 


.875 


72.424 


37.122 


.442 


.555 



PIPING DRAWINGS 



129 



h>^-H 







-- 


-^/i- 


-^ 




'- 


>?- 


K--^^ 




^ 






L. 


1 










-^ 


— 


-+■ 


- 




k 1 r^ t 




Fig. 222. Walworth C. 1. Fittings. 



TABLE 30 
Walworth Co., Standard Cast Iron Fittings 



Size of 


















Pipe, 


A 


A-A 


B 


c 


D 


E 


F 


G 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


V4 


Vi 


172 
174 


V16 

7l6 






1 


74 
7l6 


Vs 


'Is 


i 


I7l6 


27l6 


178 


7l6 


V2 


1V16 


278 


^7l6 


178 


27l6 


17l6 


78 


72 


74 


1V16 


278 


1716 


27l6 


274 


174 


7l6 


7l6 


1 


1V2 


3 


^7l6 


272 


374 


27l6 


72 


78 


IV4 


l^Vie 


378 


17l6 


3 


374 


279 


7l6 


^7l6 


IV2 


2 


4 


17l6 


374 


474 


274 


78 


^7l6 


2 


2V8 


474 


178 


4 


572 


378 


^7l6 


78 


2V2 


278 


574 


178 


5 


6^7l6 


478 


^7l6 


1 


3 


3Vl6 


678 


178 


578 


778 


474 


^7l6 


1 


3V2 


3^716 


778 


27l6 


678 


874 


574 


1 


17l6 


4 


4 


8 


274 


778 


974 


6 


17l6 


178 


4V2 


47l6 


878 


27l6 


7^/8 


1072 


67l6 


178 


174 


5 


4^716 


978 


2Vl6 


872 


117l6 


77l6 


178 


174 


6 


57l6 


1078 


2^7l6 


9^716 


1378 


878 


178 


178 


7 


67l6 


1278 


378 


1174 


1478 


974 


17l6 


172 


8 


6^716 


1378 


37l6 


121716 


161716 


1078 


178 


17s 


9 


772 


15 


378 


1472 


19 


1278 


17l6 


174 


10 


874 


1672 


47l6 


16 


2078 


1374 


178 


174 


12 


9Vl6 


1978 


478 






1578 


174 


178 



( \ 





Fig. 223. Screwed Union and Flanged Union. 



130 



MACHINE DRAWING 




Fig. 224. Globe Valve. 

made with dimensions of the American Standard as devised by a com- 
mittee of the A. S. M. E., and a Manufacturers' committee. This 
standard fixes the dimensions for standard weight fittings (125 lbs.) 
from 1 inch to 100 inches and for extra heavy or high pressure fittings 
(250 lbs.) from 1 inch to 48 inches. The following tables give some of 
the dimensions, revised to March 7th and 20th, 1914. 

181. Valves. — There are two general classes of valves, globe valves 
and gate valves. The globe valve has a spherical body and a circular 
opening at right angles to the axis of the pipe. A section of a globe 
valve, together with the names of the principal parts is shown in Fig. 224. 

\ / 



A 



^ 



m 



i i 



F G 

Fig. 225. Valve Seats. 



PIPING DRAWINGS 



131 



-A*- 




in 




Fig. 226. Gate Valve. 



<-A-*Jl*T/i-*' 






-iO 




90" £111 Poub/e Branch Side Ouflef- 



-/J*\*/J- 



Tee 






-A*^A 



iKir^ 



Z<3/7y F(ac//us 
£// 



O i r 




Sing/e ^yi^eep Po(/6/e Syyee/o S/c/e OuHef 



Cross 




> 13- ^ 



La/^s/^a/ Rec/ucer 

Fig. 227. Flanged Fittings. 



E^ccen^-r/c 
Recfucer 



132 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Names of Parts of Globe Valve 



Stem nut, 
Hand wheel, 
Valve stem, 
Valve nut, 



1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

5. Valve (swivel). 



6. Valve body, 

7. Gland nut, 

8. Gland, 

9. Bonnet, 

10. Bonnet ring. 



A valve may be used in place of an elbow and a globe valve, in which 
case it is called an angle valve. There are several objections to the use 
of globe valves, among which are the resistance which they offer to the 
fluid and the water pocket which is present when they are used for steam 
lines. They are desirable, however, when throttling is necessary. 

TABLE 31 (Fig. 227) 

American Standard Flanged Fittings 

125 Pounds Working Pressure 



Size 


A-A 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


G 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


1 


7 


372 


5 


IV4 


772 


574 


IV4 ■ 




1V4 


772 


3V4 


572 


2 


8 


674 


174 




IV2 


8 


4 


6 


274 


9 


7 


2 




2 


9 


472 


672 


272 


1072 


8 


272 




2V2 


10 


5 


7 


3 


12 


972 


272 




3 


11 


572 


774 


3 


13 


10 


3 


"6 "" 


31/2 


12 


6 


872 


372 


1472 


1172 


3 


672 


4 


13 


672 


9 


4 


15 


12 


3 


7 


472 


14 


7 


972 


4 


1572 


1272 


3 


772 


5 


15 


772 


1074 


472 


17 


1372 


372 


8 


6 


16 


8 


1172 


5 


18 


1472 


372 


9 


7 


17 


872 


I2V4 


572 


2072 


1672 


4 


10 


8 


18 


9 


14 


572 


22 


1772 


472 


11 


9 


20 


10 


1574 


6 


24 


1972 


472 


1172 


10 


22 


11 


1672 


672 


2572 


2072 


5 


12 


12 


24 


12 


19 


772 


30 


2472 


572 


14 


14 


28 


14 


2172 


772 


33 


27 


6 


16 


15 


29 


1472 


22V4 


8 


3472 


2872 


6 


17 


16 


30 


15 


24 


8 


3672 


30 


672 


18 


18 


33 


1672 


2672 


87. 


39 


32 


7 


19 


20 


36 


18 


29 


972 


43 


35 


8 


20 


22 


40 


20 


3172 


10 


46 


3772 


872 


22 


24 


44 


22 


34 


11 


4972 


4072 


9 


24 


26 


46 


23 


3672 


13 


53 


44 


9 


^6 


28 


48 


24 


39 


14 


56 


4672 


972 


28 


30 


50 


25 


4172 


15 


59 


49 


10 


30 


32 


52 
54 
56 

58 


26 

27 
28 
29 


44 

4672 

49 

5172 


16 
17 
18 
19 








32 


34 




........ 




34 


36 








36 


38 








38 


40 


60 


30 


54 


20 








40 









PIPING DRAWINGS 



133 



A variety of valve seats is shown in Fig. 225. In the figure A, B and 
C are plain flat seats; D is a concave or spherical seat; E and F are rounded 
seats; G is a square seat and JY is a bevel seat. Any of these forms may 
be made as a part of the valve body or separate, and either screwed or 
forced into place. 

A gate valve is shown in section in Fig. 226, and as will be observed 
has its openings parallel to the cross section of the pipe, so there is little 
or no resistance to the flow, making it preferable for most purposes. 



TABLE 32 (Fig. 227) 

Extra Heavy American Standard Flanged Fittings 

S50 Pounds Working Pressure 



Size 


A-A 


A 


i ^ 


C 


D 


E 


F 


G 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 

i 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


1 


8 


4 


5 


2 


872 


672 


2 


1 


1V4 


8V2 


474 


572 


272 


972 


774 


274 




IV2 


9 


472 


6 


2V4 


11 


872 


272 





2 


10 


5 


672 


3 


1172 


9 


272 




2V2 


11 


572 


7 


372 


13 


1072 


272 




3 


12 


6 


7V4 


372 


14 


11 


3 


"6"" 


3V2 


13 


672 


872 


4 


1572 


1272 


3 


672 


4 


14 


7 


9 


472 


1672 


1372 


3 


7 


4V2 


15 


772 


972 


472 


18 


1472 


372 


772 


5 


16 


8 


1074 


5 


1872 


15 


372 


8 


6 


17 


872 


1172 


572 


2172 


1772 


4 


9 


7 


18 


9 


I2V4 


6 


2372 


19 


472 


10 


8 


20 


10 


14 


6 


2572 


2072 


5 


11 


9 


21 


1072 


1574 


672 


2772 


2272 


5 


1172 


10 


23 


1172 


1672 


7 


2972 


24 


572 


12 


12 


2^ 


13 


19 


8 


3372 


2772 


6 


14 


14 


30 


15 


2172 


872 


3772 


31 


672 


16 


15 


31 


1572 


2274 


9 


3972 


33 


672 


17 


16 


33 


1672 


24 


972 


42 


3472 


772 


18 


18 


36 


18 


2672 


10 


4572 


3772 


8 


19 


20 


39 


1972 


29 


1072 


49 


4072 


87o 


20 


22 


41 


2072 


3172 


11 


53 


4372 


972 


22 


24 


45 


2272 


34 


12 


5772 


4772 


10 


24 


26 


48 
52 
55 
58 
61 
65 
68 
71 
74 
78 
81 
84 


24 

26 

2772 

29 

3072 

3272 

34 

3572 

37 

39 

4072 
42 


3672 
39 

4172 
44 

4672 
49 

5172 
54 
5672 
59 

6172 
64 


13 
14 
15 
16 

17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 








26 


28 








28 


30 








30 


32 








32 


34 








34 


36 








36 


38 









38 


40 








40 


42 








42 


44 


' ' . . 






44 


46 


i 

1 






46 


48 


'.'.'.'. ..'.'.^: 






48 



134 



MACHINE DRAWING 



TABLE 33 

American Standard Pipe Flanges 
125 Pounds Working Pressure 



Size 
Inches 



1 

IV4 
IV2 
2 

2V2 

3 

372 

4 

4V2 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 
10 
12 
14 
15 
16 
18 
20 
22 
24 
26 
28 
30 
32 
34 
36 
38 
40 



Diameter 

of 
Flanges 
Inches 



4V2 

5 

6 

7 

7V2 

8V2 
9 

9V4 

10 
11 

I2V2 

13V2 

15 
16 
19 
21 

22V4 

23V2 

25 

27V2 

29V2 

32 

341/4 
36V2 

383/4 
41 V4 

433/4 

46 

48V4 
593/4 



Thick- 
ness of 
Flanges 
Inches 



V16 

V2 
V16 

Vs 

^Vl6 
V4 
^Vl6 
^Vl6 

1 

IV16 

iVs 

13/16 
1V4 

IVs 

IV16 
IV16 

l^Vie 
l^Vie 
IVs 
2 

2Vl6 
2V8 

2V4 

2Vl6 
23/8 
23/8 
2V2 



Bolt 
Circle 
Inches 



Number 

of 

Bolts 



Size of 

Bolts 

Inches 



! Length of 
Length Studs with 
of Bolts Two Nuts 



Inches 



3 

33/8 

378 

43/4 

572 
6 

7 

772 
73/4 

872 

972 
103/4 
IIV4 
1374 
1474 
17 

183/4 

20 

2174 

223/4 

25 

2774 

2972 

313/4 

34 
36 

3872 
4072 
423/4 

4574 
4774 



12 
12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 
20 
20 
20 
24 
28 
28 
28 
32 
32 
32 
36 



V16 
V16 

7-2 

Vs 
Vs 
Vs 
Vs 
Vs 

V4 
V4 

V4 
V4 
V4 

Vs 

7/. 



U 



Vs 
Vs 



172 
172 
1V4 

2 
274 

272 

272 
23/4 

3 
3 
3 
3 

374 
374 

372 

33/4 
474 
474 
474 
43/4 

5 

572 

572 

53/4 

6 

674 
672 
672 

7 
7 
7 



Inches 



When drawn to a small scale, valves and fittings are shown by con- 
ventional representations such as Figs. 228 and 229. Apparatus used in 
connection with piping as well as the machines to which it is connected, is 
frequently represented by diagrams such as Fig. 230, where the numbers 
correspond to the following list. 



1, 2. Plan of Direct Acting Steam Pump. 
3, 4, 5. Elevation of Direct Acting Steam 
Pump. 

6. End View of Direct Acting Steam Pump. 

7, 8, 9. Separator. 

10, 11. Receiver — or Receiver Separator. 

12. Vertical Steam Engine. 

13. Plan of Horizontal Steam Engine. 



14, 15. Steam Trap. 

16. Feed Water Heater. 

17. End View Horizontal Steam Engine. 

18. Plan of Water Tube Boiler. 

19. Elevation of Water Tube Boiler. 

20. Plan of Fire Tube Boiler. 

21. Centrifugal Pump. 



PIPING DRAWINGS 



135 



r" 


Elbo^ 


r 


£/bo^ 


hIh 


Tee 




Cross 




Y- Branch 


1^ 


Reducer 



\ 



IQ^I Val^e- Plan ^^CJ 




C/cbe Valve 



Gafe Va/ye 



Gaf-e l/a/ye 



Va/ye 



V^al'ye 



HMh 




Z? 
Q 



Check Valye 



l/alve 



Throttle \/alye 



El be I. 



Tee 



Riser 



Scre^/ Un;L 




P/ug Va/ye 



Fig. 228. Single I.ine Conventions. 



F/onge Union 



2 Elbo^ or Ell 




] [ 



m ^ 



2 "Coupling 



2 Valye (Use note to fell kind} 



~m 



2 Tee 



2 Plug t^^ 
J 

2" Y I ' I 




2"R8 L Coupling 



2 Gafe Valve 



-3 



J^i 




2 Cross 



2 ^ /^ F^educing 
Coupling 





2 -^ l§ Bushing ' 
l§ Close Nipple 



i 



2 ^5 Elbow 




2" Union 
2 "Cap 




2 Globe Valve 



Fig. 229. Double Line Conventions. 



136 



MACHINE DRAWING 



TABLE 34 
Extra Heavy American Standard Pipe Flanges 

250 Pounds Working Pressure 



Size 
Inches 



Diameter 

of 
Flanges 
Inches 



Thick- 
ness of 
Flanges 
Inches 



Bolt 
Circle 
Inches 



Number 

of 

Bolts 



Size of 

Bolts 

Inches 



Length 

of Bolts 

Inches 



Length of 

Studs with 

Two Nuts 

Inches 



1 

2 

2V2 

3 

3V2 

4 

4V2 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 
10 
12 
14 
15 
16 
18 
20 
22 
24 
26 
28 
30 
32 
34 
36 
38 
40 
42 
44 
46 
48 



4V2 
5 
6 
6V2 

7V2 

8V4 
9 
10 

IOV2 
11 

I2V2 
14 
15 
I6V4 

I7V2 

2OV2 

23 

24V2 

251/2 

28 

3OV2 

33 

36 

38V4 

403/4 

43 

451/4 

471/2 

50 

521/4 

541/2 

57 

591/4 

6I1/2 

65 



^Vl6 

V4 

IV16 

Vs 

1 

1V16 

1V4 

1V16 

1V16 
1V2 
1% 
1V4 

2 

21/8 
2Vl6 

21/4 

2V8 

21/2 

2V8 

2V4 
21V16 

2'Vl6 

3 

31/8 
31/4 

3Vs 
3V.6 

3Vl6 

311/16 
33/4 

3V8 

4 



31/4 

3V4 

41/2 

5 

578 
6V8 

7V4 

7V8 

81/2 
91/4 

lOVs 
llVs 
13 
14 

151/4 

17V4 

201/4 
211/0 
221/2 
243/4 

27 

291/4 

32 

341/2 

37 

391/4 

4IV2 

431/2 

46 

48 

501/4 

523/4 

55 

571/4 

603/4 



8 
12 
12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
20 
20 
20 
24 
24 
24 
24 
28 
28 
28 
28 
28 
32 
32 
36 
36 
36 
40 
40 



V2 



V4 

V4 
V4 

V4 
V4 



u 
u 
u 
u 
u 
u 
u 

V8 

1 
1 

1V8 

iVs 

1V4 

1V4 
1V4 

1V8 

1V2 

1V8 
1V8 

iVs 

1V4 

1V8 

iVs 

1V8 
1V8 

iVs 

1V8 

2 
2 

2 



2 

21/4 
21/2 
21/2 

3 

31/4 

374 

31/2 
31/2 
33/4 
33/4 

4 

41/4 
43/4 

5 

51/2 
53/4 

6 
6 

674 
63/4 

7 

772 



872 

9 
9 

91/2 
91/2 

10 

10 

101/2 
101/2 

11 



91/2 

10 
10 

101/2 
11 

1172 

1172 
1172 

12 
12 

121/2 

13 

13 



Complete tables of sizes and dimensions of piping, valves, fittings, 
etc., are given in the Handbook on Piping referred to in Art. 176. 

182. Piping Drawings. — There are several kinds of piping drawings, 
depending upon the purpose and requirements of the work. Sometimes 
a freehand sketch is sufficient, sometimes a line diagram, and sometimes 
a large scale drawing, consisting of several views of the entire system, 
together with working drawings of details is necessary. A drawing for 
construction purposes must give complete information as to sizes, posi- 



PIPING DRAWINGS 



137 



tion of valves, branches and outlets. A drawing to show the layout of 
existing pipe lines need not be as complete and is often made to small 
scale, using single lines to represent the pipe with notes to tell sizes, 
location and purpose for which the pipe is used. A drawing to show 
proposed changes should give both existing and proposed piping, using 



UM 







=lft rn 



a 




/^ 



I 




/s 



O 



® 



/a 



T — r 



,S, 



/s 



fO^ 



. XF^ 



© 



it^nQi 




2ZE 




\ 



/3 





■■ 


@ 




@ 









=0 



o 



/r 



20 



1 




Fig. 230. Diagrams of Apparatus. 

different kinds of lines to distinguish the changes. Dot and dash lines, 
dash lines, or red or other colored ink may be used for this purpose. A 
drawing for repairs may consist of simply the part to be repaired, or 
may show the location or connection between the repairs and apparatus 
or other parts of the system. Drawings for repairs should be checked 
very carefully and just what is to be replaced or repaired should be made 
clear. 

183. Most of the general rules for dimensioning drawings hold for 
piping plans, but there are a few points which may be mentioned. Al- 
ways give figures to the centers of pipe, valves and fittings, and let the 
pipe fitters make the necessary allowances. If a pipe is to be left un- 
threaded, it is well to place a note on the drawing calling attention to 
the fact. If left-hand (L. H.) threads are wanted it should be noted 
Wrought pipe sizes can generally be given in a note using the nominal 
sizes. 

Flanged valves when drawn to large scale may have the over all dimen- 
sions given^ the distance from center to top of hand wheel or valve stem 



138 



MACHINE DRAWING 



when open and when closed, diameter of hand wheel, etc. Separate 
flanges should be completely dimensioned as should all special parts. 
It is necessary that the location of the piping should be definitely given, 
which means that the parts of the building containing the piping must 
be shown and must be accurately dimensioned. The location of ap- 
paratus and the pipe connections should be given by measurements from 
the center lines of the machines, distances between centers of machines, 
heights of connections, etc. 

Final drawings should be made after the engines, boilers and other 
machinery have been decided upon, as they can then be drawn com- 
pletely and accurately. At least two views should be drawn, a plan and 
elevation. Often extra elevations and detail drawings are necessary. 
Every fitting and valve should be shown. A scale of Vs inches equals 1 
foot is desirable for piping drawings when it can be used, as it is large 
enough to show the system to scale. 

184. Piping Sketches. — Sketching is an invaluable aid as a pre- 
liminary step in any kind of drawing, and a sketch is often the only 



Condenser. 




o 

Turbine Exhaust. 



Fig. 231. Pictorial View, 



drawing needed. One's idea can be made clear and the number and 
kind of fittings and valves checked up in this way. Where only a small 
amount of work is to be done, a sketch may be made and fully dimen- 
sioned, from which a list of pieces can be made with lengths, sizes, etc. 
This will avoid mistakes in cutting, and the sketch shows just how the 



PIPING DRAWINGS 



139 



parts go together without depending upon memory. Such a sketch 
may be used to order with, but in such cases it should be made upon 
tracing cloth or thin paper so that a blue print can be made as a record. 
An H or 2H pencil will give lines black enough to print if ink is not used. 
The figures, however, should be put on in ink in all cases. If only one 




3i ^B^*^ 



S>'^ ^ 4 




^s (C-^.^^^ 



\ - —■-<d^anc/au^ 







-X f- 



^ 



££e 






S^ 



-1 ^£^ 



^^ A^^ ^^f-t^Z^ </!©£=>♦»< ^^i^^g.^,.^ 



Fig. 232. Developed Sketch. 



or two copies are wanted carbon paper may be used. Dimensions and 
notes should be put on as carefully as on a finished drawing. The 
general procedure is much the same as for all kinds of sketching. First 
sketch the arrangement using a single line diagram. When satisfactory 
the real sketch may be started by drawing the center lines, estimating 
locations of fittings, valves, etc., which should be spaced in roughly in 
proportion to their actual positions. The piping, valves, etc., can then 
be sketched in, using any of the conventions shown in Figs. 228 and 229. 
Finally locate dimension lines, figures and notes, together with the date 
and a title of some kind. Pictorial methods can be used to great ad- 
vantage for sketching purposes, especially for preliminary layouts, as 
the directions and changes in levels can be clearly shown. 

185. Developed or Single Plane Drawings. — It will often be found 
convenient to swing the various parts of a piping laj^out into a single 



140 



MACHINE DRAWING 






^^/o^ s^o^e^ 



a3i 



ay/ay{a/o^S£- 







^'''Id fC 



.0-9 




^^'cf ?C 



kl O 



rr 



1=1 
• —4 

Q 

bC 

C 

ft 

c 



CO 

CO 

d 

H-l 



<?r/ 



PIPING DRAWINGS 141 

plane in order to show the various lengths and fittings in one view. Dif- 
ferent methods of showing the same piping are here illustrated. Fig. 
231 is a pictorial view using single lines to show the position in space; 
Fig. 232 is a developed line sketch with the sizes, fittings, etc., written 
on, and Fig. 233 is a developed drawing with complete dimensions and 
notes. Such drawings are valuable when listing or making up an order 
as well as for the pipe fitters to work from. A freehand line sketch, as a 
preliminary step in laying out a steam line, can often be made in this 
way. 



CHAPTER XI 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 

186. Preliminary Instructions. — A thorough understanding of the 
graphic language — the language of engineering — can be had only by 
applying it to a large number of problems. The problems in this chapter 
are sufficient to al- 
low changes in the 
course given from 
year to year. The 
sub j ects as arranged 
follow the text in a 
general way and 
suggest the outline 
for a course. Since 
working directions 
are given for each 
problem the order 
of presenting them 
can be varied at 
the discretion of 
the instructor. 

187. Most of the drawing studies can be worked in an 11'' x 14'' 
space, the layout for which is given in Fig. 234 or in a division of the 
space as indicated in Fig. 235. If 18" x 24" paper is used it will give 







Trim Line-\ 


\ 












~ltVj ' 
































V 














' 




- 


















Working Space 




















_^ Margin 






> 














1 = 
» 


^ 




















„ 








1 - 


«>-/^- 


2 


U- 


- /;?-• 


f?" 






























"■-icvj 


' 










1 . 







Fig. 234. Standard Layout. 





I E 

P'iG. 235. Two Part and Four Part Layout. 

two sheets with trim lines only at the ends. An inspection of the problem 
will indicate the proper space where it is not given in the statement of 
the problem. If a double size sheet is required the dimensions of Fig. 
236 may be used. 

143 



144 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Many of the problems given for a 5V2'' x 7'' space can be worked to 
advantage in an 11'' x 14'' space by using a different scale or in a few 
cases by doubling all dimensions. A form of record strip is given in 
Fig. 237. Such a record strip should be a part of every drawing. 

Trim Line-^ i 



^li^ 



X 



2/ 



24 



Working Space 



Margin 



N 



>/-? 



Fig. 236. Double Size Layout. 

ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 

188. The problems given in this section are intended for review purposes. It is 
not necessary to work all of them. Lay out the regular size sheet as shown in Fig. 
234 and divide the working space into four equal spaces, 5^/2" x 1" each. Do not 
copy the dimensions given to locate views. Draw orthographic views. Do not copy 
the pictures which are used to present some of the problems. 

PROB. 1, Fig. 238, Space L— Draw three complete views of the RECTANGULAR 
STOP BAR. 

PROB. 2, Fig. 238, Space II.— Draw three complete views of the GUIDE FOR 
SQUARE BAR. 









NAI^E OF SCHOOL 
CITY OR TOWN 


GENERAL TITLE 
Scale Date 


SHEET NO. 
Drawn by 
Chec/^ed by 
Approi^ecf by 



Fig. 237. Record Strip Form. 

PROB. 3, Fig. 238, Space IIL— Draw three complete views of the POSITIONING 
BLOCK. (Orthographic Projection.) 

PROB. 4, Fig. 238, Space IV.— Draw three complete views of the SPECIAL DIE. 
PROB. 5, Fig. 239, Space I.— Draw three complete views of the SLIDER. 
PROB. 6, Fig. 239, Space II.— Draw three complete views of the BRACE BLOCK. 



TT 



^1^ 






^r 



_1_ 



^Ia 



:l^ 



VIEW 



E 





k 










^ 


■^ 




T 











E 






Ik 






VIE.W 







E 




Fig. 238. Probs. 1, 2, 3 and 4. 



VIEW 




-/i- 



J 



1 



7T^ 



-z?^ — 
^z3 



i//£:n/ 




I 



e: 



i//£:iv 



^/ifH/ 





"h^'^H" 






Sca/e 6"=/rf. 



Fig. 239. Probs. 5, 6, 7 and 8. 



145 



146 



MACHINE DRAWING 



PROB. 7, Fig. 239, Space III.— Draw three complete views of the SPECIAL 
WEDGE. 

PROB. 8, Fig. 239, Space IV.— Draw three complete views of the ADJUSTING 
SLIDE. Scale 6" = 1 ft. 

PROB. 9, Fig. 240, Space I. — Draw three complete views of the LUG. 

PROB. 10, Fig. 240, Space IL— Draw three complete views of the ROD CLAMP. 

PROB. 11, Fig. 240, Space III.— Draw three complete views of the CHAMFERED 
LOCK WASHER. 

PROB. 12, Fig. 240, Space IV.— Draw three complete views of the LOCKING 
CATCH. 

PROB. 13, Fig. 241.— The picture shows a SLIDING BRACE. Lay out a sheet 
with 11" X 14" working space (Fig. 234). Make a three view working drawing. Plan 
the arrangement and spacing of views by making a freehand sketch which should be 
submitted to the instructor. 

PROB. 14, Fig. 242.— The picture shows a SADDLE PIVOT. Lay out a sheet 
with 11" X 14" working space. Make a three view working drawing. 

PROB. 15, Fig. 243. — The illustration shows the top, front and left end views of a 
BRACKET. Make a three view drawing showing the front, bottom and right end views. 





jr 



■-a 




yiew 



y/Ei^ 



TV 





A 


1^ 








-\ 


*/' * 




f 


d 




- i 


1 1 




■"K\J 


1 1 




1 


1 1 





Fig. 240. Probs. 9, 10, 11 and 12. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



147 




Fig. 241. Prob. 13. 



1^ Hole clear through 
Fig. 242. Prob. 14. 



-T 



TTjTT 



-H 

1^ 



::lr- 




^" 






^/JSJ7-C 



/2 r-£^ ' 

h <9- 



vo 



^1^ 



-24- 



^UyiDril/ 



— 7— '\J^ 



/i 




BRACKET 
Sco/e:3"-lFt. 



Fig. 243. Prob. 15. 



148 



MACHINE DRAWING 



189. Auxiliary Views. — Center or reference lines are shown on the layouts for the 
following problems. Draw auxiliary view of cut face only or of whole object as required 
by the instructor. Refer to Art. 19 and note which case covers each problem. 

PROB. 16, Fig. 244, Space I. — Draw views given and auxihary view. 

PROB. 17, Fig. 244, Space II. — Draw views given and auxiliary view. 

PROB. 18, Fig. 244, Space III. — Draw views given and auxiliary view. 

PROB. 19, Fig. 244, Space IV. — Draw views given and auxiliary view. 

PROB. 20, Fig. 245. — Draw the two views shown and an auxiliary view of the 
FOOT PEDAL. Front view is to be complete. Top and auxiliary views will be partial 
views. Do not put the location dimensions on your drawing. (11" x 14" space.) 

PROB. 21, Fig. 246. — Draw the view shown and as much as may be necessary of 
the other two views indicated, for the ANGLE JOINT (11" x 14" space). 






1 



R 




Fig. 244. Probs. 16, 17, 18 and 19. 



4 Drill 



Center Line 
For /^u^iliary Vle^v 







Fig. 245. Prob. 20. 



Parf- y/ew 
Here 






^ Flats of He A 




/^UAiliary V^ie^ 
Here 



Fig. 246. Prob. 21. 



149 



150 



MACHINE DRAWING 



190. Sectional Views. — The following problems are for the study of sectional views. 
Do not copy the views as given but make the required sectional views directly on your 
drawing. Indicate the cut surface by section Hning. 

PROB. 22, Fig. 247, Space I.— Draw two views of the BUSHING. Left hand 
view in section. 

PROB. 23, Fig. 247, Space II.— Draw two views of the SPECIAL COLLAR. 
Left hand view in section. 

PROB. 24, Fig. 247, Space III.— Draw two views of the GLAND. Left hand 
view in section. 

PROB. 25, Fig. 247, Space IV.— Draw two views of the SHIFTING COLLAR. 
Left hand view in section. 

PROB. 26, Fig. 248, Space I.— Draw two views of the PISTON with right hand 
view in section. 

PROB. 27, Fig. 248, Space II.— Draw two views of the PISTON FOLLOWER 
with left hand view in section. 

PROB. 28, Fig. 248, Space III.— Draw two views of the ECCENTRIC with the 
left hand view in section. 

PROB. 29, Fig. 248, Space IV.— Draw two views of the PULLEY, with the right 
hand view in section. 




I 






L_L 



^U-^- 

4^^ 



.2" 






Sca/e e = I Ft 



Fig. 247. Probs. 22, 23, 24 and 25. 




Fig. 248. Probs. 26, 27, 28 and 29. 

SCREWS AND BOLTS 

191. The Helix. — A cylindrical heKx is a curve generated by a point on the surface 
of a cylinder, moving equal distances lengthwise of the cyUnder while it is moving 
equal distances around the cylinder. 

In Fig. 249 the diameter and pitch of the helix are indicated. Divide the circle 
of the top view into any convenient number of equal parts, and draw vertical lines 
through each point. Divide the pitch distance into the same number of equal parts 
and draw horizontal lines through each point. The intersection of a horizontal line 
from a division of the pitch distance with a vertical line from the corresponding division 




Fig. 249. The Helix. 



151 



152 



MACHINE DRAWING 



of the circle will locate a point on the projection of the helix. Proceed in this way 
for each of the points. It is desirable to locate extra points by taking half divisions 
where the curve changes direction as at A. 

192. Screws and Bolts. — The following problems are representative. The student 
should solve them with as little help as possible after studying the text. The pro- 
portions and appearances of the screw threads and bolts occur so frequently that they 
should be familiar without looking them up every time they occur on a drawing. 

PROB. 30, Fig. 250.— Draw IV2 turns of a right hand hehx. Pitch 2". Diameter 
2". (Space 51/2" x 7".) 

PROB. 31, Fig. 250.— Draw IV2 turns of a left hand hehx. Pitch 2". Diameter 
2". (Space 5V2" x 7".) 

PROB. 32, Fig. 250. — Draw four forms of screw threads in section as directed by 
instructor. Pitch 1". (Space 7" x 11".) 

PROB. 33, Fig. 251, Space I. — Draw three conventional representations of screw 
threads. 

PROB. 34, Fig. 251, Space II. — Draw three conventional representations of threaded 
holes in plan and elevation as shown. 

PROB. 35, Fig. 251, Space III. — Draw the stud and threaded rod ends as shown. 

PROB. 36, Fig. 251, Space IV. — Draw three conventional representations of 
threaded holes in plan and section as shown. 

PROB. 37, Fig. 252.— Draw accurately, a IV2" bolt, 10" long, with hex head and 
nut. Give specification dimensions as shown. 




Fighf Hand HelU 




Left Hand HelU 




-P^- 
^a 



^li 



^m 



Square 



Acme 




'ni^ 



Fig. 250. Probs. 30, 31 and 32. 



-/^ 



2 



2 



-1 



A 



I5 




2 



2 



M^ 



h/H 



&:--z-ii 
'-z-c-z^-' 



^ 



7b/3 



5y- 



-ii 




-'s- 



I 



> 



MiiHii. 



IiUhMliM 



IMMMM 



li"—^ 



5d 



^-'i- 



I 



TT 



K-/^ 



TT 



r^ h-/i- 



h/H 




u-/^ 



Fig. 251. Probs. 33, 34, 35 and 36. 




Fig. 252. Prob. 37, U. S. Std. Bolt, 



153 



154 



MACHINE DRAWING 



PROB. 38, Fig. 253.— Make a drawing of the bolts, studs, etc., as shown in the 
figure. Give specification dimensions. 

PROB. 39, Fig. 254, Space I. — On axis A-B draw a V4" through bolt, hex head 
across corners and hex nut across flats. On axis C-D draw a IVs" bolt, hex head across 
flats and hex nut across corners. Give specification dimensions. 

PROB. 40, Fig. 254, Space II.— On axis A-B draw a Vs" bolt, square head across 
corners and square nut across flats. On axis C-D draw a Vs" cap screw hex head 
across flats. On axis E-F draw a Vs" cap screw hex head across corners. 

PROB. 41, Fig. 254, Space III. — Draw two views of collar and shaft. On axis 
A-B draw a Vs" set screw, head across flats. On axis C-D draw same set screw, head 
across corners. 

PROB. 42, Fig. 254, Space IV. — Draw gland and stuffing box. On axis A-B 
draw a V2" stud and nut. Show nut across flats. Make provision for the gland to 
enter one half the depth of the stuffing box when nut is screwed onto stud. Show 
specification dimensions. 

PROB. 43. — Lay out 11" x 14" working space. Draw a V/i" hex nut across flats 
and a VU" square nut across corners. Compare them as to appearance and distance 
required for turning. Draw a Vf^" hex nut across corners and a V/i" square nut across 
flats. Compare them. 




Fig. 253. Prob. 38. Bolt Drawing. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



155 




/?- 



/«'— ^ 






Fig. 254. Probs. 39, 40, 41 and 42. 



MACHINE DRAWING REPRESENTATIONS 



193. The following problems are planned 
for an 11" x 14" working space. Plan the 
arrangement, spacing, and choice of views, 
by making a freehand sketch which should 
be submitted to the instructor. The treat- 
ment of the views should have very careful 
attention and frequent reference should be 
made to the text of Chap. Ill for compari- 
son with the illustrations there given. 

PROB. 44, Fig. 255. — The picture shows 
a FORKED LEVER. Make a detail work- 
ing drawing. 

PROB. 45, Fig. 256.— Make a detail 
working drawing of the ANGLE BRACE 
BEARING. 

PROB. 46, Fig. 257.— Make a worldng 
drawing of the STIRRUP. 




Fig. 255. Prob. 44. 



156 



MACHINE DRAWING 




Fig. 256. Prob. 45. 



PROB. 47, Fig. 258.— 
Make a working drawing of 
the ADJUSTABLE GUIDE. 
Note the method of laying 
out the top view. Do not 
copy the picture. 

PROB. 48, Fig. 259.— 
The front, top, and right end 
viewsof aCOLUMN GUIDE 
are shown. Draw the front 
bottom and right end view as 
a section. 

PROB. 49, Fig. 260.— 
Make a three view working 
dra-wdng of the CLAMP 
PIECE. Do not use the top 
and front views which are 
given but show the piece in 
such a position that the 
views will not contain so 
many dotted lines. 
PROB. 50, Fig. 261.— Draw the top view and a section of the SUPPORT. 
PROB. 51, Fig. 262.— Make a working drawing of the HEAD PLATE. Show 
the right hand view as a section. 

PROB. 52, Fig. 263.— Make a three view assembly drawing of the STEP BEAR- 
ING, Show the front view as a half section. Scale 6" = 1 ft. 

PROB. 53, Fig. 263. — Make a separate detail drawing of each part of the STEP 
BEARING. 11" X 14" working space. Scale 6" = 1 ft. 

PROB. 54, Fig. 264.— Make an assembly working drawing of the FOUNDATION 
BOLT PLATE. Show the front view as a section. The top and right side views can 
be represented as shown. Look up dimensions of 2" pipe. 

PROB. 55, Fig. 265.— Make a working drawing of the VALVE. Show the right 
hand view with proper treatment as a section. 

PROB. 56, Fig. 266.— Make a working drawing of the ADJUSTING LEVER. 
PROB. 57, Fig. 267, Space I. — Draw front view as section with proper treatment. 
PROB. 58, Fig. 267, Space II. — Draw section on plane through axis. 
PROB. 59, Fig. 267, Space III. — Represent the bent iron by proper views. 
PROB. 60, Fig. 267, Space IV. — Draw a section on plane through axis. 
PROB. 61, Fig. 268.— Make a working drawing of the LEVER. 
PROB. 62, Fig. 269.— Draw two full views of the TRUNNION. 
PROB. 63, Fig. 269.— Draw two views of the TRUNNION, one a section through 
the axis. 

PROB. 64, Fig. 270.— Make working drawing of the T-SLOT LEVER. Com.- 
pletely dimension. Consider true distances and treatment of views. Submit a pre- 
liminary freehand sketch to your instructor. 

PROB. 65, Fig. 271.— Draw two exterior views of LUG COLLAR. 
PROB. 65-A, Fig. 271.— Make a working drawing of the LUG COLLAR. Show 
right hand view with proper view as a section. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



157 



PROB. 66, Fig. 272.— Make a working drawing of the SPREADER in full or 
section. 




Fig. 258. Prob. 47. 




Fig. 25^. Prob. 48. 




158 



Fig. 260. Prob. 49. 




(V^^ 



TT 



Fig. 261. Prob. 50. 




Fig. 262. Prob. 51. 



159 



Bushing- 
Brass 

Bearing ■ 
Steel 

Support- 
Cast Iron 




-3^- 



^ 



-5- 



I I 
I ! I 
I I I 



-3^' 



-12- 



^1^ v 



Fig. 263. Probs. 52 and 53. 



TTT 



I I 

--^ 



ill 
1 I 



•^%^ 



2 ^rouglnt Pipe' 



^h 




k-J 



-5- 



^ 







^ 






■7- 



m 




/7 I ' 



160 



Fig. 264. Prob. 54. 




Fig. 265. Prob. 55. 




Hub 1^ d/am. 
Ho/eJ." " 



Fig. 266. Prob. 56. 



161 



""» ^ y 



( ^ -1^ 


■^ 




» V 







, ,^ 1 


* 


y 



'"1^ 



■--cv, 



-?r 



7T~ 









r-i r 
I I ! 



i_._y I, ./ 




m 



g Diom. ■ 





Fig. 267. Probs. 57, 58, 59 and 60. 



HorizonfaK 




162 



Fig. 268. Prob. 61. 



Three ho/es,^ c//am., equa/iy spaced 
befy^een ihree ribs 



Axis 




Fig. 269. Probs. 62 and 63. 




Fig. 270. Prob. 64 




Three /ugs ecfually spaced 



Fig. 271. Probs. 65 and 65-A. 




164 



Fig. 272. Prob. 66. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



165 



DIMENSIONING 



194. The study of dimensioning will occur every time a working drawing is made- 
The rules and systems given in Chapter IV should be carefully studied, and their appli- 
cation observed. The location of finished surfaces and center hues must always be 
considered. Go slowly and give a reason for every dimension and for its location. 
Figures 274 and 275 are to be drawn from measurements obtained with the dividers and 
scale. Set your dividers on the drawing as at I, Fig. 273, and then place the points on 
the printed scale as at II when the reading shows the distance to be IV4". Use V/t" 
from your full size scale in laying out your drawing. Obtain other distances in the same 
way using dividers and the printed scale shown near the center of Figs. 274 and 275. 

PROB. 67, Fig. 274, Space I.— Draw the two views of the DISTANCE PIECE, 
using the method just described. Scale your drawing to nearest Vs" and put on dimen- 
sion lines and dimensions. 

PROB. 68, Fig. 274, Space II.— Draw and dimension the views of the BUSHING. 

PROB. 69, Fig. 274, Space III.— Draw and dimensionthe views of the SLIDE. 

PROB. 60, Fig. 274, Space IV.— Draw the views of the CORNER CLAMP and 
dimension your drawing. 

PROB. 71, Fig. 275, Space I.— Draw the views of the PROJECTING BEARING 
and dimension your drawing. 

PROB. 72, Fig. 275, Space II.— Draw and dimension the views of the SUPPORT. 

PROB. 73, Fig. 275, Space III.— Draw the views of the HUNG BEARING and 
dimension your drawing. 

PROB. 74, Fig. 275, Space IV.— Draw and dimension the views of the GUIDE. 
, PROB. 75, Fig. 74, Chap. III.— Make a detail drawing of TYPE B MOTOR 
BEARING DETAILS. Show views as half sections instead of full sections as given. 

PROB. 76, Fig. 82, Chap. III. — Make a two view drawing, both views in full for 
the PULLEY. Completely dimension. 

PROB. 77, Fig. 82, Chap. 
HI. — Make a two view drawing, 
one view in half section. Com- 
pletely dimension. 

PROB. 78, Fig. 86, Chap. 
III. — Make a two view drawing, 
both views in full for the VER- 
TICAL GUIDE. There are 8 
holes equally spaced in the 
flange. Completely dimension. 

PROB. 79, Fig. 86, Chap. 
III. — Make a two view draw- 
ing, one view in section. Com- 
pletely dimension. 

PROB. 80, Fig. 87, Chap. 
III. — Make a three view draw- 
ing of the BOLSTER SUP- 
PORT. Show views in full, 
section, or half section as di- 
rected by the instructor. Fig. 273. 





Scale of Inches 





-/^ 



'^'^ 



-^ 



> I 



-^ 



^s 



I 



n 



ii>i>i> 



Scale of Inches 





"f "All over . 




-i- 



4J iT 



1^ 



! I ! / 



Fig. 274. Probs. 67, 68, 69 and 70. 



166 





~V_^^d L 



^x 



K 



rm 



1 



iii|iiii 



I 1 I 

Scale of Inches 



A 5 6 




M 



1 1 /ill r-f^^ 

1 ! 1 1 ' 1 1 ! 1 

1 III III.. 


L_j -oyL 


/ ' ' 





rzp 



r~\ r 




Fig. 275. Probs. 71, 72, 73 and 74. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



167 



195. Graphical Data. — Under certain conditions graphical methods may be used to 
determine dimensions of machines or parts. Problems 81 and 82 may be solved by 
this method. The equations for the straight Hues or curves are sometimes worked 
out giving formulas for use in calculation. Refer to Art. 112 before working Problems 

81 and 82. 









































/ 


/ 










y 


/ 


/ 








/ 


by 
/ 


/ 








/ 


/ 








/. 


/ / 




























e 



A 



H — 



F 



r — -^-^ 



1£X1 



nrrr 



-X B 

9 i 



d 


A 


B 


c 


E 


F 


G 


H 


1 


li 


1^ 


F 


9 

7e 


ei 


'^ 


^i 


'i 
















2 
















2e 
















3 


'^S 


s 


/ 


a 


5 


3^ 


4d 


3=r 
















<z 

















Diameter of Ho/e 



Fig. 276. Prob. 81. 

PROB. 81, Fig. 276.— The dimensions 
for two sizes of the VERTICAL GUIDE 
are given in the table shown on Fig. 276. 
With these values draw a chart with a Une 
for each dimension, as shown for A and G. 
Scale your chart and fill in the table with 
dimensions for each size. Indicate the di- 
mensions by letters, on the views of a con- 
venient size as shown. Derive a formula for 
one or more dimensions as directed by your 
instructor. 

PROB. 82, Fig. 277.— Make a graphical 
chart, drawing, and table of dimensions simi- 
lar to Fig. 276 for the SUPPORT shown in 
Fig. 277, for values of R of 1", 2", Z" 4" and 
5". Obtain sufficient values to plot graphical chart from equations which follow : 




Fig. 277. 



A = ^12R - R"" -7, 



R 3" 

J5 = - + - 

4 4 



C = -B. 



168 



MACHINE DRAWING 




for /§ pipe 
plug. 












\ N 




\ r 1. 



Fig. 278. Prob. 83. 

MACHINE DETAILS 

196, The contents of Chap. V should be studied carefully while worldng the follow- 
ing problems. If reference books on Machine Design are available they should be 
consulted. 

PROB. 83, Fig. 278.— Make a working drawing of the STEAM PISTON. Show 
one view as a half section. 



"^ 


! 
















^^^^ 




1 














^^'^ 


























A 














^^.^-^ 








1 




^\ 














1 
[ 




J^ 






























.^ 


' i— '"^^ 
















'^■-'"'^1 
















t 


^^.^^ 
















^^ 


' 1 1 












— ■ — ^ 


^2 


1 1 1 














i OS 






























.o 


^_— — --^ 














?:. 


- — ' — !" 1 ' 


^^ 










— 


1 




J 


\ . 










- 


"5 




' += — 

1 


-3^ 














1 


1 















27/// /..y ^^ 



10 I a' 

Diameter cf Piston 



1^ 



/6 




Fig. 279. Piston Dimensions. 




Fig. 280. Eccentric Details. 



PROB. 84.— Make a complete two view working drawing for a steam engine piston. 
Material is cast iron. Diameter of cylinder is 8". Hollow part of piston is divided 
into four sections by ribs. Piston rings V2" wide and V4" thick. Obtain dimensions 
d, A, B, and C from diagram of Fig. 279. It will be necessary to provide a hole from 
each section of the piston to allow for support of cores. These holes can be tapped 
and closed with pipe plugs. There should be two shallow tapped holes in the head 
end of the piston into which rods can be screwed to remove the piston from the cyhnder. 
Show method of fastening rod and piston (11" x 14" working space). Refer to Chap- 
ter V. 



J i 



16'^ ~*^i6^. ,"~*^/6 




Fig. 281. Prob. 88. 



169 



170 



MACHINE DRAWING 



PROB. 85. — Make a complete two view working drawing of a steam piston as 
described for Prob. 86 but diameter of cylinder = 14" and piston rings Vs" wide and 
V2" thick. Divide hollow part of piston into six equal sections. Refer to Chapter V. 




Fig. 282. Prob. 89. 



Fig. 28.3. Prob. 90. 



PROB. 86. — Make a working drawing for an eccentric sheave and straps for the 
diameter of shaft specified by the instructor. Dimensions not given in table are to be 
worked out on your drawing. Suggestions for design are given in Fig. 280. Make a 
sketch and submit for criticism before starting your drawing. 

Dimensions in Inches 



Diameter of Shaft 

Throw of Eccentric 

Width of Eccentric ...... 

Diameter of Eccentric Rod 
Diameter of Bolts 



2V2 


2V4 


3 


Vs 


1 


IVs 


1V2 


IVa 


1V4 


V4 


Vs 


1 


V2 , 


V16 


Vs 



274 

31 

2 



3V2 



1 to IVs 



PROB. 87, Fig. 281.— Draw three views of the CROSSHEAD SHOE. 
PROB. 88, Fig. 281.— Make a complete working drawing of the CROSSHEAD 
only. Show complete top, right end, and left end views in section. 

PROB. 89, Fig. 282.— 
Make a drawing for a gland 
stuffing box — either plain or 
brass fined. Give complete 
dimensions for gland, box, 
and studs. Diameter of rod 
as specified by instructor. 
Study Art. 120. 

Fig. 284. 

PROB. 90, Fig. 283. 
— Make assembly and de- 
tail drawings for a screw 
type STUFFING BOX. 
Diameter of rod as speci- 
fied by instructor. Vari- 
ations in the design of the 
body and gland nut are 





Fig. 285. 



given in Figs. 284 and 285. See Art. 120. 




Fig. 286. Prob. 95. C. I. Pulley. 

BEARINGS AND PULLEYS 

197. The following problems are based upon Chap. VI. Only the elements are con- 
sidered and the ques- 
tion of design is left for 
books on Machine De- 
sign. The catalogs of 
transmission machin- 
ery manufacturers can 
be studied to advan- 
tage. 

PROB. 91, Fig. 166, 
Chap. VI.— Make a 
working drawing of a 
sohd BABBITTED 
BEARING. Size as 
specified by instructor. 

PROB. 92, Fig. 167, 
Chap. VI.— Make a 
working drawing for 
size specified by in- 
structor. 

PROB. 93, Fig. 168, 
Chap. VI.— Make an 
outhne drawing for size 
specified by instructor. 




See text for 
missing dimensions. 



Fig. 287. Prob. 96. Special Pulley. 



171 



172 



MACHINE DRAWING 



ii Holes 



I'i Solid Cvl/or 







1/6 Solid Collar 



6-3 



COUNTERSHAFT MO. I. 

IjI'Dia 6'J'Long. Four Wonted 
Scale- l^"=ir\ 
Apnl 19,1920. 



Fig. 288. Prob. 97. Shaft Drawing. 

PROB. 94, Fig. 170, Chap. VI.— Make a drawing of POST BOX for size speci- 
fied by instructor. 

PROB. 95, Fig. 286.— Make a working drawing of the cast iron PULLEY. Show 
right hand view in section. 

PROB. 96, Fig. 287.— Make a two view working drawing of the SPECIAL PULLEY. 
Diameter of pulley is 16". There are six ribs V4" thick and six holes \" diameter 
equally spaced on a 9" bolt circle. The bosses are 2^1^" diameter and V4" out from 
surface. Other dimensions are given on the figure. 

SHAFTING AND COUPLINGS 

198. The drawings for shafting layouts must be carefully checked. Complete 
details of standard bearings, pulleys, etc., are not necessary but sufficient information 
should be given for purposes of ordering and erection. 

PROB. 97, Fig. 288. — Make a complete shafting drawing as shown. 

PROB. 98, Fig. 289. — Make a complete shafting drawing with all dimensions, 
similar to Fig. 288, for the shaft shown in Fig. 289. The smaller pulley is 16" diameter 
and the larger pulley 24" diameter. Get other dimensions from the tables given in 
Chap. VI. 

PROB. 99, Fig. 184, Chap. VII.— Make a drawing for a SOLID SLEEVE COUP- 
LING for size specified by instructor. 

PROB. 100, Fig. 185, Chap. VII.— Make a drawing for a CLAMP COUPLING 
for size specified by instructor. 

PROB. 101, Fig. 186, Chap. VII.— Make a drawing for a FLANGE COUPLING 
for size specified by instructor. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



173 




Fig. 2S9. Prob. 98. Shaft Drawing. 



JIGS AND FIXTURES 



199. The following problems emphasize points to be considered in shop drafting. 




PROB. 102, Fig. 291.— 
Make a working drawing for 
the MAIN CASTING of a 
jig for the LINK of Fig. 290. 
The letters A, B, C, etc., are 
for reference when making an 
assembly. Dimensions not 
given are to be worked out by 
thestudent. Refer to Fig. 292. 

PROB. 103, Fig. 292.— 
Draw the JIG DETAILS. 
Refer to Figs. 290, 291 and to 
Chap. VIII. Use standard 
bushings as dimensioned in 
Table 23, Chap. VIII. 

PROB. 104, Figs. 290, 291, and 292. — Make an assembled jig drawing showing the 
piece to be drilled in its position in the jig. The drawing should be similar to Fig. 189. 
Letters^, B, Con Fig. 290 are also given on Fig. 291 to indicate position of the LINK. 
The LOCATING PIN is put in place at A and the HAND SCREW screws through 
the tapped hole E and holds the link against the locating pin. The SCREW BUSHING 
and Vs" SLIP BUSHING go in place at B. The screw bushing presses against the link. 
The LINER BUSHING and Vie" SLIP BUSHING are used at C. The V-BLOCK is 
held against the end of the link marked C by the SCREW and HANDWHEEL. The 
screw stem passes through the PLATE. The plate is held at D by countersunk screws. 



Fig. 290. Detail of Link. 



IN. _ ^_ _. 



1 ^ 

Al 



■6 



1^— 4-.- 




< I < / 



J 



u--.^ 




^Tap 



/<? 



i^r ir± 



I-/H 






V1 



3^ 



-1 



T^ 



:f=^q: 



2^ y » ! 



h^H 



ei 







Fig. 291. Probs. 102 and 104. 



Thread^ 






L, 



(1) HandScrekV 



e: 



t _ 



1 

@ Locating Pin 



4_ 










J 


U* — 1^ >- 



@ s5///p Bushing 







(?) >5//;o Bushing 




<^-20 Tap 



(g) >5cren^ Bushing ^ 

Thready ^N!$Vno fQ ^'''" 







(e) Liner Bustling 



(9) Screty 






174 



Fig. 292. Probs. 103 and 104. 



PROB. 105, Figs. 190 
and 191, Chap. IX.— 
Make a working drawing 
for the details of the FIX- 
TURE. Show each part 
separately. Obtain di- 
mensions by use of dividers 
and the scale shown on 
the figure, by method de- 
scribed in Art. 194. 

PROB. 106, Figs. 190 
and 191, Chap. IX.— 




Sechon on P/ane "A'A ' 



Pictorial Vietv of Left End 

Fig. 293. Probs. 102 to 104. 



Obtain 



Make a drawing of the complete fixture with the v^ork in place as in the figure, 
dimensions as described in Art. 194. 

PROB. 107, Figs. 188 and 189, Chap. IX.— Make a drawing of the JIG as shown in 
the figure. Obtain dimensions by using dividers and the scale shown on the figure 
by method described in Art. 194. The sketches of Fig. 293 will help in reading Fig. 189. 

PROB. 108, Figs. 188 and 189, Chap. IX.— Make a working drawing showing 
each of the details of the jig separately. Obtain dimensions as described in Art. 194. 



GEARS AND CAMS 
200. The following problems are suggestive and can be easily multipHed by modi- 
fying the conditions stated. For a complete study of the drafting of gears, see Anthony's 
Essentials of Gearing, D. C. Heath Co., Boston. 




Fig. 294. Probs. 110 to 119. 



175 



176 



MACHINE DRAWING 




"ZZZ/. 



^ 



I 



V^ZP^ 



^ 



^Mv. 



n 

Spur Gears. 



n 



PROB. 109, Fig. 204, Chap. IX.— 
Make a SPUR GEAR drawing as 
shown in Fig. 204. 

PROB. 110, Fig. 294.— Make a 
SPUR GEAR drawing similar to Fig. 
204 for conditions which follow. Four 
sections are shown in Fig. 295 where 
a plain gear is shown at I, plain with 
hub at II, webbed at III and with arms 
at IV. Various combinations can, of 
course, be made. 

Details or dimensions not speci- 
fied are to be worked out by the 
student on his drawing. Letters refer 



to Fig. 294. Solve problem using values given in the following table for gear specified 
by instructor. Choose scale so that gear can be drawn in 11" x 14" space. 



PROB. 


Pitch 


Number 
of Teeth 


A 


B 


C D 


110 

Ill 

112 

113 

114 

115 

116 

117 

118 

119 


8 
7 
6 
5 
4 

3V2 

3 

2V4 
2V4 

2 


68 
62 
58 
43 
66 
64 
28 
44 
70 
30 


2V8 

2V4 

2V2 

3 

31/4 
4 

3V. 
4 

51/4 

51/2 


1V2 

2 

2V4 

2V2 

3 
3 

3V4 

33/4 

4V2 


iVs 

1V4 
1V2 
1V4 

2 

2V2 
2V2 
2V4 

374 

4 


IV16 

IVs 

IV4 

IV2 

IVs 

2 

IV4 

2 

2V4 

2V2 



PROB. 120, Fig. 208, Chap. IX.— Make a BEVEL GEAR drawing as shown in 
Fig. 208 (11" X 14" space). 

PROB. 121, Fig. 296.— Make a drawing for the MITRE GEAR suggested in Fig. 
296. Give complete dimensions, angles, etc. 

PROB. 122.— Make a drawing for a MITRE GEAR similar to the previous problem 
but for 6 pitch and 54 teeth. Use same size shaft and hub. 

PROB. 123, Fig. 297.— Make a drawing for the WORM and WHEEL as shown 
in Fig. 297. 

PROB. 124, Fig. 298.— Design a PLATE CAM with point contact (as in Fig. 212) 
to raise follower during one half revolution with uniform motion and allow it to drop 
during remaining half revolution 'with uniform motion. 

X = 9", y = 5", AB = rise = IV4", Distance OA = 2V4". 

PROB. 125, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with point contact to raise follower during 
one third revolution, drop during one third revolution at rest during one third revolu- 
tion. Uniform motion up and down. 

X = 9", y = 5", AB = 2", OA = 2V2". 

PROB. 126, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with point contact. Motion as follows: 
Up 1 inch during V4 rev. with gravity motion. At rest during Vs rev. Up 1 inch 
during V4 rev. with gravity motion. Down 2 inches during V4 rev. with uniform motion. 
At rest during Vs rev. 

X = 9", y = 5", AB = 2", OA = 2V2". 



4- Pitch 
40 Teeth 




Fig. 296. Prob. 121. Mitre Gears. 



Heyivc^iy^ Deep^ 




^ 



^1^ 



WORM GEAR 48 Teeth GP 5ing/e PH. 



WORM Sing/e R.H. 



Fig. 297. Prob. 123. Worm and Wheel. 



177 



178 



MACHINE DRAWING 



PROB. 127, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM mth point contact. Motion as follows: 
Up IV2 inches during Vs rev. with harmonic motion at rest during Ve rev. Drop IV2 
inches during Vs rev. with harmonic motion. At rest during Ve rev. 
X = 9", y = 5", AB = IV2", OA = 31/4''. 

PROB. 129, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with roUer V4 inches diameter. Same 
motion as for Prob. 124. x = 9", y = b", AB = V/^", OA = 2^U". 








b' 


B 




\ 






. 




A\^ 


! 


lA 






1 
1 
1 
I 


^r 


^ 


C 






KJ 






y 














r 



Fig. 298. 



Fig. 299. 



PROB. 129, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with roller V4 inches diameter. Same 
motion as for Prob. 125. x = 9", y = 5", AB = 2", OA = 2V2". 

PROB. 130, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with roUer V4 inches diameter. Same 
motion as for Prob. 127. x = 9", y = 5", AB = IV2", OA = S^i". 

PROB. 131, Fig. 299.— Design a PLATE CAM with point or roller contact as directed 
by instructor. Motion as follows: Up IV4 inches during ^/o rev. \\dth uniform motion. 
Down IV4 inches during V2 rev. with uniform motion. Shaft revolves left hand. 
X = 9", y = 5", AB = VU", CA = 2^U", OC = IV4". 

PROB. 132, Fig. 299.— Same as Prob. 131 except, 

X = 9", y = 5", A'B' = IV2", C'A' = 3", OC = 1". 

PROB. 133, Fig. 299.— PLATE CAM wdth either point or roller contact. Motion 
as follows: Up during Vs rev. with gravity motion. Dowti during 1/3 rev. with gravity 
motion. Rest during Va rev. x = 9", y= 5", AB =VU", CA =2^U", OC =V/s'. 

PROB. 134, Fig. 299.— PLATE CAM. Same as Prob. 131, harmonic motion. 





Diameter 



Trai^e/ 



Fig. 300. 



- Development 



Fig. 301. 



PROB. 135, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with flat follower (as in Fig. 217). Motion 
and distances as in Prob. 120 except x = 7'^ 

PROB. 136, Fig. 298.— PLATE CAM with flat follower. Motion and distances 
as follows: Up during Vs rev. with harmonic motion. At rest Ve rev. Down during 
Vs rev. with gravity motion. At rest V<> rev. Dimensions as for Prob. 129. 

PROB. 137, Fig. 300.— Design a PLATE CAM similar to Fig. 216. Show cam 
outline complete. Motion as follows: Up from A to B during V2 rev. with gravity 
motion. Drop from B to A during V4 rev. with gravity motion. At rest during V4 rev. 

W = 5", X = 2V2", y = 3V2", AB = 3", Ri = 10", R2 = 31/2". 

PROB. 138, Fig. 300.— Same as Prob. 137 but for uniform motion. 

PROB. 139, Fig. 301.— Draw the development of the pitch Hne for a CYLIN- 
DRICAL CAM (as in Fig. 219) for the following motion. 

Parallel to axis 2V2 inches during Vs rev. with harmonic motion. At rest ^/e rev. 
Return parallel to axis 2V2 inches during V4 rev. with harmonic motion. At rest V4 rev. 
Diameter = 3". Travel = 2V2". 

PROB. 140, Fig. 301. — Same as Prob. 139 but for gravity motion and show groove 
for V4" diameter roll. 

PIPING DRAWINGS 

201. A piping drawing is started by laying out the center Unes and locating the 
valves, fittings, etc., which can be shown more or less conventionally depending upon 
the scale. A complete treatment of the subject is given in "A Handbook on Piping," 
published by D. Van Nostrand Co., N. Y. Study Chap. X. 

PROB. 141, Fig. 302. — From sketch, make a piping drawing to scale. 




A 



PLAN 



16 Pipe 



■> '■» 



5l£_i 




n/ 



16 '/2 '7 Ex heavy tee 



^I6^-^I6^M 



y^ 




/6iA»-l6i- 



■ /2'-6f- 

/6 £x /leoi'y straight ^vay 
^ i^a/^e i^ith by-poss 



4-0- 



-^S-o- 



l6i'\'l6iA^ 16 £x hea\^y] 
tong rod e//s 



SIDE ELEVATION 



t6 £x heavy tee 
B/ank flange 



END ELEVATION 



Fig. 302. Prob. 141. Piping Layout. 



179 



180 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Fig. 303.— Make a drawing for a PIPE SUPPORT. These supports are made 
in sizes from 4" to 72" by the Pittsburgh Piping & Equipment Company. (11" x 14" 
working space.) 

Dimensions for Pipe Supports 





0) 
N 

m 

8 
24 
50 














Pipe 












ABC 


D 


E 


F 


G 


H 


J 


K L 


M N \ P 


PROB. 142.. 
PROB. 143.. 
PROB. 144.. 


8V4 

24V4 
50V4 


3 4 
5 6 

8 9 


5V4 

11 


V4 
1V4 
IV2 


IVs 
2 


2V4 

6 
12 


2V4 

33/4 
5V2 


IV4 
2V2 
3V2 


Vs 9V4 
1 25V8 
iVs 5IV2 


IV4 24 
IV4 1 59V2 
2V4 118 


V2 

Vs 
IV4 




^straight fhre-id 




Diamefer of hole = A" 



Fic. 303. Probs. 142, 143 and 144. Pipe Support. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



181 



H 

g 

O 

1-5 

12; 
o 
cc 

<< 
&< 
X 

o 

O 
I— I 

02 



spncig 

OZfg 


CO CO lO 


73 


CO CO r* 

:C O in 


O 


Tt^ t^ So 
1— 1 1— 1 t— 1 


Cls 


O Oi i— t 
1-1 ,-i(M 


O 


C^ 00 -"T 

C^ 05 (N 


:^ 




^ 


^ CD 00 

T— 1 1— I 1— ( 


^ 


TJ< Tj« 00 

rt -1 C^S 

1—1 1—1 1—1 


!^ 


to 

M -< t^ 


ti: 


CC -1 M 

1— 1 rH I— 1 


C5 


CO CO CO 


fe. 


■w 00 00 

CO ^ o 

1— ( 1— 1 1-H 


fe^ 


O T-l CO 
1-1 (M c^ 


Q 


■CO lOO 

7— 1 1— 1 1— ( 


o 


1-1 Ttl ^ 
1—1 1—1 tH 


cq 


^ CO tH 

1— 1 I— 1 1— 1 


^ 


O Ol CO 

1— 1 1— 1 T— 1 


azig 


O C^ rtH 

1— * 1— 1 T— 1 



Fig. 304.— Make a drawing for an iron body EXPANSION 
JOINT for 125 lbs. working pressure. The dimensions given 
in the table are from the Pittsburgh Piping & Equipment Co. 
(11" X 14" working space). 




lO o t^ 

^^ ^ ^^ 



COO 



Fig. 304. Probs. 145, 146 and 147 



182 



MACHINE DRAWING 



5"x6" VERTICAL ENGINE 




202. The problems 
relating to Figures 305 
to 322 comprise a set 
of drawings for a 5" x 
6" vertical steam en- 
gine. They may be 
worked as separate 
problems or as a class 
problem. Each prob- 
lem is stated by itself 
so they may be used in 
any way desired by 
the instructor. In 
some cases one figure 
refers to another for 
dimensions or informa- 
tion. This will require 
the student to check 
his drawing. A sec- 
tional assembly of the 
engine is shown in Fig. 
305. 



Fig. 305. Sectional Assembly. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



183 



PROB. 148, Fig. 306. — From the sketch make a complete working drawing of the 
STEAM CHEST COVER. Give proper dimensions and indicate finished surfaces. 
Examine Figs. 305 and 319 to see where cover is used. 

PROB. 149, Fig. 307. — From the sketch make a complete working drawing of the 
CYLINDER HEAD. Show one view in section. Examine Figs. 305 and 319 to see 
where head is used. 

PROB. 150, Fig. 308. — From the sketch make a complete working drawing for the 
PISTON. Supply complete dimensions. 

PROB. 151, Fig. 309.— Make a complete working drawing of the FLY WHEEL. 
Show one view in secticfn. 

PROB. 152, Fig. 310.— Make a complete working drawing of the BASE. Show 
front and side views as half sections. 



L 



IL 



j^ Holeb for^ sfuds ^iio 



^ 



S Square ■ 



^ 



^- 



/y 






^ 



Steam Chest Cover 



c? 









H/-I. 



^ 



Fkj. 30G. Prob. 148. Steam Chest Cover. 



^^^ 






Drill Ji holes 

for £" studs 
a 



0^ 



Cylinder Head 




-Polish 



Fig. 307. Prob. 149. Cylinder Head. 




184 



Fig. 308. Prob. 150. l^iston. 




' Heyyvay 



■Six arms equo/fy spaced 



Flywheef 



Fig. 309. Prob. 151. F^^wheel. 



-<5/- 



'22- 



15^"- 




-<K -. 



Tap 6 Mo/es 



^^ 



' -^ Drill ^ Holes 



19' 



r 



/^i- 






prTT 



V 



p 



-n 



1 ,' 



r/ 



TrnrT 



— I — 

I 



1 1 » 



L^ 



-24' 



u 



7^- 



-/j"- 



Fig. 310. Prob. 152. Base. 



185 



186 



MACHINE DRAWING 



PROB. 153, Fig. 311. — Make a complete working drawing for the BEARING 
CAP. Show front and side views as half sections. Note babbitt and V4" oil pipe. 
Compare radii at A, B, and C wdth text and illustrations in Art. 121. 

PROB. 154, Fig. 312.— Make a detail working drawing for the valve rod STUFFING 
BOX and piston rod GLAND. 

PROB. 155, Fig. 313. — From the given sketch make an assembly drawing of the 
ECCENTRIC, with or without dimensions as directed by the instructor. 

PROB. 156, Fig. 313.— From the given sketch make detail drawings of the eccentric 
sheave, eccentric straps, bolts and shim. Give all dimensions. Use two 11" x 14" 
sheets or one large sheet, Fig. 236. 

PROB. 157, Fig. 314. — From the given sketch make a detail drawing of the valve 
and eccentric rods. 

PROB. 158, Fig. 315.— From the sketch make a complete detail drawing of the 
CRANK SHAFT, PISTON ROD, etc. 



Babbitts^ 



a 




■Holes for ^ studs 



Bearing Cap 



Fig. 311. Prob. 153. Bearing Cap. 



—< 



^^^^^ 



e 



II rhc/5 us 5td 



TT 

— I! 









-w 



1 



'276 f/f^s of Hex 



Va/)/e Rod Sfuffing Box 



T 



.-^T 






/i- 



Val\^e Rod Gland 



// Thds U.SStd. 



TT 



1_ 



^X4 



SilSi 



L 



''> 



12 S/ofs ^ i\'/c/e 



^c(f 



tui 



*J^4l^/6^ 



Vol we Rod G/and Nut 






Ho/es ford sfuds 



//- 



J6 




Piston Rod Gland 



Fig. 312. Prob. 154. F^tuffing Box Details. 



*-/i 




Eccentric Strap 'i^^^ 
Upper tia/f 




^ 



^2ef Serein. 






^ 



i_ 



-3^ 
^4 



-3a 



± 



^ 



Qo 



K- 



f-:zzz= 







J 



Eccentric 

\Sh€o\^t 

Eccentric strap. 
Louver Half 




\^~s. 






v 



y' 



I 



A 



Fig. 313. Probs. 155 and 156. Eccentric. 



187 



15 




ylHIlP 




34 



A 



Va/ye Rod 



^ 



32 Spring Cotter 



Knuckle Pm 



K. 



1 jLlUlL 



'"T^^'^.co 



I^ 




/-7A7C' this rvctius by construction 




Fig. 314. Prob. 157. Fccentric Rod, etc. 



27i- 




Ci-ossheod Adjusfing Screw 

— N 



Crosshead Pin 







-///■ 



P/sfon Rod 



dr 



■ P-- 



/7,^- 



188 



Fig. 315. Prob. 158. Crank Shaft, Piston Rod, etc. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



189 



PROB. 159, Fig. 316. 
ROD. 



-Make a complete working drawing of the CONNECTING 



PROB. 160, Fig. 317.— Make a working drawing of the CONNECTING ROD 
DETAILS. Draw views as given, complete top view of wedge and draw top view of 
bronze box. Give complete dimensions. Obtain the bolt dimensions by reference to 
the places where they are used. Figs. 316 and 318. 

PROB. 161, Fig. 318.— Make working drawing of the CRANK END BOXES for 
the connecting rod. Show the end views with all full lines, but without all dotted lines. 
Select dotted Hnes in all views carefully, omitting such as tend to confuse. Show 
front view in half section. Determine a few points in curve of intersection shown at A 
in top view. 

PROB. 162, Figs. 316, 317, and 318.— Make a two view assembly drawing of the 
complete connecting rod, either with full views or part sections. Give such dimensions 
as would be necessary for machining or assembUng. Use a large size sheet (Fig. 236) 
for this problem. 



T 



~<L^ 



^ 



J. 



/44- 




Pbr £ bolK 
a 






;!> 




Fig. 316. Prob. 159. Connecting Rod. 



Pin, Lock nuts 



-ffi 



II. 




•^lOO 



Wedge Bo/t 



.Crank End Bolt 



J 



r 



VIE\A/ 



s2 



^ Tap 





hi—\ 



J\ 



.± u 




Wedge Block 



Bronze Boxes 



Fig. 317. Prob. 160. Connecting Rod Details. 



VIEW 



Babbitt 





VIEW 



Crank End Boxes 



190 



Fig. 318. Probs. 161 and 162. Crank End Boxes. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



191 



PROB. 163, Fig. 319.— Make a working drawing of the STEAM CYLINDER 
showing the front view in section. Use regular sheei. 

PROB. 164, Fig. 319.— Make a working drawing of the STEAM CYLINDER 
with following views. Front view as section on plane A-A; end view in full; complete 
top view in full; section on plane B-B. Use large sheet (Fig. 236). 

PROB. 165, Fig. 320.— Make a working drawing of the CROSSHEAD SHOE. 
Show front view in section. 

PROB. 166, Fig. 321.— Make a working drawing of the CROSSHEAD BODY. 
Show views given and two end views. Use judgment as to dotted Unes on end views. 

PROB. 167, Figs. 320 and 321. — Make an assembly drawing of the Crosshead and 
Shoe. Adjusting screw will be found on Fig. 315. 

PROB. 168, Fig. 322.— Make a working drawing of the FRAME. Work out 
curves at A very carefully to give good appearance. Curves at C and D are to be found 
by projection and should be analyzed carefully. Show all views as half sections. De- 
tail for Bearing Cap is given on Fig. 311. 

PROB. 169. — Make a sectional assembly of the 5" x 6" Engine as shown in Fig. 
305. 

PROB. 170. — Make a sectional assembly of the 5" x 6" Engine taken through the 
vertical axis but at right angles to section shown in Fig. 305. 

PROB. 171. — Make an exterior assembly of the 5" x 6" Engine, which will show 
the crosshead, connecting rod, etc. 

PROB. 172. — Make an exterior assembly of the 5" x 6" Engine, which does not 
show the crosshead, connecting rod, etc. 




■ 7c7o for 2 studs 
-Tap for ^ sfuds 

Steam Cylinder 



Fig. 319. Probs. 163 and 164. Steam Cvlinder. 



y/Em 



ir 



.T 



^i<«) 



8 ■ 



%^- 





\?3 



Hir 



— ^ _^_— J L— ± -iJ 

^ , T )_ 



T 



Crosshead Shoe 



Fig. 320. Prob. 165. Crosshead Shoe. 



VIE^ 




D/am. 



192 



Fig. 821. Prob. 166. Crosshead. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



193 




•/-fe Drill 



Fig. 322. Prob. 168. Frame. 



ASSEMBLY AND DETAIL DRAWINGS 

203. The drawings of a STEP BEARING, STEAM KETTLE, and PLUNGER 
PUMP are intended for reading problems as well as to give practice in apphdng the 
principles of drafting. When assembling or detailing, check each piece with the parts 
with which it is used. 

PROB. 173, Fig. 323.— Make detail working drawings for the parts of the STEP 
BEARING. Scale 6" = 1 foot. Use two regular sheets or one large sheet. 

Consider the treatment of views, number of views, etc. Do not copy the dimen- 
sions but finish the views and then locate dimensions without using the book. Note 
that the bolt has a special head Yi' thick and lYi' square. On the right hand 
view one dimension line is shown incomplete to indicate that it is taken " about " 
the center. This is done because the hollow space is not shown on both sides of the 
center line. 



194 



MACHINE DRAWING 



H- 




^ 




PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



195 



PROB. 174, Fig. 324.— Make detail working drawings of the STEAM KETTLE 
parts, 

PROB. 175, Fig. 324.— Make an assembly working dra^ving of the STEAM JACK- 
ETED KETTLE. Draw sectional elevation or half section. Such dimensions as are 
not given are to be supplied by the student. The required bolts are to be drawn and 
specified. The bosses for the pipe may be about twice the outside diameter of the pipe. 



'"P'pe^ 




■ I ,Hole5 for § Bel f 5 



Defo/I of B055 for Pipe ^ Steam Kettle 

4a- /§ Bo/fs 



5-7"D/a. 




I Pipe- Top 
four at 90° 




Pour Supports 
at 90° apart 



Tap for / 'c/ra/n 
Steam Jacket 



Fig. 324. Probs. 174 and 175. 



Completely dimension the drawing. The jacket is supported upon four supports, shown 
pictorially. The flange of the kettle rests upon the flange of the jacket and is bolted to 
it. Use large sheet. (Fig. 236.) 



,i'i Cotter Pin- 



s 




Fig. 325. Probs. 176, 177 and 178. Hand Pump. 

PROB. 176, Fig. 325.— Make a detail working drawing of the PUMP BODY. 

PROB. 177, Fig. 325. — Make a working drawing showing each detail separately 
for the iVs" plunger pump, for all parts except the pump body. Use large sheet. 

PROB. 178, Fig. 325. — Make an exterior assembly drawing of the U/s" plunger 
pump. Give general dimensions only. 196 




STEAM TURBINE BEARING 

204. The steam turbine bearing shown in Figs. 326, 327, and 328 is for a Type 6, 
B. F. Sturtevant Steam Turbine. The bearings are split to permit easy adjustment. 
The two halves are held together with cap screws. The spherical seating makes the 
bearing self-aligning. The rapidly revolving oiling ring takes oil from the oil pocket 
and deposits it on the shaft where it is distributed by the oil grooves in the bearings. 




An idea of the assembly may be had by reference to Fig. 73. The adjusting screw 
(Part No. 2, Fig. 326) is used to screw through the bearing casing cover, causing the 
spherical seat (Part No. 4, Fig. 326) to grip the Unings (Part No. 7, Fig. 328). The 
lock nut (Part No. 3, Fig. 326) is used to hold the adjusting screw in position. 



198 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



199 



Thii end of groot^ej^ de«p 
Taper to ^' deep of fh's en J 




Fig. 328. Probs. 181 to 184. 



The list of parts is as follows : 

1. Bearing Case Cover, Fig. 326. 

2. Adjusting Screw, Fig. 326. 

3. Check Nut, Fig. 326. 

4. Spherical Seat, Fig. 326. 

5. Oil Hole Plug, Fig. 326. 

Safety Chain for Plug, not shown. 
No. 8—32 Machine Screw V2" long 
to hold chain, not shown. 

6. Bearing Case, Fig. 327. 



V2" Pipe Plugs, not shown. 

Felt Washers, not shown. 

Vs" Dowel Pins, 2" long, not shown. 

Vs" Studs, 2 Vie" long, not shown. 

7. Upper Bearing Lining, Fig. 328. 

8. Lower Bearing Lining, Fig. 328. 

9. Phoenix Metal, Fig. 328. 

V2" — 13 Cap Screws, not shown. 
Oil Ring 5V2" inside diameter, 6V4' 
outside diameter. 



PROB. 179, Fig. 326.— Make a detail drawing of the BEARING CASE COYER. 
Show the front and side views as half sections. 

PROB. 180, Fig. 327.— Make a detail drawing of the BEARING CASE. Show 
the front and side views as half sections. 

PROB. 181, Fig. 328.— Make a detail drawing of the BEARING LINING. Will 
go full size on large size sheet, Fig. 236. Draw front view as a half section. 

PROB. 182, Figs. 326, 327, and 328.— Make an exterior assembly drawling of the 
complete bearing. Show two or three views as specified by instructor. 

PROB. 183. — Make an assembly drawing of the complete bearing showing a section 
through the axis. One view only. 

PROB. 184. — Make an assembly drawing of the complete bearing, showing a 
section at right angles to the axis. One view only. 




200 



Fig. 329. Prob. 185. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 201 



SLIDE TOOL HOLDER 

205. The slide tool holder shown in Fig. 329 is from a drawing supplied by the 
Foster Machine Company, Elkhart, Ind., and is described by them as follows: 

"Designed for boring, recessing, back facing, and like operations, this tool 
combines a high degree of rigidity with adaptability. The cutters can be carried 
in either of two holes. Wear on the shde of the tool can be taken up by means 
of a gib. The tool adjusting screw carries a graduated dial which feature aids 
materially in setting the tool. The sHde tool is used on Foster turret lathes." 

PROB. 185. — Make detail working drawings of each part of the vertical slide tool. 
Consider choice of views, treatment of views, scale, etc., very carefully. If drawn 
full size larger sheets than specified in Fig. 236 will be required. 

POWER PUNCHING PRESS 

206. The " Stiles " Punching Press, No. 2— B shown in Fig. 330 is built by the 
E. W. Bliss Company, Brooklyn, N. Y., who furnished drawings from which the fol- 
lowing figures were made. This tj^pe of press is made in three sizes, either as flywheel 
or geared presses. Larger sheets than specified in Fig. 238 will be required. About 
18" X 24" working space for a minimum if drawn to a scale of 3" = 1 ft. 

207. The ''Stiles" clutch is illustrated in partial assembly in Fig. 335. Views are 
shown in direction of arrows "A" and ''B" from the plane indicated. The clutch 
collar is keyed to the shaft. 

The dog holds the wheel pin in place. When the treadle is depressed one cam on 
the clutch fork releases the wheel pin allowing it to engage a recess in the clutch collar 
and revolve the shaft. When the treadle is released the wheel pin is pushed back into 
the wheel b}' a wedge cam on the clutch fork and is held by the dog. Three wheel pins 
are used on the flywheel of this press. 

PROB. 186, Fig. 331.— Make a working drawing of the FRAME. Show top view 
in full and necessary sections. Do not simply copy the sketch but consider treatment 
of views. 

PROB. 187. — Make detail drawings of the separate parts as directed by your 
instructor. It will be necessary to study the complete machine in order to check the 
parts. Use small or large standard sheets, Fig. 234 or Fig. 236. Several sheets will be 
required. Plan the arrangement of parts and treatment of views. 

PROB. 188. — Make an assembly drawing of the complete press. Show all parts 
in their working positions. Section such parts as are necessary to show the construction 
clearly. Choose scale and plan views for instructor's criticism. Work carefully to 
check details. Drawing must be accurate. Do not dimension. Study clutch as given 
on details and in Fig. 335. 

PROB. 189. — Make an exterior or full view assembly drawing of the press. Do not 
show hidden surfaces. Give set-up and space dimensions only. 



202 



MACHINE DRAWING 




Fig. 330. Press. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



203 




^Tap 



^■^i^'^P 



IS 



Fig. 331. Probs. 186 to 189. 



204 



MACHINE DRAWING 



fin^-L 



Tap 




C\j ^Dri//-fcr¥/rench- 




/• \ \ '\iY\. >i? ~^ a: — . -> , t 



S/ide 
One- Casf /rvn 



Connecf/'ort 
One-Machine Sfeel/^and forge^ 
ta Pifch 

I'PifchOia. ^ Y^Dri/l 



1 " <. r 






■5^ 



kVnsnch 
One-iVroug^f /rvn 






V 



u 



-<5" 



>• 1 1 ' I ~T| -T- 



-tr' 



f.oos Tor fUting ,'^^T 

Connecf/on P/n 
One- fl^achine Sfeel 




n V . .I .l.ll.'ni.. 



ClHl^ib^-i 



C/amp 3crey^ 
One'Mac/j/'ne Sfeel 







w^ 



S//de Cap 
One- Cosf /ran 



Plug 
Oner Cast Iron 



li^ 



Index Finger 
One- .Sheet Steel 



/Hi* 




Eccentric 
Orre-Ailachine Steel {Drop Forge) 



Connection Bashing 
One - Bron.z'e 



SLIDE, DETAILS 



Fig. 332. Probs. 187, 188 and 189. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



205 



J_ 














^v 


^J^-H 






^ 


^ 










36 - 


V— 


-^i"-H 


.! 








> 


-^it-/' 


-il ri 


L 


^ 




_ ——^—-— — — T 

Treadle 
One - Wrought Iron 






+-J 



-0V 






^k i/p^ir^ ^ 




//,0/i7 IOTM5.perj.-ich,L.H 



J- L_ 



-^^ 



-e?- 



H 






Irrr 



a^ 



^^ 



^22^ 



rlii 



/y/7/a 



-42- 



Crank Shaft Stroke l4 " 

One- Machine Steel 






/(? 7/7<7'5 /pe/- inch, L /V 




Somp/e usecf for exacf shape 



No. II BWG. 

3 Coils per inch. 

Lcrfch Bracket Spring 
- One - 



Clutch Collar 
One- Machine Steef 



Collar Pin 
One - Tool Sleet 

r~h-^/TlV dasher 

Machine Steel 



SHAFT DETAILS 



Fig. 333. Probs. 187, 188 and 189. 



206 



MACHINE DRAWING 



Note .; Put m three 

foe king points 



-4^- 




F/ykyhee/ 
^ One- Cost Iron „ 
30 'Dia. ' •^^ 'Face > ^/ Bor^ 
350 lbs 



Sorrynie osed for 
exact shape 




Wtieel Pin 
One - Too/ 5 tee/ 




Bu siting 
One - Bronze 



^4r/'2ih''6 




P/ug 
One - Co/d ffo/ied 5 tee/ 



5omp/e usee/ for 
exact s/iape 







Tofi>er Pin 
One-A^ocn/ne Stee/ 



^i 



No. 15 B^.G 

14 Co// 5 per 3 inches 

Whieel Pin Spring 
■Stee/ Wire 



- — wm'^'''^ 



No. 17 8 t^ G. 

13 Coi/s per £ inches 

Dog Spring 
Stee/ iVire 



CLUTCH DETAILS 



Fig. 334. Probs. 187, 188 and 189. 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



207 



Clujch Collar- ^Vheel Pm 
Plu<} 
Collar Pin 




Latch Bracket 



Lj*ch Spring 



pf- 



rk Corjnecfion 
View in direction of cjrrotv "A 




View in direction arrow B 



Fig. 335. Clutch Assembly. 

AMMONIA PUMP END 

208. A pump for ammonia must be constructed entirely of iron or steel. The 
operation of the water end of an ordinary reciprocating pump should be understood 
before starting this problem. Fig. 336 shows an ammonia pump cylinder and Fig. 337 
some suggested details. If possible it would be well for the student to refer to "Pump- 
ing Machinery" by A. M. Greene. Choose scales for details carefully, either full size 
or half size depending upon the piece. 

PROB. 190.— Fig. 336.— Make a detail working drawing of the ammonia PUMP 
CYLINDER. Show top view in full, front view as a half section on planes indicated, 
a cross section, and a full end view. Large sheet, Fig. 236. 

PROB. 191, Fig. 337.— Make a working drawing of the AIR CHAiMBER. (11" 
X 14" space.) 

PROB. 192, Fig. 337. — Make a working drawing of the valves, valve seats, and 
plugs. The sketches are suggestive. Wing valves are shown but ball valves may be 
used with advice of the instructor. A partial assembly showing the valves in place 
may be necessary in order to determine dimensions. It should be possible to remove 
the suction valve without taking out the discharge valve seat. The lift of a valve to 
give full opening is one fourth the diameter but the practical lift is about one half this 
amount. Use 11" x 14" space. 

PROB. 193, Fig. 337.— Make a working drawing of the PISTON. (11" x 14" 
space.) Sketch is suggestive only. 

PROB. 194, Fig. 337.— Make a working drawing of the outside CYLINDER 
HEAD. Consider method of making joint (11" x 14" space). 

PROB. 195, Fig. 338.— Make a working drawing of the inside CYLINDER HEAD 
and double stuffing box. Note the opening from between the two packing spaces which 
connects with the suction chamber of the pump cylinder. The three tie rods hold the 
pump cylinder and steam cylinder in alignment. The steam cylinder is not part of our 
problem. (11" x 14" space.) 



9didj JOjcloi 



7^-^ 




00 

o 



U 

a 

a 

US 

*s 

o 

a 
s 



CO 
CO 
CO 

u 



PROBLEMS AND STUDIES 



209 



Air Chamber 





J 
1 


- 


-- 


- 


L. 
1 


-- 








i 


A 


t 


m^ 




/// 


M 





Oufside Cylinder 
Head 



\ \ 

1 
■l 

/ / 


■ 



Fig. 337. Ammonia Pump Details. 

PROB. 196, Fig. 337.— Make a working drawing of the FOOT or support. (11" 

X 14" space.) 

PROB. 197, Figs. 336, 337, and 338.— Make an assembly drawing of the ammonia 
pump end. Show two sectional views with all parts in working positions. Use cutting 
planes which are shown on the pump cyUnder drawing. This will require a special 
size large sheet. 




V/e Rod 

Fig. 338. Inside Cylinder Head. 



PROB. 198, Figs. 336, 337, and 338.— Make an exterior assembly drawing of the 
ammonia pump end. 



INDEX 



Accuracy and neatness, 6 

Acme screw thread, 14 

Alternate sectioning, 52 

Angles, 35 

Angles and tapers, to dimension, 66 

Arcs, dotted, 4 

joining, 4 
Arcs and curves, dimensioning, 65 
Area, projected, 7 
Arm detail, 106 
Arms, pulley, 94 
Arrow head, form of, 60 
Artr gum, 6 
A. S. M. E. standards, 11 

symbols for sections, 49 
Assembly drawings, 43 

to make, 43* 
Auto bolts, 26 

Automotive Engineers, Society of, 11 
Auxiliary, view chart, 10 

views, 9 
Axioms for fixture designer, 108 

B 

Babbitted bearing, solid, 88 

Babbitted boxes, 87 

Ball cranks, 82 

Beam detail, 104 

Bearing, split, 88 

Bearings, -86-95 

Belt, length of, 91 

Bending and twisting, shafts for, 99 

Bill of material, 45 

"Blacked in" section, 52 

''Blocking in" lines, 40 

Blue printing, 43 

Bolt chart, 21 

drawing, 22 

head, rounded, 22 

to draw, 19-21 



Bolt holes, 56 
Hst, 45 

Bolting, flange, 28 

Bolts, and studs, 23 
miscellaneous, 26 
S. A. E., 26 
strength of, 28 
U. S. Standard, 18 

Boxes, bearing, 86 
stuffing, 82 

Bushings, 110 

Butt joints, 35 



Calking, 32 
Cams, 114-125 
Capital letters, 11 
Cap screws, 24 

dimensions of, 25 
Cases of. dimensioning, 61 
Cast iron pulley, 95 
Cast iron washers, 37 
Center lines, uses of, 40 
''Center to center" dimensions, 70 
Chain dimensions, 64 
Chain riveting, 34 
Chamfered bolt, 18 
Champion Rivet Co., 32 
Channel bar, 35 
Chart, auxiliary view, 10 

bolt, 21 

dimensioning, 61 

graphic, 74 

pulley crowning, 94 
Checking drawings, 71 
Circle of drilHng, 28 
Clamp couplings, 101 
Clamps, 110 
Classes of drawings, 38 
Clutch couplings, 102 
Complete section, 47 
Connecting rods, 78 



210 



INDEX 



211 



Contour and continuity, 54 
Conventional drawings of screwthreads, 15 
Conventional treatment, 56 
Couplings, 96-103, 100 
Cranks, 79 

bell, 80 
Crosshead, 77 
Cross section, 50 
Crowded dimensions, 66 
CrowTiing pulley, 94 
Curved surfaces, projection of, 8 
Curves, to dimension, 65 
Cylindrical tanks, 35 

D 

Data, graphical, 73 
Design, fixture, 106 
Detail drawing, to make, 40 
Detail drawings, 39 
Details, engine, 74 

machine, 73-85, 168-171 

shaft, 100 

standard, 110 
Developed section, 53 
Diameters of shafts, 96 
Dimension line, 59 
Dimensioning, 59-72 

studies, 165 

wood constructions, 67 
Dimensions, crowded, 66 

from curve, 74 

of cap screws, 25 

of couplings, 101, 102, 103 

of rivet heads, 33 

of S. A. E. bolts, 27 

of solid sleeve couplings, 100 

of standardized bushings, 110 

of steel washers, 37 

of U. S. Standard bolts and nuts, 23 

of U. S. Standard thread, 17 

of Woodruff keys, 31 

limit, 69 
Dotted lines, 4 
Dotted section, 53 
Drawing, bolt, 22 

idioms of, 46 

machine, 1, 38-58 

shaft, 67 



Drawing, three view, 6 
Drawing pencils, 1 
Drawings, assembly, 43 

classes of, 38 

detail, 39 

jig and fixture, 104 

outline, 44 

piping, 126-141 

record of, 44 

shop, 7 

titles for, 12 

to check, 71 

to read, 7 

working, 38 
Drilling, circles of, 28 
Drilling jig, 105 
Drilled hole, point of, 17 
Drive screw, 26 

E 

Eccentric, 78 

Elementary principles, 1-13 

Elements of dimensioning, 60, 61 

Engine details, 74 

Engineering handbooks, 9 

Erasing, 5 

Erasing shield, 6 

Extension line, 59 

Eye bolt, 26 



Fastenings, 14-37 
Feather key, 32 
Fillets, 83 
FilUster head, 26 
Finish mark, 60 
Finished surface, 60 
Finishing, methods of, 65 
Fittings Ust, 46 
Fixtures, 104-113 
Flange couplings, 102 

drilling, 56 

outHnes, 85 
Flanges, 84 

Flanges and bolting, 28 
Forms of screw threads, 15 
Fractions, slant, 11 
Full gasket, 30 



212 



INDEX 



Gas engine piston, 77 

Gaskets, 30 

Gate valves, 131 

Gears, 114-125 

General rules for dimensioning, 70 

Gib key, 30 

Globe valves, 131 

Graphical data, 73 

Gears, 114-125 

bevel, 117 

spur, 116 

teeth, 115 

H 

Half section, 48 
Handbooks, engineering, 9 
Handles, 80 
Hanger, bearing, 89 
Helix, to draw, 151 
"Herring bone" section, 52 
Holes, in flanges, 56 

threaded, 16 
Hook bolt, 26 
Horsepower, by belts, 92 

by shafts, 97 
Hubs, pulley, 93 



I-beam, 35 

Idioms of drawing, 46 

Ink, to erase, 6 

Inking, 2 

Inking, order of, 4, 42 

Instructions, preliminary, 143 

Interchangeable manufacture, 68 



Jig drawing, 104 
Jigs, 104-113 
Joints, butt, 35 
lap, 33 
riveted, 34 



Key seats, 94 

Kinds of motion, 122 



Lag screw, 26 
Lap, of rivets, 34 
Lap joints, 33 
Layout, standard, 143 
Lead, of screws, 14 
Length of belt, 92 
Lettering, 12 
Letters, capital, 11 

lower case, 12 
Levers, 80 

classes of, 80 
Lewis Key, 31 
Limit dimensions, 69 
Line, dimension, 59 
Lines, base, 40 

character of, 5 

dotted, 4 

variation in, 5 
Lines and arcs, joining, 4 
List, bolt, 45 
Location dimensions, 61 
Location of dimensions, 64 
Lock nuts, 27 
Locomotive piston, 76 
Lower case letters, 12 

M 

Machine details, 73-85, 168-171 

drawing, 1, 38-58 

handles, dimensions of, 81 

operations, 73 

screws, 24 
Machined surface, 60 
Manufacture, interchangeable, 68 
Material hst, 45 
Measurements to scale, 3 
Metals, bearing, 86 
Methods of finishing, 65 
Miscellaneous screws, 26 



Keys, 29 

dimensions of, 31 
taper of, 30 



N 

Notation of dimensioning, 59 
Nut, to draw, 19-21 



INDEX 



213 



Nuts, lock, 27 
to draw, 19 



O 



Objects not sectioned, 50 
Order of Inking, 42 
Osborn symbols, 38 
Outline, drawing, 44 
"Overall" dimensions, 70 



Pen, ruling, 3 

use of, 3 
Pencils, drawing, 1 

sharpening, 1 
"Phantom" section, 53 
Pins and screws, support, 109 
Pins and washers, 36 
Pipe list, 46 
Pipe thread, 18 
Piping drawings, 126-141 
Pistons, 75 
Pitch, of rivets, 34 

of screws, 14 

of gears, 115, 117 
Plain key, 30 

Plane, imaginary cutting, 9 
Plane of section, 47 
Pointing lines, 60 
Positions of views, 8 
Post box, 90 
Printing, blue, 43 
Problems and studies, 143-209 
Projected area, 7 
Proportions of keys, 30 
Proportions of pulleys, 93 
Pulleys, 86-95, 114 

forms of, 90 

R 

Radii, limiting, 83 
Reading a drawing, 7 
Record strip, 13 

Representations of screw threads, 15, 17 
Revolved sections, 50 
Ribs, representation of, 56 
treatment of, 51 



Rims, pulley, 93 
Ring, gasket, 30 
Ring, piston, 76 
Rivet heads, 32 

holes, 32 

spacing, 36 
Riveting, 32 

Rivets, dimensions of, 33 
Rods, connecting, 78 
Rounded, bolt, 18 
Rules for dimensioning, 70 
Ruling pens, 3 



S. A. E. bolts, 26 

dimensions of, 27 
Scales, 2, 3 

architect's, 2, 3 

fiat, 2 

triangular, 2 

use of, 2 
Screw threads, 14 

specifications of, 18 
Screws, cap, 24 

machine, 25 

miscellaneous, 26 

set, 25 

support, 109 
Section, complete, 47 

half, 48 

non-continuous, 57 

through rib, 51 

without dotted lines, 46 
Sectional views, 9, 47 
Sectioning symbols, 49 
Sections, of screw threads, 17 

"sliced," 47 

uses of, 49 
Set screws, 25 
Shaft details, 100 
Shaft drawing, 67 
Shafting, 96-103 
Shafts, to dimension, 66 
Shoe, crosshead, 77 
Shop, appliances. 111 
Shop drawings, 7 
Size dimensions, 61, 63 
Slant fractions, 11 



214 



INDEX 



Slanting dimension lines, 64 
Sleeve couplings, 100 
"Sliced" section, 47 
Spacing, bolt, 28 

rivet, 36 
Special views, 57 
Split bearing, 88 
Square jaw couplings, 103 
Square keys, 30 
Square threads, 14, 16 
Staggered dimensions, 64 
Staggered riveting, 34 
Standardized appliances. 111 
Standardized bushings, 110 
Standard parts for jigs and fixtures, 109 

sizes of shafting, 96 

U. S. bolts, 18 
Standards A. S. M. E., 11 

Automotive, 11 
Steam turbine, 38 
Steel plate connections, 35 
Steel shapes, 36 
Steel washers, 37 
Step bearing, 86 
Stove bolts, 26 
Strength of bolts, 28 
Stud, 22 

Stuffing boxes, 82 
Support pins and screws, 109 
Surfaces, curved, projection of, 8 

machined, 60 
Symbols, A. S. M. E. section, 49 

Osborn, 36 
Systems of dimensioning, 62 



''T" slots, 112 
Table, cap screws, 25 

couplings, 101, 102, 103 

keys, 31 

rivets, 33 

S. A. E. bolts, 27 

standardized bushings, 110 

steel washers, 37 

strength of U. S. screw threads, 29 



Table, U. S. Standard bolts, 23 

U. S. Standard screw threads, 17 

Tanks, cylindrical, 35 

Tap bolt, 22 

Taper of keys, 30 

Tapers, to dimension, 66 

Tension, belt, 92 

Titles, 12 

contents of, 12 

Threads, screw, 14 

Through bolt, 22 

Tracing, 42 

True length view, 56 

Turbine, steam, 38 

U 

Uses of screw threads, 14 
U. S. screw threads, strength of, 29 
U. S. Standard bolts, dimensions of, 23 
U. S. Standard bolts and nuts, 18 

chart, 21 
U. S. Standard screw threads, 17 



Valves, 130-134 

gate, 131 

globe, 13 
Velocity ratio, 114 
View, true length, 56 
Views, auxiliary. 9 

placing of, 8, 9 

sectional, 9, 47 

special, 57 

W 

Washers, lock, 27 
Washers and pins, 36 
Wood constructions, 67 
Wood pulley, 95 
Woodruff keys, 31 
sizes used, 31 
Working drawings, 38 



Z-bar, 35 



THE LITERATURE OF THE 

SCIENCES AND ENCxINEERING 



On our shelves is the most complete stock of 
technical, industrial, engineering and scientific 
books in the United States. The technical liter- 
ature of every trade is well represented, as is also 
the literature relating to the various sciences, 
both the books useful for reference as well as 
those fitted for students^ use as textbooks. 
A large number of these we publish and for an 
ever increasing number we are the sole agents. 

ALL INQUIRIES MADE OF US ARE CHEER- 
FULLY AND CAREFULLY ANSWERED 
AND COMPLETE CATALOGS AS WELL AS 
SPECIAL LISTS SENT FREE ON REQUEST 




D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 

Publishers and Booksellers 

8 WARREN STREET NEW YORK 



D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 

8 WARREN STREET 
NEW YORK 



SHORT-TITLE CATALOG 



OF 



Pttblicationa anii SmpottattonB 

OF 

SCIENTIFIC AND ENGINEERING 

BOOKS 




This list includes 
the technical publications of the following English publishers: 

SCOTT, GREENWOOD & CO. JAME 3 MUNRO & CO., Ltd. 
CONSTABLE&COMPANY,Ltd. TECHNICAL PUBLISHING CO. 

BENN BROTHERS, Ltd. 
for whom D. Van Nostrand Company are American agents. 



ACTGUST, 1921 

SHORT=TITLE CATALOG 

OF THE 

Publications and Importations 

OF 

D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY 
8 WARREN ST., N. Y. 

All Trices in thU lUt are J^E,T, 

All binding's are tn cloth unle<s.s otherti>i>se noted, 

T^rice-s subject to change tvithout notice. 



Abbott, A. V. The Electrical Transmission of Ensrgy. ........ .8vo, $6 oo 

A Treatise on Fuel iGmo, 075 

Testing Machines i6mo, o 75 

Abraham, Herbert. Asphalts and Allied Substances 8vo, 6 00 

Adam, P. Practical Bookbinding i2mo, 2 50 

Adams, H. Theory and Practice in Designing 8vo, *2 50 

Adams, H. C. Sewage of Sea Coast Towns .8vo, *2 50 

Adams, J. W. Sewers and Drains for Populous Districts Svo, 2 50 

Addyman, F. T. Practical X-Ray Work Svo, 5 00 

Adler, A. A= Theory of Engineering Drawing Svo, 2 50 

Principles of Parallel Projecting-line Drawing Svo, i 25 

Aikman, C. M. Manures and the Principles of Manuring Svo, 

{^Reprinting.) 

Aitken, W. Manual of the Telephone 8vo, *8 00 

d'Albe, E. E. F, Contemporary Chemistry i2mo, i 50 

Alexander, J. Colloid Chemistry lamo, i 00 

Allan, W. Strength of Beams Under Transverse Loads i6mo, 075 

Theory of Arches i6mo, 

Anderson, J. W. Prospector's Handbook lamo, 200 

Andes, L. Vegetable Fats and Oils „ Svo, *6 00 

Animal Fats and Oils Svo, 6 00 

Drying Oils, Boiled Oil, and Solid and Liquid Driers Svo, '''6 00 

Iron Corrosion, Anti-fouling and- Anti-corrosive Paints Svo, 600 

Oil Colors, and Printers* Ink Svo, 4 00 

Treatment of Paper for Special Purposes izmo, 300 

Andrews, E. S. Reinforced Concrete Construction i2mo, *2 00 

Theory and Design of Structures Svo, *3 50 

Further Problems in the Theory and Design of Structures. .. .Svo, *2 50 

The Strength of Materials Svo, ''4 00 

Elastic Stresses in Structures Svo, 9 oo 

Andrews, E. S., and Heyv/ood, H. B. The Calculus for Engineers. lamo, *2 00 
Annual Reports on the Progess of Chemistry, Fifteen Volumes now 

ready. Vol. I., 1904, Vol. XV., 1919 Svo, each, 3 00 

Argand, M. Imaginary Quantities i6mo, o 75 

Armstrong, R., and Idell, F. E. Chimneys for Furnaces and Steam Boilerso 

i6mo, o 75 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO/S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 3 

Arnold, E. Armature Windings of Direct-Current Dynamos 8vo, 2 00 

Asch, W., and Asch, D. The Silicates in Chemistry and Commerce. 8vo, 7 50 
Ashe, S. W., and Keiley, J. D. Electric Railways. Theoretically and 

Practically Treated. Vol. I. Rolling Stock i2mo, *2 50 

Ashe, S. W. Electric Railways. Vol. IL Engineering Preliminaries and 

Direct Current Sub-Stations i2mo, *2 50 

Electricity; Experimentally and Practically Applied i2mo, *2 00 

Ashley, R. H. Chemical Calculations lamo, 2 50 

Atkins, W. Common Battery Telephony Simplified 120^ *i 25 

Atkinson, A. A. Electrical and Magnetic Calculations ^ t^'iwHi^ *i 50 

Atkinson, J. J. Friction of Air in Mines i6mo, o 75 

Atkinson, J. J., and Williams, Jr., E. H. Gases Met with in Coal Mines. 

i6mo, o 75 

Atkinson, P. The Elements of Electric Lighting i2mo, i 50 

The Elements of Dynamic Electricity and Magnetism i2mo, 2 00 

Auchincloss, W. S. Link and Valve Motions Simplified 8vo, 200 

Audley J. A. Silica and the Silicates 8vo, 4 50 

Austin, E. Single Phase Electric Railways 4to, *5 00 

Austin and Cohn. Pocketbook of Radiotelegraphy (In Press.) 

Ayrton, H. The Electric Arc Svo, 5 50 

Baff, W. E, Sale of Inventions i2mo, 200 

Baker, A, L. Quaternions Svo, i 50 

Thick-Lens Optics i2mo, 2 co 

Baker, Benj. Pressure of Earthwork i6rao. 

Baker, G. S. Ship Form, Resistance and Screw Propulsion Svo, *4 50 

Baker, I. 0. Levelling i6mo, o 75 

Baker, M. N. Potable Water i6mo, o 75 

Sewerage and Sewage Purification i6mo, o 75 

Baker, T. T. Telegraphic Transmission of Photographs i2mo, 

(Reprinting.) 
Bale, G. R. Modern Iron Foundry Practice. i2mo. 

Vol. I. Foundry Equipment, Materials Used *3 00 

Ball, J. W. Concrete Structures in Railways Svo, *2 50 

Ball, R. S. Popular Guide to the Heavens Svo, 

Natural Sources of Power Svo, 

Ball, W. V. Law Affecting Engineers 8vo, 

Bankson, Lloyd. Slide Valve Diagrams i6mo, 

Barham, G. B. Development of the Incandescent Electric Lamp. Svo, 

Barker, A. F. Textiles and Their Manufacture Svo, 

Barker, A. F., and Midgley, E. Analysis of Woven Fabrics Svo, 

Barker, A. H. Graphic Methods of Engine Design i2mo, 

Heating and Ventilation 4to, 

Barnard, J. H. The Naval Militiaman's Guide i6mo, leather 

Barnard, Major J. G. Rotary Motion i6mo, 

Barnes, J. B. Elements of Military Sketching i6mo. 

Barnett, E. deB. Coal-Tar Dyes and Intermediates Svo, 

Explosives Svo, 

— -Synthetic Dyes Svo (In Press.) 

Anthracene anf> Anthraquinone Bvo, 

Barrowcliffe, M., and Carr, F. H. Organic Medical Chemicals. Svo, 



7 


50 


2 


50 


*3 


50 





75 


2 


50 


4 


00 


3 


50 


2 


GO 


9 


CO 


I 


00 





75 


=^0 


75 


3 


50 


5 


CO 


6 


00 


4 


00 



4 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Barrus, G. H. Engine Tests 8vo, *4 oo 

Baterden, J. R. Timber 8vo, *2 50 

Bates, E. L., and Charlesworth, F. Practical Mathematics and 

Geometry i2mo, 

Part L Preliminary Course i 00 

Part II. Elementary Course 100 

Part III. Advanced Course 1 50 

Practical Mathematics i2mo, 

Practical Geometry and Graphics lamo, 

Batey, J. The Science of Works Management i2mo, 

Steam Boilers and Combustion i2mo, 

Bayonet Training Manual i6mo, 

Beadle, C. Chapters on Papermaking. Five Volumes. .. .lamo, each, 

Beaumont, R. Color in Woven Design 8vo, 

Finishing of Textile Fabrics 8vo, 

Standard Cloths „ 8vo, 

Woollen and Worsted Svo, 

Beaumont, W. W. The Steam-Engine Indicator Svo, 

Bechhold, H. Colloids in Biology and Medicine Svo, 

Beckwith, A. Pottery 8vo, paper, 

Bedell, F. The Airplane Svo, 

Bedell, F., and Pierce, C. A. Direct and Alternating Current Manual. 

Svo, 

Beech, F. Dyeing of Cotton' Fabrics Svo, 

— — Dyeing of Woolen Fabrics Svo, 

Beggs, G. E. Stresses in Railway Girders and Bridges {In Press.) 

Begtrup, J. The Slide Valve Svo, *2 00 

Bender, C. E. Continuous Bridges i6mo, 075 

Proportions of Pins Used in Bridges i6mo, o 75 

Bengough, G. D. Brass (In Press.) 

Bennett, H. G. The Manufacture of Leather Svo, 600 

Animal Proteids . .Svo, (In Press.) 

Bernthsen, A. A Text-book of Organic Chemistry lamo, 

Bersch, J. The Manufacture of Earth Colors lamo, 

Beveridge, J. Paper maker's Pocket Book i2mo, 

Binnie, Sir A. Rainfall Reservoirs and Water Supply Svo, 

Binns, C. F. Manual of Practical Potting Svo, 

The Potter's Craft i2mo, 

Birchmore, W. H. Interpretation of Gas Analysis i2mo, 

Blake, E. H. Drainage and Sanitation Svo, 

Blaine, R. G. The Calculus and Its Applications i2mo, 

Blanchard, W. M. Laboratory Exercises in General Chemistry. .i2mo, 

Blasdale, W. C. Quantitative Chemical Analysis i2mo, 

Bloch, L. Science of Illumination Svo, 

Blyth, A. W. Foods: Their Composition and Analysis Svo, 

■ Poisons: Their Effects and Detection Svo, 

Bockmann, F. Celluloid. i2mo, 

Bodmer, G. R. Hydraulic Motors and Turbines i2mo, 

Boileau, J. T. Traverse Tables Svo, 5 00 



^2 


00 


2 


00 


*2 


00 


*2 


00 





30 


2 


50 


*6 


00 


*5 


00 


*6 


00 


10 


00 


2 


50 


5 


00 





60 


3 


00 


2 


50 


5 


CD 


*3 


50 



3 


50 


3 


00 


*4 


00 


4 


00 


6 


00 


*2 


GO 


*I 


25 


6 


00 


.-i^j 


75 


1 


00 


3 


00 


2 


50 


12 


00 


8 


50 


*2 


50 


6 


00 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Bonney, G. E. The Electro-platers' Handbook lamo, 

Boone, W. T. A Complete Course of Volumetric Analj'sis i2mo, 

Booth, N. Guide to the Ring- spinning Frame i2mo. 

Booth, W. H. Water Softening and Treatment 8vo, 

Superheaters and Superheating and Their Control 8vo, 

Bottcher, A. Cranes: Their Construction, Mechanical Equipment and 

Working 4to {^Reprinting.) 

Bottler, M. Modern Bleaching Agents lamo, 

Bottone, S. R. Magnetos for Automobilists i2mo, 

Electro-Motors, How Made and How Use i2mo, 

Boulton, S. B. Preservation of Timber i6mo, 

Bourcart, E. Insecticides, Fungicides and Weedkillers 8vo, 

Bourgougnon, A. Physical Problems i6mo, 

Bourry, E. Treatise on Ceramic Industries 8vo, 

Bowden-Smith, E, C. Efficiency of Pumps and Ejectors Bvo, 

Oil Firing for Kitchen Ranges and Steam Boilers Bvo, 

Bowie, A. J., Jr. A Practical Treatise on Hydraulic Mining 8vo, 

Bowles, 0. Tables of Common Rocks i6mo, 

Bowser, E. A. Elementary Treatise on Analytic Geometry i2mo, 

Elementary Treatise on the Differential and Integral Calculus . i2mo, 

Elementary Treatise on Analytic Mechanics i2mo, 

Elementary Treatise on Hydro-mechanics i2mo, 

— — A Treatise on Roofs and Bridges i2mo. 

Boycott, G. W. M. Compressed Air Work and Diving Svo, 

Boyd, P. P., Davis, J. M., and Rees, E. L. A Course in Analytic 

Geometry {In Press. ) 

Bradford, G. Whys and Wherefores of Navigation i2mo, 2 00 

Sea Terms and Phrases i2mo, fabrikoid {In Press.) 

Bragg, E. M. Design of Marine Engines and Auxiliaries Bvo, 4 00 

Brainard, F. R. The Sextant i6mo, 

Brassey's Naval Annual for 19 19 Bvo, 

Briggs, R., and Wolff, A. R. Steam-Heating i6mo. 

Bright, C. Telegraphy, Aeronautics and War Bvo, 

Brislee, T. J. Introduction to the Study of Fuel Bvo, 

Broadfoot, S. K. Motors: Secondary Batteries i2mo, 

Broughton, H. H. Electrical Handling, of Materials. Vol. I., Electrical 

Equipment 4to, 

Brown, G. Healthy Foundations i6mo, 

Brown, H. Irrigation Bvo, 

Brown, H. Rubber Bvo, 

W. A. Portland Cement Industry Bvo, {Reprinting.) 

Brown, Wm. N. Dipping, Burnishing, Lacquering and Bronzing 

Brass Ware lamo, 

Handbook on Japanning lamo, 

Brown, Wm. N. The Art of Enamelling on Metal lamo, 

House Decorating and Painting i2mo, 

History of Decorative Art i2mo 

Workshop Wrinkles Bvo, 



I 


50 


I 


50 


*2 


GO 


3 


50 


*i 


50 


2 


50 


*i 


00 


I 


GO 





75 


■'6 


GO 





75 


6 


00 


4 


00 


2 


50 


5 


GO 





75 


I 


75 


2 


25 


3 


00 


2 


50 


*2 


25 


"^4 


25 



Browne, C. L. Fitting and Erecting of Engines Bvo, 

Browne, R. E. Water Meters i6mo, 

Bruce, E. M. Detection of Common Food Adulterants lamo, 

Brunner, R. Manufacture of Lubricants. Shoe Polishes and Leather 

Dressings - Bvo, 3 50 



10 


00 





75 


6 


00 


3 


50 





75 


B 


GO 





75 


6 


GO 


2 


50 


*i 


50 


^'2 


00 


*2 


GO 


*2 


GO 


*0 


50 


*I 


00 


'''l 


50 





75 


I 


40 



6 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Buel, R. H. Safety Valves i6mo 

Bunkley, J. W. Military and Naval Recognition Book i6mo,' 

Burley, G. W. Lathes. Their Construction and Operation. i2mo' 

• Machine and Fitting Shop Practice. 2 vols i2mo each' 

■ Testing of Machine Tools , '. i2mo' 

Burnside, W. Bridge Foundations i2mo, 

Burstall, F. W. Energy Diagram for Gas. With Text 8vo, 

Diagram. Sold separately * 

Burt, W. A. Key to the Solar Compass i6mo, leather, 

Buskett, E. W. Fire Assaying i2mo, 

Butler, H. J_ Motor Bodies and Chassis , 8vo, 

Byers, H. G., and Knight, H. G. Notes on Qualitative Analysis. . . .8vo, 

{New Edition in Preparation.) 

Cain, W. Brief Course in the Calculus i2mo, 

Elastic Arches ■^_ lumo, 

Maximum Stresses ., lumo, 

Practical Designing Retaining of "Walls i6mo, 

— ^ — Theory of Steel-concrete Arches and of Vaulted Structures. 

i6mo, 

Theory of Voussoir Arches .^ i6mo, 

Symbolic Algebra i6mo, 

Calvert, G. T. The Manufacture of Sulphate of Ammonia and 

Crude Ammonia i2rao, 

Camm, S.j Aeroplane Construction.. i2mo, 

Carhart, H. S. Thermo Electromotive Force in Electric Cells. , ,i2mo, 

Carey, A. E., and Oliver, F. W. Tidal Lands 8vo, 

Carpenter, F. D. Geographical Surveying i6mo, 

Carpenter, R. C, and Diederichs, H. Internal Combustion Engines. Svo, 

Carpmael, H. Electric Welding and Welding Appliances ...4to, 

Carter, H. A. Ramie (Rhea), China Grass i2mo, 

Carter, H. R. Modern Flax, Hemp, and Jute Spinning , .Svo, 

Bleaching, Dyeing and Finishing of Fabrics Svo, 

Cary, E. R. Solution of Railroad Problems with the Slide Rule.iGmo, 
easier, M. D. Simplified Reinforced Concrete Mathematics. .. .i2mo, 

Cathcart, W. L. Machine Design. Part I. Fastenings Svo, 

Cathcart, W. L., and Chaffee, J. I. Elements of Graphic Statics. . .8vo, 

— — Short Course in Graphics i2mo, 

Caven, R. M. The Foundations of Chemical Theory Svo, 

Caven, R. M., and Lander, G. D. Systematic Inorganic Chemistry. lamo, 

Chalkley, A. P. Diesel Engines Svo, 

Chalmers. T. W. The Production and Treatment of Vegetable Oils, 

4to, 

Paper Making and its Machinery 4to, 

The Gyroscopic Compass Svo 

Chambers' Mathematical Tables Svo, 

Chambers, G. F. Astronomy i6mo {Reprinting.) 

Chappel, E. Five Figure Mathematical Tables Svo, 

Charnock, Mechanical Technology Svo, 

Charpentier, P. Timber Svo, 

Chatley, H. Principles and Designs of Aeroplanes i6mo, 

How to Use Water Power. i2mo, 

Gyrostatic Balancing ....,..., Cv:, 






75 


I 


DC 


2 


00 


2 


GO 


2 


00 


*2 


00 


I 


50 


*I 


00 


2 


50 

25 


^3 


00 



=^1 


75 





75 





75 





75 





75 





75 





75 


4 


00 


3 


00 


2 


00 


5 


00 


5 


50 


5 


00 


*3 


00 


""3 


50 


-■^i 


25 


I 


25 


I 


25 


*3 


00 


*3 


00 


I 


50 


4 


00 


2 


25 


5 


00 


7 


50 


S 


c- 


4 


DC 


2 


5^ 


2 


50 


3 


50 


*6 


00 





75 


*i 


50 


I 


25 



^2 


OO 


2 


50 


"3 


00 


*3 


00 





75 


3 


GO 


8 


OO 


2 


50 


3 


OO 


2 


00 


3 


50 


*4 


00 


*3 


50 


2 


00 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Child, C D. Electric Arc 8vo, 

Christian, M. Disinfection and Disinfectants i2mo, 

Christie, W. W. Boiler-waters, Scale, Corrosion, Foaming 8vo, 

■ Chimney Design and Theory 8vo, 

Furnace Draft i6mo, 

— -Water: Its Purification and Use in the Industries 8vo, 

Christopher, J. E., and BjTom, T. H. Modern Coking Practice, 2 vols., 

8vo, 

Church's Lahoratory Guide 8vo, 

Cisin, H. G. Modern Marine Engineering i2mo, f abrikoid, 

Practical Electrical Engineerirg (In Press.) 

Clapham, J, H. Woolen and Worsted Industries 8vo, 

Clapperton, G. Practical Papermaking Svo, 

Clark, A. G. Motor Car Engineering. 

Vol. I. Construction *4 00 

Vol. II. Design Svo, 

Clark, C. H. Marine Gas Engines. New Edition 

Clarke, J. W., and Scott, W. Plumbing Practice. 

Vol. I. Lead Working and Plumbers* Materials 8vo, ^^4 00 

Vol. II. Sanitary Plumbing and Fittings {In Press.) 

Vol. III. Practical Lead Working on Roofs (In Press.) 

Clarkson, R. P. Elementary Electrical Engineering i2mo, 

Clerk, D., and Idell, F. E. Theory of the Gas Engine i6mo, 

Clevenger, S. R. Treatise on the Method of Government Surveying. 

i6mo, morocco, 

Clouth, F. Rubber, Gutta-Percha, and Balata 8vo, 

Cochran, J. Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Specifications 8vo, 

■ Treatise on Cement Specifications Svo, 

Cocking, W. C. Calculations for Steel-Frame Structures lamo, 

Coffin, J. H. C. Navigation and Nautical Astronomy i2mo, 

Colburn, Z., and Thurston, R. H. Steam Boiler Explosions. .. .i6mo, 

Cole, R. S. Treatise on Photographic Optics i2mo, 

Coles-Finch, W. Water, Its Origin and Use 8vo, 

Collins, C. D. Drafting Room Methods, Standards and Forms 8vo, 

Collins, S. Hoare. Plant Products and Chemical- Fertilizers Svo, 

Chemical Fertilizers Svo, 

Collis, A. G. High and Low Tension Switch-Gear Design Svo, 

• Switchgear i2mo, 

Colver, E. D. S. High Explosives , Svo, 

Comstock, D. F., and Troland, L. T. The Nature of Electricity and 
Matter .\ .8vo, 

Coombs, H. A, Gear Teeth i6mo, 

Cooper, W. R. Primary Batteries Svo, 

Copperthwaite, W. C. Tunnel Shields 4to, 

Corfield, W. H. Dwelling Houses i6mo. 

Water and Water-Supply i6mo, 

Cornwall, H. B. Manual of Blow-pipe Analysis Svo. 

Couch, J F. Dictionary of Chemical Terms i2mo, fabrikoid, 

Cowee, G. A. Practical Safety Methods and Devices Svo, 

Cowell, W. B. Pure Air, Ozone, and Water i2mo, 

Craig, J. W., and Woodward, W. P. Questions and Answers About 

Electrical Apparatus i2mo, leather, 

Craig, T. Motion of a Solid in a Fuel i6mo, 

Wave and Vortex Motion igmo, 



2 


00 





75 


2 


50 


*6 


00 


'•'2 


50 


*i 


00 


■2 


50 


3 


00 





75 


2 


00 


3 


50 


2 


00 


3 


00 


3 


50 


"^3 


50 





50 


10 


00 


2 


50 





75 


*6 


00 


*9 


00 





75 





75 


*2 


50 


2 


50 


4 


00 


*2 


50 


I 


50 





75 





75 



8 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Crehore, A. C. Mystery of Matter and Energy 8vo, i oo 

The Atom i2mo, 2 00 

Crocker, F. B., and Arendt, M. Electric Motors 8vo, ■^ co 

Crocker, F. B., and Wheeler, S. S. The Management of Electrical Ma- 
chinery i2mo, *i 00 

Crosby, E. U., Fiske, H. A., and Forster, H. W. Handbook of Fire 

Protection i2mo, 400 

Cross, C. F., Bevan, E. J., and Sindall, R. W. Wood Pulp and Its 

Uses 8vo, 

Crosskey, L. R. Elementary Perspective 8vo, 

Crosskey, L. R., and Thaw, J. Advanced Perspective Svo, 

Culley, J. L. Theory of Arches i6mo. 

Gushing, H. C, Jr., and Harrison, N. Central Station Management. . . 

Dadourian, H. M. Analytical Mechanics lamo, 

Graphic Statics Svu* 

Danby, A. Natural Rock Asphalts and Bitumens Svo, 

Jj-arling, E. R. Inorganic Chemicai Synou^Aix^a i^mo, 

i^avenport, C. The Book 8vo 

Davey, N. The Gas Turbine ...'..'...*... .Svo,' 

Davies, F. H. Electric Power and Traction 8vo, 

Davis, A. M. Introduction to Palaeontology 8vo, 

— — Foundations,, and Machinery Fixing i6mo, 

Deerr, N. Sugar Cane Svo (^Reprinting.) 

Deite, C. Manual of Toilet Soap-Making 8vo, 

De la Coux, H. The Industrial Uses of Water Svo, 

Del Mar, W. A. Electric Power Conductors 8vo, 

Denny, G. A. Deep-level Mines of the Rand 4to, 

De Roos, J. D. C. Linkages ...i6mo, 

Derr, W. L. Block Signal Operation Oblong i2mo, 

Desaint, A. Three Hundred Shades and How to Mix Them Svo, 

De Varona, A. Sewer Gases i6mo, 

Devey, R. G. Mill and Factory Wiring i2mo, 

Dichmann, Carl. Basic Open- Hearth Steel Process lamo, 

Dieterich, K. Analysis of Resins, Balsams, and Gum Resins. .. .Svo, 

Dilworth, E. C. Steel Railway Bridges 4to, 

Dinger, Lieut. H. C. Care and Operation of Naval Machinery. .. lamo, 
Dixon, D. B. Machinist's and Steam Engineer's Practical Calculator. 

i6mo, morocco, 

Dommett, W. E. Motor Car Mechanism i2mo, 

Dorr, B. F. The Surveyor's Guide and Pocket Table-book. 

i6mo, morocco. 
Draper, C. H. Heat and the Principles of Thermo-Dynamics. .lamo, 

Draper, E. G. Navigating the Ship i2mo, 

Dubbel, H. High Power Gag Engines Svo, 

Dumbleton, J. E. Aerial Navigation i2mo, 

Dumesny, P., and Noyer, J. Wood Products, Distillates, and Extracts. 

Svo, '''5 00 
Duncan, W. G., and Penman, D. The Electrical Equipment of Collieries. 

Svo, *5 00 
Dunkley, W. G. Design of Machine Elements. Two volumes. .8vo,each, 2 00 
Dunstan, A. E., and Thole, F. B. T. Textbook of Practical Chemistry. 

i2mo, 3 00 



3 


50 


I 


50 


2 


00 





75 


'•^2 


00 


3 


75 





75 


*2 


50 


I 


00 


2 


50 


'■> 


00 


*2 


00 


3 


50 


I 


00 


7 


50 


5 


00 


*2 


00 


10 


00 





75 


*I 


50 


=■^9 


00 





75 


I 


00 


4 


00 


7 


00 


6 


GO 


*3 


00 


I 


25 


^2 


00 


2 


00 


2 


25 


2 


00 


*5 


00 


4 


00 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Durham, H. W. Saws 8 vo, 

Duthie, A. L. Decorative Glass Processes 8vo, 

Dwight, H. B. Transmission Line Formulas 8vo, 

Dyke, A. L. Dyke's Automobile and Gasoline Engine Encyclopedia, 

8vo, 
Dyson, S. S. A Manual of Chemical Plant. 12 parts. .. .4to, paper, 
Dyson, S. S., and Clarkson, S. S. Chemical V/orks 8vo, 

Eccles, W. H. Wireless Telegraphy and Telepnony i2mo, 

Eck, J. Light, Radiation and Illumination .8vo, 

Eddy, L. C. Laboratory Manual of Alternating Currents i2mo, 

Edelman, P, Inventions and Patents i2mo, 

Edgcumbe, K. Industrial Electrical Measuring Instruments Svo, 

Edler, R. Switches and Switchgear 8vo, 

Eissler, M. The Metallurgy of Gold 8vo, 

The Metallurgy of Silver 8vo, 

• The Metallurgy of Argentiferous Lt:ad Svo, 

Ekin, T. C. Water Pipe and Sewage Discharge Diagrams folio, 

Electric Light Carbons, Manufacture of 8vo, 

Eliot, C. W., and Storer, F. H. Compendious Manual of Qualitative 

Chemical Analysis i2mo, 

Eliott, A. W. M. Rectangular Areas i2mo, 

Ellis, C. Hydrogenation of Oils Svo, 

Ultraviolet Light, Its Applications in Chemical Arts i2mo, 

(In Press) 

and Meigs, J. V. Gasoline and Other Motor Fuels Svo, 

Ellis, G. Modem Technical Drawing Svo, 

■ — — I/Iodern Practical Carpentry 4to, 

Ennis, Wm. D. Linseed Oil and Other Seed Oils Svo, 

Applied Thermodynamics Svo, 

Vapors for Heat Engines i2mo, 

Ermen, W. F. A. Materials Used in Sizing Svo, 

Erwin, M. The Universe and the Atom i2mo (Reprinting.) 

Ewing, A, J. Magnetic Induction in Iron Svo, 5 00 

Faber, 0. Ferraris Dioptric Instruments Svo, 

Fage, A. Airscrews in Theory and Practice 4to, 

Fairchild, J. F. Graphical Compass Conversion Chart and Tables... 

Fairie, J. Notes on Lead Ores i2mo, 

Notes on Pottery Clays i2mo, 

Fairley, W., and Andre, Geo. J. Ventilation of Coal Mines. .. .i6mo, 

Fairweather, W. C. Foreign and Colonial Patent Laws Svo, 

Falk, K. G. Chemical Reactions: Their Supply and Mechanism. .i2mo, 

Fanning, J. T. Hydraulic and Water-supply Engineering Svo, 

Farnsworth, P. V. Shop Mathematics i2mo (In Press.) 

Fay, L W. The Coal-tar Dyes Svo, 

Fernbach, R. L. Glue and Gelatine Svo, 

Findlay, A. The Treasures of Coal Tar i2mo, 

Firth, J, B. Practical Physical Chemistry i2mo, 

Fischer, E. The Preparation of Organic Compounds i2mo, 

Fisher, H. K. C, and Darby, W. C. Submarine Cable Testing. . .Svo, 4 co 
Fleischmann, W. The Book of the Dairy Svo (Reprinting.) 



2 


50 


2 


50 


*2 


00 


6 


00 


7 


50 


*9 


00 


7 


00 


2 


50 





50 


2 


CO 


5 


00 


3 


50 


9 


00 


4 


00 


6 


25 


*3 


00 


I 


00 


I 


50 


3 


00 


7 


50 


10 


00 


-^2 


00 


7 


50 


5 


00 


5 


00 


*i 


00 


-2 


00 



3 


GO 


10 


00 





50 


*o 


50 


''2 


00 





75 


*3 


00 


2 


50 


*5 


00 


5 


00 


*3 


00 


I 


25 


I 


25 


2 


oc 



10 D. Van nostrand co.'s short title catalog 

Fleming, J. A. The Alternate-current Transformer. Two Volumes. 8vo 

Vol. I. The Induction of Electric Currents *6 50 

Vol, II. The Utilization of Induced Currents 6 50 

Propagation of Electric Currents 8vo, 3 75 

A Handbook for the Electrical Laboratory and Testing Room. Two 

Volumes 8vo, each, *6 50 

Fleury, P. Preparation and Uses of White Zinc Paints 8vo, 3 00 

Flynn, P. J. Flow of Water i2mo, o 75 

Hydraulic Tables i6mo, o 75 

Foster, H. A. Electrical Engineers' Pocket-book. (Seventh Edition.) 

i2mo, leather, 5 00 

Engineering Valuation of Public Utilities and Factories 8vo, *3 00 

Fowle, F. F. Overhead Transmission Line Crossings i2mo, *i 50 

The Solution of Alternating Current Problems. . . . .Svo (In Press.) 

Fox, W. G. Transition Curves i6mo, o 75 

Fox, W., and Thomas, C. W. Practice! Course in Mechanieal Draw- 
ing I2me5 I 25 

Foye> J- C. Chemical Problems i6mo, o 75 

' Handbook of Mineralogy i6mo, o 75 

Francis, J. B. Lowell Hydraulic Experiments 4to, 15 00 

Franzen, H. Exercises in Gas Analysis lamo, *i 00 

Eraser, E. S., and Jones, R. B. Motor Vehicles and Their Motors, 

bvo, fabrikoid, 2 00 

Frederick, R. C, and Forster, A. Public Health Chemical Analysis.. 8vo, 4 50 

Freudemacher, P. W. Electric Mining Installations lamo, i 00 

Friend, J. N. The Chemistry of Linseed Oil izmo, i 00 

Fritsch, J. Manufacture of Chemical Manures Bvo, 6 00 

Frye, A. I. Civil Engineers' Pocket-book i2mo, leather, *5 00 

Fuller, G. W. Investigations into the Purification of the Ohio River. 

4to, *io 00 
Furnell, J. Paints, Colors, Oils, and Varnishes . . , , , 8vo. 

Ganswindt, A. Dyeing Silk, Mixed Silk Fabrics and Artificial Silks, 

Bvo, 5 00 

Gant, L. W. Elements of Electric Traction 8vo, *2 50 

Garcia, A. J. R. V. Spanish-English Railway Terms Bvo, 3 00 

Gardner, H. A. Paint Researches, and Their Practical Applications, 

Bvo, *5 00 
Garforth, W. E. Rules for Recovering Coal Mines after Explosions and 

Fires i2mo, leather, i 50 

Garrard, C. C. Electric Switch and Controlling Gear Bvo, 1000 

Gaudard, J. Foundations i6mo, o 75 

Gear, H. B., and Williams, P. F. Electric Central Station Distribution 

Systems Bvo, *s 50 

Geerligs, H. C. P. Cane Sugar and Its Manufacture. Svo. (Reprinting.^ 

— ■ — Chemical Control m Cane Sugar Factories 4to, 5 00 

Geikie, J. Structural and Field Geology 8vo, 750 

Georgi, F., and Schubert, A. Sheet Metal Working Svo, 3 50 

Gerhard, W. P. Sanitation, Watersupply and Sewage Disposal of Country 

Houses i2mo, 2 50 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG n 

Gas Lighting i6mo, 

Household Wastes i6mo, 

• House Drainage i6mo, 

Sanitary Drainage of Buildings i6mo, 

Gerhardi, C. W. H. Electricity Meters 8vo, 

Gibbings, A. H. Oil Fuel Equipment for Locomotives. 8vo. 

{Reprinting.^) 

Gibbs, W. E. Lighting by Acetylene i2mo, 

Gibson, A. H. Hydraulics and Its Application 8vo, 

Water Hammer in Hydraulic Pipe Lines i2mo. {Reprinting.) 

Gibson, A. H., and Ritchie, E. G. Circular Arc Bow Girder 4to, 

Gilbreth, F. B. Motion Study , i2mo, 

Primer of Scientific Management i2mo, 

Gill, A. H. Gas Analysis for Chemists Svo, 

Gillmore, Gen. Q. A, Roads, Streets, and Pavements i2mo, 

Godfrey, E. Tables for Structural Engineers i6mo, leather, 

Golding, H. A. The Theta-Phi Diagram i2mo, 

Goodchild, W. Precious Stones Svo, 

Goodell, J. M. The Location, Construction and Maintenance of 
Roads Svo, 

Goodeve, T. M. Textbook on the Steam-engine i2mo, 

Gore, G. Electrolytic Separation of Metals Svo, 

Gornston, M. H. The Operating Engineers' Catechism. .. (/iz Press.) 

Gould, E. S. Arithmetic of the Steam-engine i2mo, 

Calculus i6mo, 

= High Masonry Dams i6mo, 

Gould, E. S. Practical Hydrostatics and Hydrostatic Formulas. .i6mo, 

Goulding, E. Cotton and Other Vegetable Fibres Svo, 

Gratacap, L. P. A Popular Guide to Minerals Svo, 

Gray, H. H. Gas-Works Products Svo {In Press.) 

Gray, J. Electrical Influence Machines i2mo, 

Marine Boiler Design Svo, 

Greenhill, G. Dynamics of Mechanical Flight Svo, 

Greenwood, H. C. The Industrial Gases Svo, 

Gregorius, R. Mineral Waxes i2mo, 

Grierson, R. Some Modern Methods of Ventilation Svo, 

Griffith, E. A. Engineering Instruments and Meters Svo, 

Griffiths, A. B. A Treatise on Manures lamo {Reprinting.) 

Gross, E. Hops Svo, 

Grossman, J. Ammonia and Its Compounds i2mo, 

Groth, L. A. Welding and Cutting Metals by Gases or Electricity. 

Svo, 

Gruner^ A. Power-loom Weaving Svo, 

Gninsky, C. E. Topographic Stadia Surveying i6mo, 

Gunther, C. 0. Integration Svo, 

Gurden, R. L. Traverse Tables folio, 

Guy, A. E. Experiments on the Flexure of Beams Svo, 

Haenig, A. Emery and Emery Industry Svo, *2 50 

Hainbach, R. Pottery Decoration i2mo, 3 50 

Hale, A. J. The Manufacture of Chemicals by Electrolysis Svo, 2 00 






75 





75 





75 





75 


*7 


20 


*i 


50 


6 


00 


*3 


50 


*2 


00 


I 


25 


I 


25 


I 


25 


*2 


50 


*2 


00 


2 


50 


2 


CO 


2 


5'^ 


4 


50 


I 


00 





75 





75 





75 


3 


00 


3 


00 


2 


00 


3 


00 


*2 


50 


5 


00 


'^ 




00 


"^3 


00 


6 


50 


^'5 


00 


I 


50 


3 


CO 


*3 


50 


2 


CO 


I 


50 


7 


50 


*i 


25 



12 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Hale, Harrison. American Chemistry i2mo, 

Hale, W. J. Calculations of General Chemistry lamo, 

Hall, C. H. Chemistry of Paints and Paint Vehicles i2mo. 

Hall, R. H. Governors and Governing Mechanism i2mo, 

Hall, W. S. Elements of the Differential and Integral Calculus. . . .8vo, 
Descriptive Geometry 8vo volume and a 4to atlas, 

Haller, G. F., and Cunningham, E. T. The Tesla Coil 12 mo, 

Halsey, F. A. Slide Valve Gears i2mo, 

The Use of the Slide Rules i6mo, 

Worm and Spiral Gearing i6mo, 

Hamlin, M. L. Action of Chemicals on Industrial Materials. .8vo, 

{In Press.) 

Hancock, H. Textbook of Mechanics and Hydrostatics, . .8vo, 

Hardy, E. Elementary Principles of Graphic Statics i2mo, 

Haring, H. Engineering Law. 

Vol. I. Law of Contract Svo, 

Harper, J. H. Hydraulic Tables on the Flow of Water i6mo, 

Harris, S. M. Practical Topographical Surveying (/« Press.) 

Harrow, B. Eminent Chemists of Our Times lamo, 

From Newton to Einstein 1 2mo, 

Harvey, A. Practical Leather Chemistry Svo, 

Haskins, C. H. The Galvanometer and Its Uses i6mo, 

Hatt, J. A. H. The Colorist square i2mo, 

Hausbrand, E. Drying by Means of Air and Steam izmo, 

Evaporating, Condensing and Cooling Apparatus Svo, 

Hausmann, E. Telegraph Engineering Svo, 

Hausner, A. Manufacture of Preserved Foods and Sweetmeats. .. .Svo, 
Hawkesworth, J. Graphical Handbook for Reinforced Concrete Design. 

4t0, 

Hay, A. Continuous Current Engineering Svo, 

Hayes, H. V. Public Utilities, Their Cost New and Depreciation. . .Svo, 

Public Utilities, Their Fair Present Value and Return Svo, *2 00 

Heath, F. H. Chemistry of Photography Svo. (/;; Press.) 

Heather, H. J, S. Electrical Engineering Svo, 4 50 

Heaviside, 0. Electromagnetic Theory. Vols. I and II.... Svo, each, 

(Reprinting.) 

Vol. Ill Svo (Reprinting.) 

Heck, R. C. H, The Steam Engine and the Turbine Svo, 4 50 

Steam-Engine and Other Steam Motors. Two Volumes. 

Vol. I. Thermodynamics and the Mechanics Svo, 

Vol. II. Form, Construction, and Working Svo, 

Notes on Elementary Kinematics __, Svo, boards, 

Graphics of Machine Forces Svo, boards, 

Heermann, P. Dyers* Materials i2mo, 

Henderson, I. F. A Dictionary of Scientific Terms Svo, 

Hering, C, and Getman, F. H. Standard Tables of Electro-Chemical 

Equivalents i2mo, 

Hering, D. W. Essentials of Physics for College Students Svo, 

Herington, C. F. Powdered Coal as Fuel Svo, 

Herrmann, G. The Graphical Statics of Mechanism i2mo, 

Herzfeld, J. Testing of Yarns and Textile Fabrics Svo. 

(New Edition in Preparation.) 
Hildenbrand, B. W. Cable-Making i6mo, o 75 



2 


00 


I 


50 


*2 


00 


*2 


50 


2 


75 


4 


00 


*I 


25 


I 


50 





75 





75 


I 


50 


*I 


50 


*4 


GO 


'•"2 


00 


2 


50 


1 


GO 


3 


75 


I 


50 


*i 


50 


2 


50 


6 


GO 


*3 


00 


3 


50 


2 


GO 


3 


75 


*2 


00 



4 


50 


5 


50 


I 


00 


I 


03 


3 


GO 


4 


50 


'2 


GO 


2 


25 


4 


50 


2 


GO 



13 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Hilditch, T. P. A Concise History of Chemistry i2mo, 

Hill, M. J. M. The Theory of Proportion 8vo, 

Hillhouse, P. A. Ship Stability and Trim 8vo, 

Hiroi, I. Plate Girder Construction i6mo, 

■ Statically-Indeterminate Stresses lamo, 

Hirshfeld, C. F. Engineering Thermodynamics i6mo, 

Hoar, A. The Submarine Torpedo Boat i2mo. 

Hobart, H. M. Heavy Electrical Engineering 8vo, 

Design of Static Transformers i2mo, 

Electricity Svo, 

Electric Trains Svo {Repriniing.) 

Electric Propulsion of Ships Svo, 

Hobart, J. F. Hard Soldering, Soft Soldering and Brazing larno, 

Hobbs, W. R. P. The Arithmetic of Electrical Measurements. .. .i2mo, 

Hoff, J. N. Paint and Varnish Facts and Formulas i2mo. 

Hole, W. The Distribution of Gas Svo, 

Holmes, A. Nomenclature of Petrology Svo, 

Hopkins, N. M. Model Engines and Small Boats i2mo, 

The Outlook for Research and Invention i2mo. 

Hopkinson, J., Shoolbred, J. N., and Day, R. E. Dynamic Electricity. 

i6mo. 

Horner, J. Practical Ironfounding Svo, 

Gear Cutting, in Theory and Practice Svo (Reprinting.) 

Houghton, C. E. The Elements of Mechanics of Materials i2mo, 

Houstoun, R. A. Studies in Light Production i2mo, 

Hovenden, F. Practical Mathematics for Young Engineers i2mo, 

Howe, G. Mathematics for the Practical Man i2mo, 

Iloworth, J. Repairing and Riveting Glass, China and Earthenware. 

Svo, paper, 

Hoyt, W. E. Chemistry by Experimentation Svo, 

Hubbard, E. The Utilization of Wood-waste Svo, 

Hiibner, J. Bleaching and Dyeing of Vegetable and Fibrous Materials. 

Svo, 
Hudson, 0. F. Iron and Steel Svo, 

Humphreys, A. C. The Business Features of Engineering Practice. Svo, 

Hunter, A. Bridge Work Svo. (fn Press.) 

Hurst, G. H. Handbook of the Theory of Color Svo, 

Dictionary of Chemicals and Raw Products Svo, 

Lubricating Oils, Fats and Greases Svo, 

Soaps 8vo, 

Hurst G. H., and Simmons, W. H. Textile Soaps and Oils Svo, 

Hurst, H. E., and Lattey, R. T. Text-book of Physics Svo, 

Also published in three parts. 

Part I. Dynamics and Heat 

Part II. Sound and Light * ] . ] i 

Part III. Magnetism and Electricity 2 

Hutchinson, R. W., Jr. Long Distance Electric Power Transmission. 

i2mo, 3 CO 

Hutchinson, R. W., Jr., and Thomas, W. A. Electricity in Mining. i2mo, 

(In Press.) 
Hyde, E. W. Skew Arches igmo. o 75 



^I 


50 


*2 


50 


5 


00 





75 


2 


50 





75 


-'2 


00 


-4 


50 


2 


50 


*2 


00 


*2 


50 


I 


25 





75 


2 


00 


7 


50 


3 


50 


I 


25 


2 


00 





vs 


*2 


00 


2 


50 


2 


00 


'"I 


50 


I 


50 


*0 


50 


"^0 


70 


4 


50 


7 


5c 


3 


00 


2 


50 


^■^3 


50 


5 


00 


'^5 


00 


*6 


00 


4 


00 


3 


GO 


I 


50 


I 


50 


2 


00 



14 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Eyde, F. S. Solvents, Oils, Gums, Waxes /.8vo, *2 oo 

Induction Coils i6mo. o 75 

Ingham, A. E. Gearing, A practical treatise 8vo, *2 50 

Ingle, H. Manual of Agricultural Chemistry 8vo, 500 

Inness, C. H. Problems in Machine Design. lamo, *3 00 

Centrifugal Pumps i2mo, *3 00 

The Fan lamo, *4 00 

Jacob, A., and Gould, E. S. On the Designing and Construction of 

Storage Reservoirs i6mo. o 75 

Jacobs, F. B. Cam Design and Manufacture 8vo, 2 00 

James, F. D. Controllers for Electric Motors 8vo. -^i 00 

Jehl, F. Manufacture of Carbons 8vo. "i 00 

Jennings, A. S. Commercial Paints and Painting 8vo. 2 5;o 

Jennison, F. H. The Manufacture of Lake Pigments 8vo, 600 

Jepson, G. Cams and the Principles of their Construction 8vo, *i 50 

Mechanical Drawing 8vo {In Preparation.) 

Jervis -Smith, F. J. Dynamometers 8vo. a 00 

Jockin, W. Arithmetic of the Gold and Silversmith 12 mo, *i 00 

Johnson, C. H., and Earle, R. P. Practical Te^ts for the Electrical 

Laboratory ,....( In Press.) 

Johnson, J. H. Arc Lamps and Accessory Apparatus limo, o 75 

Johnson, T. M. Ship Wiring and Fitting lamo {Reprinting.) 

Johnston, J. F. W., and Cameron, C. Elements of Agricultural Chemistry 

and Geology i2mo, 

Joly, J Radioactivity and Geology i2mo, 

Jones, C. L. Service Station Management (/;i Press.) 

Jones, H. C. Electrical Nature of Matter and Radioactivity. .. .lamo, 

Nature of Solution 8vo, 

New Era in Chemistry lamo, 

Jones, J. H, Tinplate Industry 8vo, 

Jones, M. W. Testing Raw Materials Used in Paint lamo, 

Jordan, L. C. Practical Railway Spiral i2mG, leather, 

Jiiptner, .H. F. V. Siderclogy: The Science of Iron 8vo, 

Kapp, G. Alternate Current Machinery i6mo, 

Kapper, F. Overhead Transmission Lines .4to, 

Keim, A. W. Prevention of Dampness in Buildings 8vo, 

Keller, S. S., and Knox, W, E. Analytical Geometry and Calculus. .. 
Kemble, W, T., and Underbill, C. R. The Periodic Law and the Hydrogen 

Spectrum 8vo, paper, 

Kemp, J, F. Handbook of Rocks 8vo, i 75 

Kennedy, A. B. W., and Thurston, R. H. Kinematics of Machinery, 

i6mo, o 75 
Kennedy, A-. B. W., Unwin, W. C, and Idell, F. E. Compressed Air. 

i6mo, o 75 

Kennedy, R. Flying Machines; Practice and Design i2mo, 2 50 

- — Principles of Aeroplane Construction 8vo, *2 00 



2 


60 


3 


50 


2 


25 


3 75 


"2 


00 


*3 


00 


^2 


50 


*i 


50 


-■^5 


00 





75 


■4 


00 


*2 


50 


2 


00 


*0 


50 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 15 

Kent, W. Strength of Materials i6mo, 075 

Kershaw, J. B. C. Fuel, Water and Gas Analysis 8vo, 3 50 

Electrometallurgy 8vo, 2 50 

Electro-Thermal Methods of Iron and Steel Production. .. .8vo, *3 00 

The Use of Low Grade and Waste Fuel for Power Generation. Bvo, 3 00 

Kingzett, C. T. Popular Chemical Dictionary Bvo, 400 

Kinzbrunner, C. Continuous Current Armatures Bvo, i 50 

— Testing of Alternating Current Machines 8vo, *i 00 

Kinzer, H., and Walter, K. Theory and Practice of Damask Weaving, 

Bvo, 4 oo 
Kirkaldy, A,. W., and Evans, A. D. History and Economics of 

Transport 8vo, '3 00 

Kirkbride, J. Engraving for Illustration Bvo, *i 00 

Kirschke, A. Gas and Oil Engines lamo, *i 50 

Klein, J. F. Design of a High-speed Steam-engine 8vo, *5 00 

Physical Significance of Entropy 8vo, *i 50 

Klingenberg, G. Large Electric Power Stations 4t©; 9 00 

Knight, R.-Adm. A, M. Modern Seamanship 8vo, *6 50 

Pocket Edition i2mo, fabrikoid, 3 00 

Knott, C. G., and Mackay, J. S. Practical Mathematics Bvo, 2 50 

Knox, J. Physico-Chemical Calculations i2mo, i 50 

Fixation of Atmospheric Nitrogen i2mo, i 00 

Koester, F. Steam-Electric Power Plants 4to, *5 00 

Hydroelectric Developments and Engineering 4to, 6 00 

Koller, T. The Utilization of Waste Products 8vo, '''500 

Cosmetics Bvo, 3 50 

Koppe, S. W. Glycerine i2mo, '''3 50 

Kozmin, P. A. Flour Milling Bvo, 8 50 

Krauch, C. Chemical Reagents Bvo, 7 00 

Kremann, R. Application of the Physico-Chemical Theory to Tech- 
nical Process and Manufacturing Methods Bvo, 3 00 

Kretchmar, K. Yarn and Warp Sizing , Bvo, *5 00 

Laffargue, A. Attack in Trench Warfare i6mo, o 50 

Lallier, E. V. Elementary Manual of the Steam Engine i2mo, '^'2 00 

Lambert, T. Lead and Its Compounds Bvo, *3 50 

Bone Products and Manures Bvo, ■''3 50 

Lamborn, L. L. Cottonseed Products Bvo, 4 00 

Modern Soaps, Candles, and Glycerin Bvo, 1000 

Lamprecht, R. Recovery Work After Pit Fires Bvo, 5 00 

Lanchester, F. W. Aerial Flight. Two Volumes. Bvo. 

VoL I. Aerodynamics *6 00 

Vol. II. Aerodonetics *6 00 

Lanchester, F. W. The Flying Machine Bvo, *3 00 

■ Industrial Engineering: Present and Post-War Outlook. .. i2mo, i 00 

Lane, F. V. Motor Truck Transportation (/// Press.) 

Lange, K. R. By-Products of Coal-Gas Manufacture i2mo, 2 50 

La Rue, E. F. Swing Bridge? i6mo, o 75 

Lassar-Cohn, Dr. Modern Scientific Chemistry i2mo, 225 

Latimer, L. H., Field, C. J., and Howell, J. W. Incandescent Electric 

Lighting i6mo, o 75 

Latta, M. N. Handbook of American Gas-Engineering Practice. .Bvo, 5 00 
American Producer Gas Practice 4to, *6 00 



l6 i). VAN NOSTRAND (^O.'S SHORT ^ITLE CATALOG 

Laws, B. C. Stability and Equilibrium of Floating Bodies 8vo, 4 50 

Lawson, W. R. British Railways. A Financial and Commercial 

Survey 8vo, 200 

Lecky, S. T. S. "Wrinkles" in Practical Navigation 8vo, 10 co 

Pocket Edition i2mo, 5 00 

Danger Angle i6mo, 2 ^:^ 

Le Doux, M. Ice-Making Machines i6mo, 75 

Leeds, C. C. Mechanical Drawing for Trade Schools oblong 4to, 2 25 

Mechanical Drawing for High and Vocational Schools 4to, i 50 

Principles of Engineering Drawing 8vo, 2 50 

Lefevre, L. Architectural Pottery 4to, 7 oc 

Lehner, S. Ink Manufacture. Svo, 2 50 

Lemstrom, S. Electricity in Agriculture and Horticulture Svo, *i 50 

Letts. E. A. Fundamental Problems in Chemistry Svo, *2 00 

Le Van, W. B. Steam-Engine Indicator i6mo, 075 

Lewes, V. B. Liquid and Gaseous Fuels Svo, 3 oc 

Carbonization of Coal Svo, *5 00 

Lewis, L. P. Railway Signal Engineering (Mechanical) Svo, 5 00 

Lev/is Automatic Machine Rifle ; Operation of i6mo, *o 60 

Licks, H. E. Recreations in Mathematics : lamo, i 50 

Lieber, B. F. Lieber's Five Letter American Telegraphic Code .Svo, ^15 00 

— Spanish Edition Svo, *i5 00 

French Edition Svo, *i5 00 

Terminal Index Svo, *2 50 

Lieber's Appendix folio, *i5 00 

Handy Tables 4to, *2 50 

Bankers and Stockbrokers' Code and Merchants and Shippers' 

Blank Tables Svo, *i5 00 

100,000,000 Combination Code Svo, *io 00 

Livermore, V. P., and Williams, J. How to Become a Competent Motor- 
man = i2mo, *i 00 

Livingstone, R. Design and Construction of Commutators Svo, 450 

Mechanical Design and Construction of Generators Svo, 4 50 

Lloyd, S. L. Fertilizer Materials i2mo, 2 00 

Lockwood, T. D. Electricity. Magnetism, and Electro-telegraph . . . Svo, 2 50 

- — Electrical Measurement and the Galvanometer i2mo, o 75 

Lodge, O. J. Elementary Mechanics i2mo, i 50 

Loewenstein, L. C, and Crissey, C. P. Centrifugal Pumps 5 00 

Lomax, J. W. Cotton Spinning i2mo, i 50 

Lord, R. T. Decorative and Fancy Fabrics Svo, *3 50 

Loring, A. E. A Handbook of the Electromagnetic Telegraph. .. i6mo, o 75 

Lowy, A. Organic Type Formulas o 10 

Organic Type Reactions o 15 

and Downey, T. B. Study Questions in Organic Chemistry. 

(In Press.) 

Lubschez, B. J. Perspective i2mo, 2 00 

Story of the Motion Picture i2mo, i 00 

Lucke, C. E. Gas Engine Design Svo, *3 00 

Power Plants: Design, Efficiency, and Power Costs. 2 vols. 

(In Preparation.) 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 17 

Luckiesh, M. Color and Its Application 8vo, 4 50 

Light and Shade and Their Applications 8vo, 3 00 

Visual Illusions (In Preparation.) 

Lunge, G. Coal-tar and Ammonia. Three Volumes 8vo, ^25 00 

Technical Gas Analysis 8vo, *4 50 

Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid and Alkali. Four Volumes. . . .8vo, 

Vol. I. Sulphuric Acid. In three parts {Reprinting.) 

Vol. I. Supplement 8vo (Reprinting.) 

Vol. II. Salt Cake, Hydrochloric Acid and Leblanc Soda. In two 

parts (In Press.) 

Vol. III. Ammonia Soda (In Press.) 

Vol. IV. Electrolytic Methods (In Press.) 

Technical Chemists' Handbook lamo, leather, *4 00 

Technical Methods of Chemical Analysis. 

Vol. I. In two parts Svo (New Edition in Press.) 

Vol. II. In two parts Svo (New Edition in Press.) 

Vol. III. In two parts Svo (New Edition in Press.) 

The set (3 vols.) complete 

Luquer, L. M. Minerals in Rock Sections Svo, 1 75 

MacBride, J. D. A Handbook of Practical Shipbuilding, 

i2mo, fabrikoid, 3 00 

Mackenzie, N. F. Notes on Irrigation Works Svo, *2 50 

Mackie, J. How to Make a Woolen Mill Pay Svo, ='2 00 

Maguire, Wm. R. Domestic Sanitary Drainage and Plumbing .... Svo, 4 00 

Malcolm, H. W. Submarine Telegraph Cable g 00 

Malinovzsky, A. Ceramics i2mo, 3 00 

Mallet, A. Compound Engines i6mo, 

Mansfield, A. N. Electro-magnets i6mo, o 75 

Marks, E. C. R. Construction of Cranes and Lifting Machinery. i2mo, '2 75 

Manufacture of Iron and Steel Tubes i2mo, 2 50 

Mechanical Engineering Materials i2mo, '■'! 50 

Marks, G. C. Hydraulic Power Engineering Svo, 4 50 

Marsh, C. F. Concise Treatise on Reinforced Concrete Svo, *2 50 

Reinforced Concrete Compression Member Diagram. Mounted on 

Cloth Soards *i . 50 

Marsh, C. F., and Dunn, W. Mainual of Reinforced Concrete and Con- 
crete Block Construction i6mo, 

Marshall, W. T., and Sankey, H. R. Gas Engines Svo, 

Martin, G. Triumphs and Wonders of Modern Chemistry Svo, 

■ Modern Chemistry and Its Wonders Svo, 

Martin, N. Properties and Design of Reinforced Concrete Svo, 

Martir, W. D. Hints to Engineers i2mo, 

Massie, W. W., and Underbill, C. R. Wireless Telegraphy and Telephony. 

i2mo, 
Mathot, R. E. Internal Combustion Engines Svo, 

Maurice, W. Electric Blasting Apparatus and Explosives Svo, 

Shot Firer's Guide Svo, 

Maxwell, F. Sulphitation in White Sugar Manufacture i2mo, 

Maxwell, J. C. Matter and Motion i6mo, 



2 


00 


2 


00 


*3 


00 


^'3 


GO 


I 


50 


2 


00 


*i 


00 


5 


00 


*3 


50 


*i 


50 


4 


00 





75 



2 


00 


3 


oc 


3 


50 


5 


00 


*2 

*4 


50 

50 


*6 


00 


*3 


50 



[8 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Maxwell, W. H., and Brown, J. T. Encyclopedia of Municipal and Sani- 
tary Engineering 4t©, *io 00 

Mayer, A. M. Lecture Notes on Physics 8vo, 2 00 

McCracken, E. M., and Sampson, C. H. Course in Pattern Making. 

4to, 
McCulIough, E. Practical Surveying lamo, 

McCullough, R. S. Mechanical Theory of Heat 8vo, 

McGibbon, W. C. Indicator Diagrams for Marine Engineers 8vo, 

Marine Engineers' Drawing Book oblong 4to, 

McGibbon, W. C. Marine Engineers Pocketbook i2mo, 

Mcintosh, J. G. Technology of Sugar 8vo, 

— — - Industrial Alcohol 8vo, 

Manufacture of Varnishes and Kinc'red Irdustric s 1 hree Volumes. 

8vo. 

Vol. I. Oil Crushing, Refining and Boiling 700 

Vol. II. Varnish Materials and Oil Varnish Making 5 00 

Vol. III. Spirit Varnishes and Materials 

McKillop, M., and McKillop, A. D. Efficiency Methods lamo, 

McKnight, J. D., and Brown, A. W. Marine Multitubular Boilers.... 

McMaster, J. B. Bridge and Tunnel Centres i6mo, 

McMechen, F. L. Tests for Ores, Minerals and Metals i2mo, 

McNair, F. V. Handbook for Naval Officers i2mo, 

Meade, A. Modern Gas Works Practice 8vo, 

Melick, C. W. Dairy Laboratory Guide i2mo, 

"Mentor." Self -Instruction for Students in Gas Supply. i2mo. 

Elementary 

Advanced 

Self-Instruction for Students in Gas Engineering. i2mo. 

Elementary 

Advanced 

Merivale, J. H. Notes and Formulae for Mining Students i2mo, 

Merritt, Wm. H. Field Testing for Gold and Silver. ...i6mo, leather, 

Mertens. Tactics and Technique of River Crossings 8vo, 

Mierzinski, S. Waterproofing of Fabrics 8vo, 

Miessner, B. F. Radio Dynamics i2mo, 

Miller, G. A, Determinants i6mo, 

.Miller, W. J. Introduction to Historical Geology i2mo, 

Mills, C. N. Elementary Mechanics for Engineers 8vo, 

Mills, John. Within the Atom i2mo {In Press.) 

Milroy, M. E. W. Home Lace-making i2mo, 

Chrrch Lace i2mo, 

Mitchell, C. A. Mineral and Aerated Waters 8vo, 

Mitchell, C. A., and Prideaux, R. M. Fibres Used in Textile and Allied 

Industries 8vo, 3 50 

Mitchell, C. F., and G. A. Building Construction and Drawing. i2mo. 

Elem.entary Course 

Advanced Course 

Monckton, C. C. F. Radiotelegraphy , 8vo, 

Monteve-^de. R. D. Vest Pocket Glossary of English-Spanish, Spanish- 
English Technical Terms 64mo, leather, 

Montgomery, J. H. Electric Wiring Specifications i6mo, 

Moore, E. C. S. New Tables for the Complete Solution of Ganguillet and 

Kutter's Formul ^ 8 vo, 

Moore, Harold. Liquid Fuel for Internal Combustion Engines. . .8vo, 



6 


00 


I 


50 


*2 


50 





75 


I 


50 


4 


00 


*8 


50 


*i 


25 


2 


50 


2 


50 


2 


00 


2 


00 


1 


GO 


2 


00 


3 


00 


2 


50 


*2 


00 


2 


50 


1 


25 


*I 


00 


2 


50 


*3 


00 



2 


50 


4 


50 


2 


CO 


I 


50 


I 


00 


*6 


00 


5 


00 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 



19 



Morecroft, J. H., and Hehre, F. W. Short Course in Electrical Testing. 

8vo, 2 00 

Morgan, A. P. Wireless Telegraph Construction for Amateurs. . i2mo, i 50 
Morrell, R. S., and Waele, A. E. Rubber, Resins, Paints and Var- 
nishes 8 vo, 

Moses, A. J. The Characters of Crystals 8vo, 

and Parsons, C. L. Elements of Mineralogy 8vo, 

Moss, S. A. Elements of Gas Engine Design i6mo, 

The Lay-out of Corliss Valve Gears i6mo, 

Mulford, A. C. Boundaries and Landmarks lamo, 

Munby, A. E. Chemistry and Physics of Building Materials. .. .8vo, 

Murphy, J. G. Practical Mining i6mo, 

Murray, B. M. Chemical Rviagents 8vo. 

Murray, J. A. Soils and Manures 8vo, 

Nasmith, J. The Student's Cotton Spinning 8vo, 

Recent Cotton Mill Construction lamo, 

Neave, G. B., and Heilbron, I. M. Identification of Organic Compounds. 

i2mo, 

Neilson, R. M. Aeroplane Patents 8vo, 

Nerz, F. Searchlights 8vo (Reprinting. ) 

TTewbigin, M. I,, and Flett, J. S. James Geikie, the Man and the 

Geologist 8vo, 

Newbiging, T. Handbook for Gas Engineers and Managers 8vo, 

Newell, F. H., and Drayer, C. E. Engineering as a Career. .i2mo, cloth, 

Nicol, G. Ship Construction and Calculations 8vo, 

Nipher, F. E. Theory of Magnetic Measurements i2mo, 

Nisbet, H, Grammar of Textile Design 8vo, 

Nolan, H. The Telescope i6mo, 

Norie, J. W. Epitome of Navigation (2 Vols.) octavo, 

A Complete Set of Nautical Tables with Explanations of Their 

Use octavo, 6 50 

North, H. B. Laboratory Experiments in General Chemistry i2mo, *i 00 

O'Connor, H. The Gas Engineer's Pocketbook i2mo, leather, 5 00 

Ohm, G. S., and Lockwood, T. D. Galvanic Circuit i6mo, o 75 

Olsen, J. C. Text-book of Quantitative Chemical Analysis 8vo, 4 oj 

Ormsby, M. T. M. Surveying i2mo, 2 00 

Oudin, M. A. Standard Polyphase Apparatus and Systems 8vo, *3 00 

Pakes, W. C. C, and Nankivell, A. T. The Science of Hygiene . .Svo, *i 75 

Palaz, A. Industrial Photometry Svo, 5 00 

Palmer, A. R. Electrical Experiments i2mo, o 75 

Magnetic Measurements and Experiments i2mo, o 75 

Pamely, C. Colliery Manager's Handbook Svo, *io (o 

Parker, P. A. M. The Cr^.t'-ol ci Water Svo, 600 

Parr, G. D. A. Electrical Enpineerinq; Measuing Instruments. .. .Svo, *3 50 
Parry, E. J Chemistry of Es?ential Oils and Artificial Perfumes. 

Vol. I. Monographs on Essential Oils 9 00 

Vol. II. Constituen^s of "f^'^sential Oils, Analysis 7 00 

Foods and Drugs. Two Volumes. 

Vol. I. The Analysis of Food and Drugs Svo, g 50 

Vol.11. The Sale of Food and Drugs Acts Svo, 3 50 

■ — —and Coste, J. H. Chemistry of Pigments Svo, *5 00 



4 


00 


*2 


00 


4 


50 





75 





75 


I 


00 


2 


50 


I 


00 


3 


00 


2 


00 


5 


00 


.3 


00 


I 


50 


*2 


00 


3 


50 


7 


50 


^'i 


00 


7 


50 


I 


00 


7 


50 





75 


15 


00 



2c D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Parry, L. Notes on Alloys 8vo, 

Metalliferous Wastes 8vo, 

Analysis of Ashes and Alloys 8vo, 

Parry, L. A. Risk and Dangers of Various Occupations Svo, 

Parshall, H. F., and Hobart, H. M. Electric Railway Engineering. 4to, 

Parsons, J. L. Land Drainage Svo, 

Parsons, S. J. Malleable Cast Iron Svo, 

Partington, J. R. Higher Mathematics for Chemical Students. . i2mo, 

Textbook of Thermodynamics Svo, 

The Alkali Industry Svo, 

Patchell, W. H. Electric Power in Mines Svo, 

Paterson, G. W. L. Wiring Calculations i2mo, 

Electric Mine Signalling Installations lamo, 

Patterson, D. The Color Printing of Carpet Yarns. Svo, 

Color Matching on Textiles Svo, 

Textile Color Mixing. Svo, 

Paulding, C. P. Condensation of Steam in Covered and Bare Pipes. .8vo, 

Transmission of Heat through Cold-storage Insulation. ..... i2mo, 

Payne, D. W. Iron Founders' Manual Svo, 

Peddle, R. A. Engineering and Metallurgical Books i2mo, 

Peirce, B. System of Analytic Mechanics 4to, 

— — Linear Associative Algebra 4to, 

Perkin, F. M., and Jaggers, E. M. Elementary Chemistry. ...lamo, 

Perrin, J. Atoms , Svo, 

Petit, G. White Lead and Zinc White Paints., c Svo, 

Petit, R. How to Build an Aeroplane , Svo, 

Pettit, Lieut. J. S. Graphic Processes i6mo, 

Philbrick, P. H. Beams and Girders i6mo, 

Phin, J. Seven Follies of Science i2mo, 

Pickworth, C. N. Logarithms for Beginners i2mo, boards, 

The Slide Rule lamo, 

Pilcher, R. B. The Profession of Chemistry lamo, 

Pilcher, R. B., and Butler-Jones, F. What Industry Owes to Chemical 
Science lamo, 

Plattner's Manual of Blow-pipe Analysis. Eighth Edition, revised . Svo, 

Plympton, G, W. The Aneroid Barometer i6mo, 

How to Become an Engineer i6mo, 

Van Nostrand's Table Book i6mo, 

Pochet, M. L. Steam Injectors i6mo, 

Pocket Logarithms to Four Places i6mo, 

iGmiD, leather, 

Polleyn, F. Dressings and Finishings for Textile Fabrics Svo, 

PoUock, W. Hot Bulb Oil Engines and Suitable Vessels Svo, 

Pope, F. G. Organic Chemistry i2mo, 

Pope, F. L. Modern Practice of the Electric Telegraph Svo, 

Popplewell, W. C. Prevention cf Smoke Svo, 

Strength of Materials Svo, 

Porritt, B. D. The Chemistry of Rubber i2mo, 

Porter, J. R. Helicopter Flying Machine i2mo. i 

Potts, H. E. Chemistry of the Rubber Industry Svo, 

Practical Compounding of Oils, Tallows and Grease Svo, 

Pratt, A. E. Economic Metallurgy (In Press.) 

Pratt, Jas. Elementary Machine Shop Practice .Svo, 

Pratt, K. Boiler Draught i2mo, 



"3 


50 


*2 


5Q 


^^2 


50 


^'3 


50 


7 


50 


*i 


50 


3 


50 


2 


50 


*4 


00 


3 


00 


*4 


GO 


*2 


50 


*I 


50 


^3 


50 


*3 


50 


*3 


50 


*2 


00 


*I 


00 


4 


50 


*i 


50 


10 


GO 


2 


50 


I 


00 


*2 


50 


^2 


00 


I 


50 





75 


". 


50 


I 


00 


I 


50 


2 


00 


I 


50 


4 


00 


o 


75 


o 


75 


o 


75 





75 





75 


I 


00 


* -> 


50 


10 


00 


3 


00 


I 


50 


*3 


50 


■^2 


50 


I 


00 


I 


50 


2 


50 


*3 


50 


2 


50 


*I 


25 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 21 

Prelini, C. Earth and Rock Excavation 8vo, *3 00 

Graphical Determination of Earth Slopes 8vo, *2 00 

Tunneling. New Edition 8vo, *3 00 

Dredging. A Practical Treatise Bvo, *3 00 

PrescotL, A. B., and Johnson, 0. C. Qualitative Chemical Analysis. .8vo, 4 00 

Prescott, A. B., and Sullivan, E. C. First Book in Qualitative Chemistry. i 50 

Prideaux, E, B. R. Problems in Physical Chemistry 8vo, 4 50 

The Theory and Use of Indicators 8vo, 5 00 

Prince, G. T. Flov7 of Water i2mo, *2 00 

Pull, E. Modern Steam Boilers Bvo, 5 00 

PuUen, W. W. F. Application of Graphic Methods to the Design of 

Structures i2mo, 3 00 

Injectors: Theory, Construction and Working i2mo, *2 00 

Indicator Diagrams Bvo, 3 00 

Engine Testing , . . . . Bvo, *5 50 

Purday, H. F. P. The Diesel Engine Design Bvo, 7 50 

Rafter, G. W. Mechanics of Ventilation i6mo, o 75 

Potable Water ■ i6mo, o 75 

Treatment of Septic Sew^age i6mo, 075 

and Baker, M. N. Sewage Disposal in the United States. .. .4to, 6 00 

Raikes, H. P. Sewage Disposal Works Bvo, *4 00 

Randau, P. Enamels and Enamelling Bvo, '''500 

Rankine, W. J. M. A Manual of Applied Mechanics 8vo, 6 00 

Civil Engineering Bvo. 7 50 

Machinery and Millwork. Bvo, 6 00 

The Steam-engine and Other Prime Movers Bvo, 6 00 

Raphael, F. C. Localization of Faults in Electric Light and Power Mains. 

Bvo, 5 CO 

Rasch, E. Electric Arc Phenomena Bvo, 200 

Rathbone, R. L. B. Simple Jewellery Bvo, 2 50 

Rausenberger, F. The Theory of the Recoil Guns Bvo, *5 00 

Rautenstrauch, W. Notes on the Elements of Machine Design. 8vo, boards, *i 50 
Rautenstrauch, W., and Williams, J. T. Machine Drafting and Empirical 
Design. 

Part I. Machine Drafting Bvo, i 50 

Part II. Empirical Design {In Preparation.) 

Raymond, E. B. Alternating Current Engineering i2mo, *2 50 

Rayner, H. Silk Throwing and Waste Silk Spinning Bvo, 5 00 

Recipes for the Color, Paint, Varnish, Oil, Soap and Drysaltery Trades, 

Svo, "^'s CO 

Recipes for Flint Glass Making i2mo, *5 00 

Redfern, J. B., and Savin, J. Bells, Telephones i6mo, o 75 

Redgrove, H. S. Experimental Mensuration i2mo, i 50 

Reed, E. G. The Transformers (In Press.) 

Reed, S. Turbines Applied to Marine Propulsion *5 00 

Reed's Engineers* Handbook Bvo, 9 00 

Key to the Nineteenth Edition of Reed's Engineers' Handbook. Bvo, 3 50 

Useful Hints to Sea-going Engineers i2mo, 2 50 

Reeve, F. C. Elementary Qualitative Analysis of the Metals and Acid 

Radicals i2mo, i 50 

Reid, E. E. Introduction to Research in Organic Chemistry. (In Press.) 



22 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Reinhardt, C. W, Lettering for Draftsmen, Engineers, and Students. 

oblong 4to, boards, i 25 
Reinhardt, C. W. The Technic of Mechanical Drafting, 

oblong, 4to, boards. 

Reiser, F. Hardening and Tempering of Steel i2mo. 

Reiser, N. Faults in the Manufacture of Woolen Goods 8vo, 

Spinning and Weaving Calculations 8 vj, 

Renwick, W. G. Marble and Marble Working Svo, 

Reuleaux, F. The Constructor 4to, 

Rey, Jean. The Range of Electric Searchlight Projectors... Svo, 

Reynolds, 0., and Idell, F. E. Triple Expansion Engines i6mo, 

Rhead, G. F. Simple Structural Woodwork i2mo, 

Rhead, G. W. British Pottery Marks Svo, 

Rhodes, H. J. Art of Lithography Sv"), 

Rice, J. M and Johnson, W. W. A New Method of Obtaining the Differ- 
ential of Functions i2mo, 

Richards, E. G. Experience Grading and Rating Schedule Svo 

Richards, W. A. Forging of Iron and Steel i2mo. 

Richards, W. A., and North, H. B. Manual of Cement Testing. . . . i2mo, 

Richardson, J. The Modern Steam Engine Svo, 

Richardson, S. S. Magnetism and Electricity i2mo, 

Rideal, E. K. Industrial Electrometallurgy Svo, 

The Rare Earths and Metals Svo (In Press.) 

Ozone Svo, 

Rideal, S. Glue and Glue Testing Svo, 

The Carbohydrates Svo, 

Riesenberg, F. The Men on Deck i2mo, 

Standard Seamanship for the Merchant Marine. i2mo (In Press.) 

Rimmer, E. J. Boiler Explosions, Collapses and Mishaps Svo, 

Rings, F. Reinforced Concrete in Theory and Practice i2mo. 

Ripper, W. Course of Instruction in Machine Drawing folio, 

Roberts, F. C. Figure of the Earth i6mo, 

Roberts, J., Jr. Laboratory Work in Electrical Engineering Svo, 

Robertson, J. B. The Chemistry of Coal i2mo, 

Robertson, L. S. Water-tube Boilers Svo, 

Robinson, J. B. Architectural Composition Svo, 

Robinson, S. W. Practical Treatise on the Teeth of Wheels. .i6mo, 

Railroad Economics i6mo, 

Wrought Iron Bridge Members i6mo, 

Robson, J. H. Machine Drawing and Sketching Svo, 

Roebling, J. A. Long and Short Span Railway Bridges folio. 

Rogers, A. A Laboratory Guide of Industrial Chemistry Svo, 

• Elements of Industrial Chemistry i2mo, 

Manual of Industrial Chemistry Svo, 

Rogers, F. Magnetism of Iron Vessels i6mo, 

Rohland, P. Colloidal and Crystalloidal State of Matter i2mo, 

(Reprintino.) 

Rollinson, C. Alphabets Oblong, i2mo. 

Rose, J. The Pattern-makers* Assistant Svo, 

— — Key to Engines and Engine-running i2mo. 

Rose, T. K. The Precious Metals Svo, 



-I 


00 


2 


50 


2 


50 


"5 


GO 


6 


50 


4 


00 


4 


50 





75 


*i 


25 


3 


50 


5 


GO 





50 


4 


00 


2 


25 


*I 


50 


*3 


.so 


^2 


00 


3 


00 


4 


00 


*5 


CO 


4 


0« 


3 


00 


2 


25 


*4 


50 


*6 


00 





75 


*2 


00 


I 


25 


2 


00 


3 


50 





75 





75 





75 


*2 


00 


25 


00 


2 


CO 


*3 


GO 


7 


50 





75 


I 


25 


2 


50 


2 


50 


2 


50 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 23 

Rosenhain, W. Glass Manufacture .8vo, 

Physical Metallurgy, An Introduction to 8vo, 

Roth, W. A. Physical Chemistry 8vo, 

Rowan, F. J., and Idell, F. E. Boiler Incrustation and Corrosion. i6mo, 

Roxburgh, W. General Foundry Practice Svo, 

Ruhmer, E. Wireless Telephony Svo, 

Russell, A. Theory of Electric Cables and Network Svo, 

Rust, A. Practical Tables for Navigators and Aviators Svo, 

Rutley, F. Elements of Mineralogy i2mo, 

Sandeman, E. A. Notes on the Manufacture of Earthenware. .. izmo, 

Sanford, P. G. Nitro-explosives , Svo, 

Saunders, C. H. Handbook of Practical Mechanics i6mo, 

leather, 

Sayers, H. M. Brakes for Tram Cars Svo, 

Schaefer, C. T. Motor Truck Design Svo, 

Scheithauer, W. Shale Oils and Tars Svo, 

Scherer, R. Casein Svo, 

Schidrowitz, P. Rubber, Its Production and Industrial Uses 8vc, 

Schindler, K. Iron and Steel Construction Works icimo, 

Schmall, C. N. First Course in Analytic Geometry, Plane and Solid. 

i2mo, 

and Shack, S. M. Elements of Plane Geometry i2mo, 

Schmeer, L. Flow of Water Svo, 

Schwarz, E. H. L. Causal Geology Svo, 

Schweizer, V. Distillations of Resins Svo, 

Scott, A. H. Reinforced Concrete in Practice i2mo, 

Scott, W. W. Qualitative Analysis. A Laboratory Manual. New 

Edition 

Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis Svo, 

Scribner, J. M. Engineers' and Mechanics' Companion. . i6mo, leather, 
Scudder, H. Electrical Conductivity and Ionization Constants of 

Organic Compounds Svo, 

Seamanship, Lectures on x^mo, 

Searle, A. B. Modern Brickmaking Svo, 

Cement, Concrete and Bricks Svo, 

Searle, G. M. "Sumners" Method." Condensed and Improved. 

i6mo, 

Seaton, A. E. Manual of Marine Engineering Svo, 

Seaton, A. E,, and Rounthwaite, H. M. Pocket-book of Marine Engi- 
neering i6mo, leather, 

Seeligmann, T., Torrilhon, G. L., and Falconnet, H. India Rubber and 

Gutta Percha Svo, 

Seidell, A. Solubilities of Inorganic and Organic Substances. .. .Svo, 

Sellew, W. H. Steel Rails 4to, 

Railway Maintenance Engineering i2mo, 

Senter, G. Outlines of Physical Chemistry i2mo, 

Text-book of Inorganic Chemistry i2mo. 

Sever, G. F. Electric Engineering Experiments Svo, board<=:. 

Sever, G. F., and Townsend, F. Laboratory and Factory Tests in Elec- 
trical Engineering Svo, 

Sewall, C. H. Wireless Telegraphy Svo, 

Lessons in Telegraphy i2mo. 

Sexton, A. H. Chemistry of the Materials of Engineering i2mo, 

Alloys (Non-Ferrous) Svo, 



4 


00 


4 


00 


2 


00 





75 


2 


50 


4 


50 


5 


00 


3 


50 


2 


5^- 


3 


50 


"4 


GO 


I 


50 


2 


00 


'i 


25 


2 


50 


'4 


00 


3 


50 


'6 


00 


••;> 


GO 


2 


00 


I 


25 


I 


50 


'3 


00 


b 


00 


2 


CO 


3 


GO 


7 


50 


I 


50 


'^3 


GO 


2 


GO 


7 


00 


3 


GG 





75 


10 


00 


6 


00 


6 


00 


7 


50 


10 


GO 


3 


00 


3 


00 


^3 


00 


*i 


00 


*2 


50 


*2 


00 


*I 


GO 


3 


00 


3 


50 



24 D- VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Sexton, A. H., and Primrose, J. S. G. The Metallurgy of Iron and Steel. 

8vo, 6 50 

The Common Metals (Non-Ferrous) 8vo, 400 

Seymour, A. Modern Printing Inks 8vo, 3 00 

Shaw, Henry S. H. Mechanical Integrators i6mo, o 75 

Shaw, J. B. Vector Calculus (In Press.) 

Shaw, T. R. Driving of Machine Tools i2mo, ^200 

Precision Grinding Machines isnio, 5 00 

Shaw, W. N. Forecasting Weather Svo (Reprinting.) 

Sheldon, S., and Hausmann, E. Dynamo Electric Machinery, A.C. 

and D.C Svo (In Press.) 

Electrsc Tr&ciion and Transmission Engineering lamo, 

Physical Laboratory Experiments, for Engineering Students. .Svo, 

Sherriff, F. F. Oil Merchants' Manual and Oil Trade Ready Reckoner, 

Svo, 
Shields, J. E. Notes on Engineering Construction lamo, 

Shreve, S. K. Strength of Bridges and Roofs Svo, 

Shunk, W. F. The Field Engineer i2mo, fabrikoid, 

Silverman, A., and Harvey, A. W. Laboratory Directions and Study 

Questions in Inorganic Chemistry 4to, loose leaf, 

Simmons, H. E. Rubber Manufacture 4to, 

Simmons, W. H. Fats, Waxes and Essential Oils. .Svo (In Press.) 
Simmons, W. H., and Appleton, H. A. Handbook of Soap Manufacture, 

8/0, 

Simmons, W. H., and Mitchell, C. A. Edible Fats and Oils Svo, 

Simpson, G. The Naval Constructor i2mo, fabrikoid, 

Simpson, W. Foundations .Svo. {In Press.) 

Sinclair, A. Development of the Locomotive Engine. . .8vo, half leather, 

Sindall, R. W. Manufacture of Paper Svo, 

Sindall, R. W., and Bacon, W. N. The Testing of Wood Pulp Svo, 

Wood and Cellulose Svo (In Press.) 

Sloane, T. O'C. Elementary Electrical Calculations i2mo, 2 50 

— — Short-Cuts in Arithmetic (In Press.) 

Smallwood, J. C. Mechanical Laboratory Methods. .. .lamo, fabrikoid, 3 00 

Smith, C. A. M. Handbook of Testing, MATERIALS ..Svo, 5 00 

Smith, C. A. M., and Warren, A. G. New Steam Tables Svo, i 00 

Smith, C. F. Practical Alternating Currents ard Testing Svo, 

Practical Testing of Dynamos and Motors Svo, 

Smith, F. E. Handbook of General Instruction for Mechanics . . . i2mo, 
Smith, G. C. Trinitrotoluenes and Mono- and Dinitrotoluenes, Their 

Manufacture and Properties i2mo, 

Smith, H. G Minerals and the Microscope i2mo, 

Smith, J. C. Manufacture of Paint Svo, 

Smith, R. H. Principles of Machine Work i2mo, 

Advanced Machine Work 1 2mo , 

Smith, W. Chemistry of Hnf Manufacturing i2mo. 

Snell, F. D. Colorimetric Analysis i2mo (In Press.'i 

Snow, W. G., and Nolan, T. Ventilation of Buildings i6mo, o 75 

Soddy, F. Radioactivity Svo (Reprinting.) 

Solomon, M. Electric Lamps Svo, 

Somerscales, A. N '^p/^ha.r\i'^<i for Marine Engineers i-'mo. 

Mechanical and Marir»e Engineering Science Svo, 



3 


00 


I 


50 


3 


50 


I 


50 


3 


50 


3 


00 


2 


00 


4 


50 


'4 


CO 


'3 


50 


'5 


00 


5 


00 


3 


GO 


2 


50 



-^3 


50 


"3 


00 


I 


50 


2 


00 


2 


CO 


='5 


00 




GO* 


*3 


50 



2 


00 


2 


50 


*5 


00 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 



25 



Sothern, J. W. The Marine Steam Turbine 8vo, 15 00 

Verbal Notes and Sketches for Marine Engineers 8vo, 15 00 

Marine Engine Indicator Cards 8vo, 4 50 

Oil Fuel Burning in Marine Practice Svo, 7 50 

Sothern, J. W., and Sothern, R. M. Simple Problems in Marine 

Engineering Design lamo, 3 00 

Souster, E. G. W. Design of Factory and Industrial Buildings. . .Svo, 4 00 

Southcombe, J. E. Chemistry of the Oil Industries Svo, 3 50 

Soxlilet, D. H. Dyeing and Staining Marble Svo, 2 50 

Spangenburg, L, Fatigue of Metals iGmo, o 75 

Specht, G. J., Hardy, A. S., McMaster, J. B., and Walling. Topographical 

Surveying i5mo, o 75 

Spencer, A. S. Design of Steel-Framed Sheds Svo, *3 50 

Spiegel, L. Chemical Constitution and Physiological Action. ... i2mo, i 25 

Sprague, E. H. Hydraulics i .^rno, 2 co 

Elements of Graphic Statics Svo, 2 co 

— — Stability of Masonry t-^mo, 2 00 

Elementary Mathematics for Engineers i2mo, 2 00 

Stability of Arches :7.mo, 2 00 

Strength of Structural Elements i2mo, 2 00 

^ Moving Loads by Influence Lines and Other Methods i2mo, 2 00 

Stahl, A. W. Transmission of Power i6mo, 

Stahl, A. W., and Woods, A. T. Elementary Mechanism i2mo, 2 25 

Standage, H. C. Leatherworkers' Manual Svo, 4 50 

Sealing Waxes, Wafers, and Other Adhesives Svo, *2 50 

Agglutinants of All Kinds for All Purposes i2mo, 3 50 

Stanley, H. Practical Applied Physics {In Press. '' 

Stansbie, J. H. Iron and Steel Svo, 2 50 

Steadman, F. M. Unit Photography i2mo, 2 50 

Stecher, G. E. Cork. Its Origin and Industrial Uses i2mo, i 00 

Steinheil, A., and Voit, E. Applied Optics.. Vols. I. and II. Svo, 

Each, 5 00 

■ Two Volumes Set, 9 00 

Steinman, D. B. Suspension Bridges and Cantilevers. (Science Series 

No. 127.) o 75 

Melan's Steel Arches and Suspension Bridges Svo, *3 op 

Stevens, A. B. Arithmetric of Pharmacy i2mo, i 50 

Stevens, E. J. Field Telephones and Telegraphs '. i 20 

Stevens, H. P. Paper Mill Chemist i6mo, 4 00 

Stevens, J. S. Theory of Measurements i2mo, *i 25 

Stevenson, J, L. Blast-Furnace Calculations i2mo, leather, 2 50 

Stewart, G. Modern Steam Traps , i2mo, *i 75 

Stiles, A. Tables for Field Engineers i2mo, i 00 

Stodola, A. Steam Turbines Svo, 7 50 

Stone, E. W. Elements of Radiotelegraphy i2mo, fabrikoid, 2 50 

Stone, H. The Timbers of Commerce Svo, 400 

Stopes, M. The Study of Plant Life Svo, 2 00 

Sudborough, J. J., and James, T. C. Practical Organic Chemistry. i2mo, 3 50 

Suf fling, E. R. Treatise on the Art of Glass Painting Svo, ^^^ 50 

Sullivan, T. V., and Underwood, N. Testing and Valuation of Build- 
ing and Engineering Materials (In Press.) 

Svenson, C. L. Handbook on Piping Svo, 4 00 

Essentials of Drafting Svo, i 75 

Mechanical and Machine Drawing and Design. ...... (/« Press.) 

Swan, K. Patents, Designs and Trade Marks Svo, 2 00 



26 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Swinburne, J., Wordingham, C. H., and Martin, T. C. Electric Currents. 

i6mo, o 75 

Swoope, C. W. Lessons in Practical Electricity i2mo, 2 50 

Tailfer, L. Bleaching Linen and Cotton Yarn and Fabrics 8vo, 7 00 

Tate,. J. S. Surcharged and Different Forms of Retaining-walls. .i6mo, o 75 

Taylor, F. N. Small Water Supplies i2mo, 3 00 

Masonry in Civil Engineering 8vo, *2 50 

Taylor H. S. Fuel Production and Utilization 8vo, 3 50 

Taylor, W. T. Calculation of Electrical Conductors 410, 200 

Electric Power Conductors and Cables 8vo (In Press.) 

■ Calculation of Electric Conductors 4to (In Press.) 

Templeton, W. Practical Mechanic's Workshop Companion. 

i2mo, morocco, 2 00 

Tenney, E. H. Test Methods for Steam Power Plants i2mo, 3 00 

Terry, H. L. India Rubber and its Manufacture Svo, 3 00 

Thayer, H. R. Structural Design. Svo. 

Vol. I. Elements of Structural Design 3 50 

Vol. II. Design of Simple Structures 450 

Vol. III. Design of Advanced Structures (In Preparation.) 

Foundations and Masonry (In Preparation.) 

Thiess, J. B., and Joy, G. A. Toll Telephone Practice Svo, *3 50 

Thorn, C, and Jones, W. H. Telegraphic Connections. .. .oblong, i2mo, i 50 

Thomas, C. W. Paper-makers' Handbook (In Press.) 

Thomas, J. B. Strength of Ships Svo, 2 50 

The Powering of Ships Svo, 10 00 

ThoMas, Robt. G. Applied Calculus i2mo, 300 

Thompson, A. B. Oil Fields of Russia 4to, 10 00 

Oil Field Developm.ent 15 00 

Thompson, S. P. Dynamo Electric Machines i6mo, o 75 

Thompson, W. P. Handbook of Patent Law of All Countries i6mo, 2 00 

Thomson, G. Modern Sanitary Engineering i2mo, *3 00 

Thomson, G. S. Milk and Cream Testing i2mo, *2 25 

Modern Sanitary Engineering, House Drainage, etc Svo, *3 00 

Thomessen, E, G. Soap-Making Industry i2mo (In Press.) 

Thornley, T. Cotton Combing Machines Svo, ^'3 50 

Cotton Waste Svo, 6 00 

Cotton Spinning. Svo. 

Elementary Cotton Spinning Svo, 5 00 

Second Year *3 50 

Third Year *2 50 

Thurso, J. W. Modern Turbine Practice Svo, *4 00 

Thurston, A. Pharmaceutical and Food Analysis (In Press.) 

Tidy, C. Meymott. Treatment of Sewage i6mo, o 75 

Tilmans, J. Water Purification and Sewage Disposal Svo, 2 50 

Tinkler, C. K., and Master?, H. Applied Chemistry Svo, 4 50 

Tinney, W. H. Gold-mining Machinery Svo, *3 00 

Titherley, A. W. Laboratory Course of Organic Chemistry Sv9, 2 50 

Tizard, H. T. Indicators (In Press.) 

Toch, M. Chemistrv and Technology of Paints Svo, 4 50 

Materials for Permanent Painting i2mo, 2 50 

Tod, J., and McGibbon, W. C. Marine Engineers' Board of Trade 

Examinations Svo, *2 00 

Todd, J., and Wh?ll. W B Pract'oal Seamanship Svo, 9 00 

Townsend, F. Alternating Current Engineering Svo, boards, *o 75 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 2; 

Townsend, J. S. Ionization of Gases by Collision 8vo, *i 25 

Transactions of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 8vo. 

Vol. XII., 1919. Two Parts Each, 5 00 

Vol. XIII. Part I, 1920 5 00 

Vol. I. to XL, 1908-1918 Svo, each, 6 00 

Traverse Tables „ i6mo, o 75 

Treiber, E. Foundry Machinery i2mo, 2 00 

Trinks, W. Governors and Governing of Prime Movers Svo, 3 50 

Trinks, W., and Housum, C. Shaft Governors* i6mo, 075 

Trivelli, A. P. H., and Sheppard, S. E. Silver Bromide Grain of 

Photographic Emulsions Svo, 2 50 

Trowbridge, W. P. Turbine Wheels i6mo, o 75 

Tucker, J. H. A Manual of Sugar Analysis Svo, 3 50 

TurnbuU, Jr., J., and Robinson, S. W. A Treatise on the Compound 

Steam-engine i6mo, o 75 

Turner, H. Worsted Spinners' Handbook lamo, *3 00 

Turrill, S. M. Elementary Course in Perspective i2mo, *i 25 

Twyford, H. B. Purchasing Svo, 4 00 

Storing, Its Economic Aspects and Proper Methods Svo, 3 50 

Underbill, C. R. Solenoids, Electromagnets and Electromagnetic Wind- 
ings 1 2mo, 3 00 

Underwood, N., and Sullivan, T, V. Chemistry and Technology of 

Printing Inks Svo, 4 00 

Urquhart, J. W. Electro-plating i2mo, 3 00 

Electrotyping i2mo, 2 00 

Usborne, P. O. G. Design of Simple Steel Bridges Svo, *4 00 

VaiT Nostrand's Chemical Annual. Fourth issue igiS.fabrikoid, i2mo, *3 00 

Van Wagenen, T. F. Manual of Hydraulic Mining i6mo, i 00 

Vega, Baron Von. Logarithmic Tables Svo, 2 50 

Vincent, C. Ammonia and its Compounds. Trans, by M. J. Salter. Svo, *2 50 

Virgin, R. Z. Coal Mine Management (/// Press.) 

Volk, C. Haulage and Winding Appliances Svo, *4 00 

Von Georgievics, G. Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres Svo, 7 00 

A Text Book of Dye Chemistry Svo, 12 00 

Vose, G. L. Graphic Method for Solving Certain Questions in Arithmetic 

and Algebra i6mo, o 75 

Vosmaer, A. Ozone . Svo, '^'2 50 

Wabner, R. Ventilation in Mines Svo, 5 00 

Wadmore, T. M. Elementary Chemical Theory i2mo, *i 5g 

Wagner, E. Preserving Fruits, Vegetables, and Meat i2mo, *2 50 

Wagner, H. E., and Edwards, H. W. Railway Engineering Estimates. 

(In Press.) 

Wagner, J. B. Seasoning of Wood Svo, 4 00 

Waldram, P. J. Principles of Structural Mechanics i2mo, 400 

Walker, F. Dynamo Building i6mo, o 75 

Walker, J. Organic Chemistry for Students of Medicine Svo, 4 00 

Walker, S. F. Refrigeration, Heating and Ventilation on Shipboard 

fabrikoid, i2mo, 2 50 

— — Electricity in Mining Svo, *4 50 

• Electric Wiring and Fitting Svo, 2 50 



28 D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 

Wallis-Tayler, A. J. Bearings and Lubrication 8vo (Reprinting.) 

Aerial or Wire Ropeways 8vo, 

Preservation of Wood 8vo' 

Refrigeration, Cold Storage and Ice Making Svo,' 

Sugar Machinery izmo, 

Walsh, J. J. Chemistry and Physics of Mining and Mine Ventilation, 

i2mo, 

Wanklyn, J. A. Water Analysis i2mo 

Wansbrough, W. D. The A B C of the Differential Calculus. .. .lamo,' 
Slide Valves i2mo 

Waring, Jr., G. E. Sanitary Conditions i6mo, 

Sewerage and Land Drainage ^ 6 

Modern Methods of Sewage Disposal lamo, 

How to Drain a House lamo, 

Warnes, A. R. Coal Tar Distillation Svo, 

Warren, F. D. Handbook on Reinforced Concrete i2mo, 

Watkins, A. Photography 8vo, 

Watkins, G. P. Electrical Rates 8vo, 

Watson, E. P. Small Engines and Boilers i2mo. 

Watt, A. Electro-plating and Electro-refining of Metals Svo, 

Electro-metallurgy i2mo, 

Paper-Making Svo, 

Leather Manufacture Svo, 

The Art of Soap Making Svo, 

Electro-Plating 1 2mo, 

Webb, H. L. Guide to the Testing of Insulated Wires and Cables. i2mo, 
Wegmann, Edward. Conveyance and Distribution of Water for 

Water Supply Svo, 

Weisbach, J. A Manual of Theoretical Mechanics Svo, 

Weisbach, J., and Herrmann, G. Mechanics of Air Machinery .... Svo, 

Wells, M. B. Steel Bridge Designing Svo, 

Wells, Robt. Ornamental Confectionery i2mo, 

Weston, E. B. Loss of Head Due to Friction of Water in Pipes. .t2mo, 
Whipple, S. An Elementary and Practical Treatise on Bridge Building. 

Svo, 
White, C. H. Method^ of Metallurgical Analysis i2mo. 

White, G. F. Qualitative Chemical Analysis i2mo, 

White, G. T. Toothed Gearing i2mo, 

White, H. J. Oil Tank Steamers i2mo, 

Whitehead, S. E. Benzol Svo, 

Whitelaw, John. Surveying Svo, 

Whittaker, C. M. The Application of the Coal Tar Dyestuffs. . Svo, 

Testing of Dyestuffs in the Laboratory Svo, 

Widmer, E. J, Military Balloons Svo, 

Wilcox, R. M. Cantilever Bridges i6mo, 

Wilda, H. Steam Turbines i2mo, 

Cranes and Hoists i2mo, 

Wilkinson, H. D. Submarine Cable Laying and Repairing Svo, 

(Reprinting.) 

Williamson, J. Surveying Svo, *3 oo 

Williamson, R. S. Practical Tables in Meteorology and Hypsometry, 

4to, 2 50 



5 


, OO 


4 


OO 


5 


50 


3 


00 


2 


50 


2 


00 


*2 


50 


'■"2 


00 





75 


'6 


00 


2 


00 


I 


25 


'"5 


00 


-2, 


50 


4 


00 


3 


00 


I 


25 


5 


00 


I 


00 


4 


00 


6 


00 


4 


00 


2 


00 


I 


00 


5 


00 


*6 


00 


*3 


75 


*2 


5« 


3 


00 


2 


00 


3 


00 


3 


00 


I 


40 


^2 


00 


3 


00 


5 


00 


4 


50 


3 


00 


4 


50 


3 


00 


o 


75 


2 


00 


2 


00 



D. VAN NOSTRAND CO.'S SHORT TITLE CATALOG 29 

Wilson, F. J., and Heilbron, I. M. Chemical Theory and Calculations. 

i2mo, I 75 

Wilson, J. F. Essentials of Electrical Engineering bvo, 3 00 

Wimperis, H. E. Internal Combustion Engine 8vo, 3 50 

Application of Power to Road transport i2mo, *i 50 

Primer of Internal Combustion Engine i2mo, i 50 

A Primer of Air Navigation i2mo, 2 50 

Winchell, N, H., and A. N. Elements of Optical Mineralogy 8vo, *3 50 

Winslow, A. Stadia Surveying i6mo, o 75 

Wisser, Lieut. J. P. Explosive Materials i5mo, 

Modern Gun Cotton i6mo, o 75 

Wolff, C. E. Modern Locomotive Practice 8vo, *4 20 

Wood, De V, Luminiferous Aether i6mo, o 75 

Wood, J. K. Chemistry of Dyeing i2mo, i 00 

V "all, H., and Parkinson, B. R. Distribution by Steel Bvo, 6 00 

\. . .en, E. C. The Nitrocellulose Industry. Two Volumes 8vo, *io 00 

Technology of Cellulose Esters. In 10 volumes. 8vo. 

Vol. I. Five Parts 8vo, 40 00 

Voi. VIII. Cellulose Acetate *5 00 

Wren, H. Organometallic Compounds of Zinc and Magnesium. .i2mo, i 00 

Wright, A. C. Analysis of Oils and Allied Substances 8vo, *3 50 

Wright, A. C. Simple Method for Testing Painters' Materials. . .8vo, 2 50 

Wright, J. Testing, Fault Finding, etc., for Wiremen i6mo, o 50 

Wright, T. W. Elements of Mechanics 8vo, 3 00 

Wright, T. W., and Hayford, J. F. Adjustment of Observations. . .8vo, 4 00 
Wynne, W. E., and Sparagen, W. Handbook of Engineering Mathe- 
matics i2mo, 2 50 

y Oder, J. H., and Wharen, G. B. Locomotive Valves and Valve Gears, 

8vo, *3 00 

Young, J. E. Electrical Testing for Telegraph Engineers 8vo, *4 00 

Young, R. B. The Banket 8vo, 3 50 

Youngson. Slide Valve and Valve Gears Bvo, 2 50 

Zahner, R. Transmission of Power i6mo, 

Zeuner, A. Technical Thermodynamics. Two Volumes Bvo, 10 00 

Zimmer, G. F. Mechanical Handling and Storing of Materials. . .4to, 

(Reprinfiiig.) 
Mechanical Handling of Material and Its National Importance 

During and After the War 4to, 4 00 

Zipser, J. Textile Raw Materials Bvo, 5 00 

Zur Nedden, F. Engineering Workshop Machines and Processes. .Bvo, 2 00 



are prepared to supply, either from 

their complete stock or at 

short notice, 

Any Technical or 

Scientific Book 

In addition to publishing a very large 
and varied number of Scientific and 
Engineering Books, D. Van Nostrand 
Company have on hand the largest 
assortment in the United States of such 
books issued by American and foreign 
publishers. 



All inquiries are cheerfully and care- 
fully answered and complete catalogs 
sent free on request. 



8 Warren Street - - - New York 

5M— 8-5-21. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



021 213 081 3 



